Catalogo Geral 3vt

Catalog LV 36 November 2007
Siemens AG 2007
circuit-breakers
3VT
3VT Molded Case
Circuit-Breakers
up to 1600 A
Siemens AG 2007
SENTRON
3VT Molded Case
Circuit-Breakers
up to 1600 A
Catalog LV 36 11/2007
Introduction
1
3VT1
Molded Case Circuit-Breakers
up to 160 A
Contact your local Siemens

representative for further information
Siemens AG 2007
3VT2
up to 250 A
3VT3
up to 630 A
3VT4
up to 1000 A
3VT5
up to 1600 A
Further Accessories
Appendix
Siemens AG 2007
Niederspannungs-Schalttechnik
Explanations
Delivery times (DT)

}
Preferred type
2 working days
1 week
3 weeks
6 weeks
on request
Preferred types are available immediately from

stock, i.e. are dispatched within 24 hours.
The delivery periods apply up to the ramp at Siemens AG (products ready for
dispatch). The transport times depend on the destination and type of shipping.
Normal quantities of the products are usually delivred within the specified time following receipt of
your order at our branch.
The delivery times specified here represent the state of 11/2007. They are permanently optimized. Up-to-date information can be found at
http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall.
In exceptional cases, the actual delivery period

may differ from that specified.
Price units (PU)

The price unit defines the number of units (U) or
meters (M) to which the specified price and weight
apply.
Packaging sizes (PS)

The packaging size defines the number, e.g. of
units or meters, for outer packaging.
Only the quantity defined by the packaging size or
a multiple thereof can be ordered!
Weight
The defined weight in kg refers to the price unit
(PU).
Dimensions
All dimensions in mm.
Siemens LV 36 11/2007
For price unit please refer to price list.
Siemens AG 2007
Introduction
1/2
Siemens Automation and Drives.

Welcome
1/4
Sharpen your competitive edge.

Totally Integrated Automation
1/6
Integrated energy distribution from a

single source. Totally Integrated Power
1/8
Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution.

The basis for progressive solutions.
1/10
3VT Molded-case circuit-breakers.

The economic solution.
Siemens AG 2007
Siemens Automation and Drives.

Welcome
More than 70,000 people aiming for the same goal:

increasing your competitiveness. That's Siemens
Automation and Drives.
We offer you a comprehensive portfolio for sustained
success in your sector, whether you're talking automation engineering, drives or electrical installation systems. Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally
Integrated Power (TIP) form the core of our offering.
TIA and TIP are the basis of our integrated range of
products and systems for the manufacturing and process
industries as well as building automation. This portfolio
is rounded off by innovative services over the entire life
cycle of your plants.
Learn for yourself the potential our products and
systems offer. And discover how you can permanently
increase your productivity with us.
Your regional Siemens contact can provide more information. He or she will be glad to help.
1/2
Siemens AG 2007
1/3
Siemens AG 2007
Sharpen your competitive edge.

Totally Integrated Automation
With Totally Integrated Automation (TIA), Siemens is the only

manufacturer to offer an integrated range of products and systems for automation in all sectors - from incoming goods to outgoing goods, from the field level through the production control
level to connection with the corporate management level.
On the basis of TIA, we implement solutions that are perfectly
tailored to your specific requirements and are characterized by a
unique level of integration. This integration not only ensures significant reductions in interface costs but also guarantees the
highest level of transparency across all levels.
ERP Enterprise Resource Planning

Ethernet
Management Level
MES Manufacturing Execution Systems

Ethernet
Operations Level
SIMATIC PCS 7
Process Control (DCS)
Industrial Ethernet
Industrial Software for

Maintenance
Design and Engineering
Installation and Commissioning Modernization
and Upgrade
Operation
Control Level
SINUMERIK
Computer Numeric Control
SIMOTION
Motion Control System
Process Instrumentation
SIMATIC Sensors
Field Level
PROFIBUS PA
Totally
Integrated
Automation
1/4
HART
AS-Interface
Siemens AG 2007
It goes without saying that you profit from Totally Integrated

Automation during the entire life cycle of your plants - from the
first planning steps, through operation, right up to modernization. Consistent integration in the further development of our
products and systems guarantees a high degree of investment
security here.
Totally Integrated Automation makes a crucial contribution
towards optimizing everything that happens in the plant and
thus creates the conditions for a significant increase in productivity.
SIMATIC IT
SIMATIC WinCC
SCADA System
SIMATIC NET
Industrial
Communication
SIMATIC Controllers
Modular/Embedded/PC-based
SIMATIC HMI
Human Machine Interface
Safety Integrated
SIRIUS Industrial Controls

SENTRON Switching Devices
SIMOCODE pro
Motor Management System
PROFINET
Industrial Ethernet
PROFIBUS
SIMATIC Distributed I/O
SINAMICS Drive Systems
AS-Interface
Totally
Integrated
Power
KNX/EIB
GAMMA instabus
1/5
Siemens AG 2007
Integrated energy distribution from a single source.

Totally Integrated Power
Totally Integrated Power (TIP) brings together all the components

of electrical energy distribution into an integrated whole. Thus TIP
provides the answer to growing market demands in the planning,
construction and use of utility buildings and industrial buildings.
On the basis of TIP, we offer integrated solutions for energy distribution, from medium voltage to the power outlet. Totally Integrated Power is based here on integration in planning and configuring as well as on perfectly matched products and systems.
Communication
Load
management
HMI
Process/production
automation
UI
I cos o
P o
cos
PW
W
PROCESS FIELD BUS
Products and systems
110 kV
Planning
and configuration
1/6
Graphs
Prognoses
Siemens AG 2007
Totally Integrated Power offers communication

and software modules for connecting the energy
distribution systems to industrial automation and
building automation. This enables the implementation of significant savings potential.
Maintenance
Substation
Distribution
Maintenance
task
Message/
error
management
Selective
protection
Protocols
Power
quality
DATE:
EMPLOYEE
Cost center
Building
automation
COST CENTER
PAY PERIOD BEGINNING
PAY PERIOD ENDING
DATE
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THUR
FRI
SAT
SUN
TOTAL
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
OVERTIME
TOTAL HOURS
DATE
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THUR
FRI
SAT
SUN
TOTAL
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
OVERTIME
TOTAL HOURS
Hall 1
Distribution 3
Infeed II
Air conditioning system

checkup
Replacing circuit
breaker contacts
Replacing meters
DATE
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THUR
FRI
SAT
SUN
TOTAL
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
OVERTIME
TOTAL HOURS
CODES
V=VACATION
H=HOLIDAY
S=SICK
REGULAR
HOLIDAY
OTHER
OVER THE HOURS

TIME & ONE-HALF
SICK
VACATION
instabus EIB
1/7
Siemens AG 2007
Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution.

The basis for progressive solutions.
Extremely high demands are made on modern

low-voltage controls and distribution: users want costeffective solutions that are easy to integrate in control
cabinets, distribution boards and distributed systems
and can communicate perfectly with each other.
Siemens has the answer: SIRIUS industrial controls and
low-voltage power distribution with
SIVACON, SENTRON and SIMARIS
SIRIUS industrial controls

The SIRIUS range has everything you need for
switching, protecting and starting loads. Products
for monitoring, control, detection, commanding,
signaling and power supply round off the spectrum
of industrial controls. Combined with Totally
Integrated Automation, Safety Integrated and
ECOFAST, our product portfolio can be bundled to
create optimized systems. All in all, Siemens
provides innovative controls with modern features,
such as integrated communication and safety
technology that work to your advantage:
The basis for ground-breaking integrated solutions.
SIRIUS Safety Integrated

product range
SIRIUS modular system
1/8
Siemens AG 2007
Low-voltage power distribution with

SIVACON, SENTRON and SIMARIS
Non-residental buildings and industrial plants have one thing in
common: without electricity, everything comes to a halt. The availability, safety and cost effectiveness of the power distribution system is of utmost importance from the medium voltage supply
point through to the socket outlet. And only integrated solutions
can ensure maximum efficiency for planning, configuration and
SIVACON 8PS busbar trunking systems
operation.
The concept is called Totally Integrated Power from Siemens.
Total integration in planning and configuration creates synergies
and saves costs. Perfectly matched products and systems provide efficient engineering and reliable operation. In the field of lowvoltage power distribution, the following product ranges are
available:
SIVACON: From flexible busbar trunking systems through to safe
power distribution boards and motor control centers.
SENTRON: From well-proven switch disconnectors through to
intelligent circuit breakers.
Software for power distribution: Everything for dimensioning,
SENTRON switching devices
configuring, visualizing and controlling your power distribution.
Software for power distribution
1/9
Siemens AG 2007
3VT Molded case circuit-breakers.

The economic solution.
Today the economic success of

industrial and infrastructure projects
depends more than ever on the power
supply. This is a key aspect to the
availability, performance and productivity of all processes and systems,
and it also boosts the systems overall
economic efficiency. Thats why
choosing the right circuit-breakers
is so crucial to keeping expenses down
while, at the same time, optimizing
performance.
1/10
Siemens AG 2007
With the standard line of 3VT molded-case circuit-
Good reasons to choose
breakers (MCCB), Siemens offers an economic solution
Molded-case circuit-breakers 3VT:
for the entire power range from 10 A to 1,600 A, providng

a smart way to protect plants, transformers, generators
and motors.
Applicable in the infrastructure market as well as in the
area of industrial switchgear technology, the 3VT circuit-
7 Flexibility
All components can be combined in a modular way
Available in 3- or 4-pole version, fixed-mounted,
plug-in or withdrawable design
breakers can be used as incoming and
7 Ease of use
outgoing circuit-breakers to distribute energy in low-
User-friendliness in planning, configuration,
voltage switchgear.
The 3VT circuit-breakers are available in several designs
for system and motor protection. Thereby, each circuitbreaker is characterized by its modular design, userfriendliness as well as its high degree of safety and reliability.
installation and operation

Only a few components cover the entire spectrum
from 10 A to 1,600 A
7 Safety and reliability
Conforms to international standards and approvals
Compatibility and safe interaction between
products and systems
Molded case circuit-breakers 3VT:

The right choice for optimizing your budget
1/11
Siemens AG 2007
Notizen
7
1/12
Siemens AG 2007
3VT1 Molded Case

Circuit-Breaker up to 160 A
Catalog
2/2
2/3
2/6
2/7
2/9
Technical Information
2/11
2/35
2/37
3VT1 Molded Case

General data
Circuit breaker, switch disconnectors
Accessories and Components
Auxiliary switch and shunt trip unit
Manual-/motorized operating
mechanism
Mounting accessories
3VT1 Molded Case
Axiliary switches
Mechanical interlocking and parallel
switching
Siemens AG 2007
3VT1 Molded Case Circuit-Breakers up to 160 A

General data
Overview
Models and accessories
2/2
Siemens AG 2007

Circuit breaker, Switch disconnector
Selection and ordering data

Circuit breaker 3-pole
Circuit breaker 3-pole version contains:
2 connecting sets for connecting Cu/Al cables with crosssections 2.5 ... 95 mm2 1)
(connecting sets are installed in the circuit breaker)
insulating barriers 3VT9 100-8CE30
set of installation bolts (2 x M3 x 30)
conductor holder.
The way of connecting the power circuit must observe recommendations as well as deionization space (see page 2/17).
Characteristic M-motor: motors protection
Circuit breaker 4-pole
Circuit breaker 4-pole version contains:
connecting terminals for connection of Cu/AI cables of cross
section 2,5 ... 95 mm2 1) ( the terminals are installed in the
circuit breaker)
insulating barriers 3VT9 100-8CE30 and 3VT9 100-8CE00
2 sets of mounting bolts (4 x M3 x 30)
conductor holder (installed in the circuit breaker).
The method of power circuit connection must respect the
recommendations and also deionization spaces see page 2/17.
Characteristic L-line
protection of lines with low starting current
without Ir setting.
Circuit breaker
Characteristic D-distribution
protection of lines and transformers.
Characteristic N-only short-circuit release
without Ir setting.
Switch disconnector
Switch disconnector 3-pole
Switch disconnector 3-pole version contains:
2 connecting sets for connecting Cu/Al cables with crosssections 2.5 ... 95 mm2 1) (connecting sets are installed in the
switch disconnector)
conductor holder.
Switch disconnector 4-pole
Switch disconnector 4-pole version contains:
2 connecting sets for connection of Cu/Al cables of crosssection 2.5 ... 95 mm2 1) (connecting sets are installed in the
switch disconnector)
2 sets of mounting bolts (4 x M3 x 30)
conductor holder (installed in the switch disconnector).
1)
For other connection method use connecting parts (see page 2/9).
Rated current In
Set current of the inverse-time

delayed overload trip units L Ir
DT
Order No.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Circuit Breakers for System protection

TM, LI function, 3P
with permanently set thermal overload trip units, permanently set
short-circuit trip units
40
50
63
80
160
200
252
320
100
125
160
400
500
640
B
B
B
B
B
3VT1 704-2DA36-0AA0
3VT1 705-2DA36-0AA0
3VT1 706-2DA36-0AA0
3VT1 708-2DA36-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,043
1,043
1,062
1,062
B
B
3VT1 710-2DA36-0AA0
3VT1 712-2DA36-0AA0
3VT1 716-2DA36-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,047
1,047
1,074
with adjustable set thermal overload trip units, adjustable shortcircuit trip units
16
20
25
32
160 ... 240

200 ... 300
250 ... 375
160 ... 320
B
B
B
B
3VT1 701-2DC36-0AA0
3VT1 702-2DC36-0AA0
3VT1 792-2DC36-0AA0
3VT1 703-2DC36-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,048
1,048
1,043
1,047
40
50
63
80
200 ... 400

250 ... 500
315 ... 630
400 ... 800
B
B
B
B
3VT1 704-2DC36-0AA0
3VT1 705-2DC36-0AA0
3VT1 706-2DC36-0AA0
3VT1 708-2DC36-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,043
1,043
1,062
1,062
100
125
160
500 ... 1000

625 ... 1250
800 ... 1600
B
B
B
3VT1 710-2DC36-0AA0
3VT1 712-2DC36-0AA0
3VT1 716-2DC36-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,047
1,047
1,074
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
2/3
Siemens AG 2007

Rated current In

DT
Order No.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
TM, LI function, 3P+N, for unprotected conductor

40
50
63
80
160
200
252
320
100
125
160
400
500
640
B
B
B
B
B
3VT1 704-2EA46-0AA0
3VT1 705-2EA46-0AA0
3VT1 706-2EA46-0AA0
3VT1 708-2EA46-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,336
1,336
1,336
1,336
B
B
3VT1 710-2EA46-0AA0
3VT1 712-2EA46-0AA0
3VT1 716-2EA46-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,336
1,336
1,336
16
20
25
32
160 ... 240

200 ... 300
250 ... 375
160 ... 320
B
B
B
B
3VT1 701-2EC46-0AA0
3VT1 702-2EC46-0AA0
3VT1 792-2EC46-0AA0
3VT1 703-2EC46-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,336
1,336
1,336
1,336
40
50
63
80
200 ... 400

250 ... 500
315 ... 630
400 ... 800
B
B
B
B
3VT1 704-2EC46-0AA0
3VT1 705-2EC46-0AA0
3VT1 706-2EC46-0AA0
3VT1 708-2EC46-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,336
1,336
1,336
1,336
100
125
160
500 ... 1000

625 ... 1250
800 ... 1600
B
B
B
3VT1 710-2EC46-0AA0
3VT1 712-2EC46-0AA0
3VT1 716-2EC46-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,336
1,336
1,336
TM, LI function, 4P
40
50
63
80
160
200
252
320
B
B
B
B
3VT1 704-2EH46-0AA0
3VT1 705-2EH46-0AA0
3VT1 706-2EH46-0AA0
3VT1 708-2EH46-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,336
1,336
1,336
1,336
100
125
160
400
500
640
B
B
B
3VT1 710-2EH46-0AA0
3VT1 712-2EH46-0AA0
3VT1 716-2EH46-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,336
1,336
1,336
16
20
25
32
160 ... 240

200 ... 300
250 ... 375
160 ... 320
B
B
B
B
3VT1 701-2EJ46-0AA0
3VT1 702-2EJ46-0AA0
3VT1 792-2EJ46-0AA0
3VT1 703-2EJ46-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,336
1,336
1,336
1,336
40
50
63
80
200 ... 400

250 ... 500
315 ... 630
400 ... 800
B
B
B
B
3VT1 704-2EJ46-0AA0
3VT1 705-2EJ46-0AA0
3VT1 706-2EJ46-0AA0
3VT1 708-2EJ46-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,336
1,336
1,336
1,380
100
125
160
500 ... 1000

625 ... 1250
800 ... 1600
B
B
B
3VT1 710-2EJ46-0AA0
3VT1 712-2EJ46-0AA0
3VT1 716-2EJ46-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,336
1,336
1,336
TM, I function, 3P
without overload trip unit, with adjustable short-circuit trip unit
32
40
50
63
160 ... 320

200 ... 400
250 ... 500
315 ... 630
B
B
B
B
3VT1 703-2DB36-0AA0
3VT1 704-2DB36-0AA0
3VT1 705-2DB36-0AA0
3VT1 706-2DB36-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,043
1,043
1,048
1,048
80
100
125
160
400 ... 800

500 ... 1000
625 ... 1250
800 ... 1600
B
B
B
B
3VT1 708-2DB36-0AA0
3VT1 710-2DB36-0AA0
3VT1 712-2DB36-0AA0
3VT1 716-2DB36-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,048
1,050
1,059
1,048
TM, I function, 3P+N, for unprotected conductor

without overload trip unit, with adjustable short-circuit trip unit
2/4
32
40
50
63
160 ... 320

200 ... 400
250 ... 500
315 ... 630
B
B
B
B
3VT1 703-2EB46-0AA0
3VT1 704-2EB46-0AA0
3VT1 705-2EB46-0AA0
3VT1 706-2EB46-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,336
1,336
1,336
1,336
80
100
125
160
400 ... 800

500 ... 1000
625 ... 1250
800 ... 1600
B
B
B
B
3VT1 708-2EB46-0AA0
3VT1 710-2EB46-0AA0
3VT1 712-2EB46-0AA0
3VT1 716-2EB46-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,336
1,336
1,336
1,336
Siemens AG 2007

DT
Order No.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Circuit Breakers for Starter combination

TM, LI function, 3P
with adjustable thermal overload trip units, permanently set shortcircuit trip units
16
20
25
32
160 ... 240

200 ... 300
250 ... 375
160 ... 320
B
B
B
B
3VT1 701-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 702-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 792-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 703-2DM36-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,048
1,048
1,043
1,043
40
50
63
80
200 ... 400

250 ... 500
315 ... 630
400 ... 800
B
B
B
B
3VT1 704-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 705-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 706-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 708-2DM36-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,043
1,043
1,062
1,059
100
500 ... 1000
3VT1 710-2DM36-0AA0
1 unit
1,047
TM, LI function, 4P
with adjustable thermal overload trip units, permanently set shortcircuit trip units
32
40
50
63
160 ... 320

200 ... 400
250 ... 500
315 ... 630
B
B
B
B
3VT1 703-2EG46-0AA0
3VT1 704-2EG46-0AA0
3VT1 705-2EG46-0AA0
3VT1 706-2EG46-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,336
1,336
1,336
1,336
80
100
125
160
400 ... 800

500 ... 1000
625 ... 1250
800 ... 1600
B
B
B
B
3VT1 708-2EG46-0AA0
3VT1 710-2EG46-0AA0
3VT1 712-2EG46-0AA0
3VT1 716-2EG46-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,336
1,336
1,336
1,336
Switch disconnector
Non-automatic molded case circuit-breaker without overload trip
unit, without short-circuit trip unit
160
3-pole
3VT1 716-2DE36-0AA0
1 unit
1,043
160
4-pole
3VT1 716-2EE46-0AA0
1 unit
1,336
2/5
Rated current In
Siemens AG 2007

Rated control supply voltage Us

AC 50/60 Hz
DC
DT Order No.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Auxiliary switch
Auxiliary-signal state of the main contacts
AC/DC 60 ... 250 V
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V
B
B
3VT9 100-2AB10
3VT9 100-2AB20
1 unit
1 unit
0,010
0,010
AC/DC 60 ... 250 V

AC/DC 5 ... 60 V
B
B
3VT9 100-2AH10
3VT9 100-2AH20
1 unit
1 unit
0,010
0,010
AC/DC 24, 48 V
AC 110, 230 V/DC 110, 220 V
AC 230, 400 V/DC 220 V
B
B
B
3VT9 100-1SC00
3VT9 100-1SD00
3VT9 100-1SE00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,050
0,050
0,050
B
B
B
3VT9 100-1UC00
3VT9 100-1UD00
3VT9 100-1UE00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,050
0,050
0,050
Signal tripping of circuit breaker by overcurrent release
Shunt trip units
Undervoltage trip units

AC/DC 24, 48 V
AC 110, 230 V/DC 110, 220 V
AC 230, 400 V/DC 220 V
2/6
Siemens AG 2007

Manual-/motorized operating mechanism

Rotary operating mechanism unit must be fitted with:
for controlling on circuit breaker
- Hand drive lever 3VT9 100-3HE/HF..
for controlling on switchgear door
- extension shaft 3VT9 100-3HJ..
- hand drive bearing 3VT9 100-3H.00
Rotary operating mechanism unit for controlling on right/left

side must be fitted with:
extension shaft 3VT9 100-3HJ..
hand drive bearing 3VT9 100-3HG/HH..
hand drive lever 3VT9 100-3HE/HF..
Version
DT Order No.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Operating mechanisms
Hand drive unit
no locking
lockable
grey
grey
B
B
3VT9 100-3HA10
3VT9 100-3HA20
1 unit
1 unit
0,079
0,079
lockable
yellow
3VT9 100-3HB20
1 unit
0,079
for controlling on right side, no locking
B
B
3VT9 100-3HD10
1 unit
0,137
3VT9 100-3HC10
1 unit
0,137
for controlling on left side, no locking
Hand drive lever

no locking
lockable
black
black
B
B
3VT9 100-3HE10
3VT9 100-3HE20
1 unit
1 unit
0,019
0,019
lockable
red
3VT9 100-3HF20
1 unit
0,019
B
B
3VT9 100-3HG10
3VT9 100-3HG20
1 unit
1 unit
0,042
0,042
B
B
3VT9 100-3HH10
3VT9 100-3HH20
1 unit
1 unit
0,042
0,042
3VT9 100-3HJ10
1 unit
0,113
3VT9 100-3HJ20
1 unit
0,092
Hand drive bearing

Used in combination with black hand drive lever 3VT9 100-3HE10 or
3VT9 100-3HE20
protection IP40
protection IP66
black
black
Used in combination with red hand drive lever 3VT9 100-3HF20

protection IP40
protection IP66
yellow
yellow
Extension shaft
length 350 mm
lenght 199 ... 352 mm
telescopic
2/7
Rotary operating mechanism
Siemens AG 2007

Version
DT Order No.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Interlocks and parallel switching

Mechanical interlocking
3VT9 100-8LA00
1 unit
0,089
3VT9 100-8LB00
1 unit
0,109
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
must be fitted with:

2 x 3VT9 100-3HA/HB/HC/HD.. hand drive units
(cannot be combined with side control hand drive unit)
2 x 3VT9 100-3HE/HF.. hand drive levers
Mechanical parallel switching
2 x 3VT9 100-3HA/HB/HC/HD.. hand drive units
(cannot be combined with hand drive unit for side control)
1 x 3VT9 100-3HE/HF.. hand drive levers

AC 50/60 Hz
DC
DT Order No.
kg
Motorized operating mechanisms

Side motor drive
2/8
AC/DC 24 V
AC/DC 48 V
AC/DC 110 V
AC 230 V/DC 220 V
B
B
B
B
3VT9 100-3MA00
3VT9 100-3MB00
3VT9 100-3MD00
3VT9 100-3ME00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,900
0,900
0,900
0,900
Siemens AG 2007

Version
Conducter
cross-sections S
Type of connection
DT Order No.
PS*
mm2
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Connecting parts for fixed-mounted circuit-breakers

3-pole version
Front connection
--
Cu/Al -busbars,
cable lugs
3VT9 100-4TA30
1 unit
0,045
Circular conductor terminal
2 x 25 ... 120
Cu/Al - cable
3VT9 100-4TF30
1 unit
0,180
Cu/Al-busbars,
cable lugs
3VT9 100-4RC30
1 unit
0,320
Terminals cover included, protection IP20
Rear connection
Auxiliary connection terminal
1.5 ... 2.5; 4 ... 6
Cu flexible conductor B
3VT9 100-4TN30
1 unit
0,010
Front connection bars
1.5 ... 2.5; 4 ... 6
Cu/Al-busbars,
cable lugs
3VT9 100-4ED30
1 unit
0,103
--
Cu/Al-busbars,
cable lugs
3VT9 100-4TA00
1 unit
0,015
2 x 25 ... 120
Cu/Al-cable
3VT9 100-4TF40
1 unit
0,250
Cu/Al-busbars,
cable lugs
3VT9 100-4RC00
1 unit
0,080
Cu flexible
conductor
3VT9 100-4TN00
1 unit
0,010
4-pole version
Front connection
connection of one side of the circuit
breaker requires completion by the
connecting set 3VT9 100-4TA30
Circular conductor terminal
Terminals cover included, protection IP20

supplied except as a whole connecting set
Rear connection
connection of one side of the circuit breaker requires
completion by the connecting set 3VT9 100-4RC30
Auxiliary connection terminal
connection of one side of the circuit
breaker requires completion by the
connecting set 3VT9 100-4TN30
1,5 ... 2,5; 4 ... 6
2/9
Siemens AG 2007

Version
Conducter
cross-sections S
Connection
DT Order No.
PS*
mm2
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Accessories
3-pole version
Insulation barriers for circuit-breakers
3VT9 100-8CE30
1 unit
0,030
3VT9 100-8CA30
1 unit
0,050
included with each circuit breaker or Switch disconnector

in case connection is reversed (supply to terminals N,2,4,6), it is necessary
to install these barriers also on the lower side
For more information, see page 2/17.
Connection cover IP20

increases degree of protection of connection point to IP20, e.g. when used
with cable lugs.
3VT9 100-8HL00
Locking devices for toggle levers
on req.
Enables locking of circuit breaker or Switch disconnector in switched off

manually position
Locking is possible using padlock with shank diameter up to 3 ... 4 mm.
4-pole version
Insulation barriers for circuit-breakers
3VT9 100-8CE00
1 unit
0,020
3VT9 100-8CA40
1 unit
0,080
3VT9 100-3MF00
1 unit
0,100
3VT9 100-4PP30
1 unit
0,050
included in every supply of circuit breaker/switch disconnector

in case circuit breaker/switch disconnector connection is reversed (supply
to terminals N,2,4,6), it is necessary in most cases to install these barriers
also on the lower side, see page 11 for detailed information.
Connection cover IP20

increases the degree of protection of the connecting point to IP20, e.g. in use
of cable lugs
Extension cable to motorized operating mechanism
Mounting adapter
3-pole version
For mounting on 35 mm DIN rail
Dimensions, see page 2/23.
2/10
Siemens AG 2007

Specifications
Circuit breakers
Order No.
3VT1 7..-2..36-0AA0 3VT1 716-2DE36-0AA0 3VT1 7..-2..46-0AA03)
Switch disconnector
3VT1 716-2EE46-0AA0
Standards
EN 60 947-2,
IEC 947-2
EN 60 947-3,IEC 947-3
EN 60 947-3,IEC 947-3
Circuit breakers
EN 60 947-2, IEC 947-2
Switch Disconnector
Approval marks
3
Number of poles
Rated current In
16 ... 1602)
--
16 ... 1602)
--
Rated normal current Iu
16 ... 1602)
160
16 ... 1602)
160
Rated operating current Ie
--
160
--
160
Rated operating voltage Ue
max. AC 690
Rated frequency fn
Hz
50/60
Rated pulse withstand voltage Uimp
kV
Rated insulation voltage Ui
690
Utilization category
selectivity AC 690 V
switching mode
max. AC 690
max. AC 440
A
AC-3 (16 ... 100 A)
AC-2 (100 ... 160 A)
-AC-23 A
A
AC-3 (16 ... 100 A)
AC-2 (100 ... 160 A)
-DC-22 A
AC-23 A
Rated short-time withstand current Icw /t
--
2 kA/ 1 s
--
2 kA/1 s
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (rms value)1) Icu/Ue
6 kA/AC 690 V
12 kA/AC 500 V
25 kA/AC 415 V
40 kA/AC 230 V
--
13kA/DC 440V
(W max. 5 ms)
6 kA/AC 690 V
12 kA/AC 500 V
25 kA/AC 415 V
40 kA/AC 230 V
--
Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity (rms value) Ics/Ue
3 kA/AC 690 V
6 kA/AC 500 V
13 kA/AC 415 V
20 kA/AC 230 V
--
13kA/DC 440V
(W max. 5 ms)
3 kA/AC 690 V
6 kA/AC 500 V
13 kA/AC 415 V
20 kA/AC 230 V
Rated short-circuit making capacity

(peak value) Icm/Ue
52 kA/AC 415 V
2.8 kA/AC 415 V
52 kA/AC 415 V
Off-time at Icu
ms
Losses per 1 pole at In = 160 A
Mechanical endurance
cycles 20 000
Electrical endurance (Ue = AC 415 V )
cycles 6 000
Frequency of switching
cycles/ 120
hr
Operating force
--
2.8 kA/AC 415 V
see table, page 2/14 15
55
Front-side device protection
IP40
Terminals protection
IP20
65
Operating conditions
Reference ambient temperature
Ambient temperature range
40
-40 ... +55
dry and tropical climate
Working environment
Pollution degree
Max. elevation
2000
Seismic resistance
Hz
3g (8 ... 50 )
Design modifications
Front/rear connection
Plug-in design
Withdrawable design
Accessories
Switches - auxiliary/relative/signal/early
///
Shunt trip/with signal switch
Undervoltage release/with early switch/with

signal switch
//
Front hand drive/side drive right/left
//
Mechanical interlocking to the hand drive,

by Bowden
Motor drive/with operations counter
+/+
Locking-type lever
available,
-- unavailable,
+ in preparation
1)
2)
In case circiut breaker connection is reversed (input terminals N, 2, 4, 6

output terminals N, 1, 3, 5), Icu does not change.
Ranges of rated currents vary according to characteristics, see page D22.
2/11
3-pole version
Siemens AG 2007

Specifications 3-pole version
Recommended cross-section of cables, busbars and
flexibars
10
Rated current In
3VT9 100-1S...
State of the main contacts
1
3VT9 100-2AH10
1 ... 6
3VT9 100-2AB10
Accessory compartment
Cicuit breaker state
Lever positon of circuit
States of switches in circuit breaker/Switch disconnector
Switched on
Switched off manually
Switched off by the overcurrent

release or INSEPCTION button
Switched off by auxiliary release
Switched off by TEST button
Conductor cross-section S Busbars W x H

Cu
AI
Cu
mm2
mm2
mm
16
20
25
2,5
2,5
4
----
----
32
40
50
63
6
10
10
16
--16
25
-----
80
100
125
160
25
35
50
70
35
50
95
120
-16 x 2; 12 x 3
16 x 4; 12 x 4
16 x 5; 12 x 6
Note: 0 - contact open, 1 - contact closed.

Connecting and installing
Power circuit
Is connected using Cu or AI busbars or cable, and possibly
cables with cable lugs.
Connection sets are produced to provide greater connecting
options, see page 2/4.
Generally, conductors from the apply are connected to input
terminals 1, 3, 5 and conductors from the load to terinals
2, 4, 6. But it is possible to reverse the connection
(exchanging input and output terminals without limiting rated
short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity Icu).
In case of reversed connection, circuit breaker/Switch disconnector must be fitted with 3VT9 100-8CE30 insulating barriers
also on the side of terminals 2, 4, 6 (see page 2/17 for detailed
information).
We recommand painting the connection busbars.
Input and output connectors/busbars must be mechanically
reinforced in order to avoid transferring electrodynamic forces
to the circuit breaker during short circuiting.
The way of connecting the power circuit must observe the
deionization space of the circuit breaker/Switch disconnector
(see page 2/17).
Location of accessory compartments in 3VT1 circuit breaker/switch

disconnector. When using one of accessory compartment 4, 5 or 6 neither a shunt trip nor an undervoltage release should be used.
Auxiliary circuits
Switches, shunt trips or undervoltage releases are connected
using flexible Cu conductors with cross-section 0.5 ... 1 mm2
directly to terminals on these devices.
Connection sets specification

Order No.
Maximum
permitted
current
Imax
Cable-ranges of connection cross-section S

Cable type
Sector-shaped
conductor, stranded
Sector-shaped
conductor, solid
Round conductor,
stranded
Round conductor,
solid
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
3VT9 100-4TF30
3VT9 100-4TA30
3VT9 100-4RC30
160
160
160
2 x 25 ... 120
2 x 25 ... 120
2 x 25 ... 120
2 x 25 ... 120
3VT9 100-4TN30
3VT9 100-4ED30
10/16
160
1,5 ... 2,5/4 ... 6
2/12
Max. width
busbars and
cable lugs
Technical information
mm
16
16
-30
pg. D17
pg. D18
-pg. D18
Siemens AG 2007

Specifications 4-pole version
1 ... 9
10
Rated
Conductor cross-section S
current In
3VT9 100-1UC/UD/UE..
3VT9 100-1SC/SD/SE..
3VT9 100-2AH10
State of the main

contacts
3VT9 100-2AB10
Lever positon of circuit
Switched on
Switched off manually

release or INSEPCTION button
Switched off by auxiliary release
Switched off by TEST button
Recommended cross-section of cables, busbars and

flexibars
States of switches in circuit breaker/switch disconnector
Busbars W x H
Cu
AI
Cu
AI
mm2
mm2
mm
mm
16
20
25
2,5
2,5
4
----
----
----
32
40
50
63
6
10
10
16
--16
25
-----
-----
80
100
125
160
25
35
50
70
35
50
95
120
-16 x 2; 12 x 3
16 x 4; 12 x 4
16 x 5; 12 x 6
-16 x 4; 12 x 4
16 x 5; 12 x 6
--
Note: 0 contact open, 1 contact closed.

Connecting and installing
The power circuit
is connected by Cu, AI busbars, or by cables with cable lugs.
for extensions of connection options, use connecting sets see
page 2/9
as a rule. the power supply conductors are connected to input
terminals N, 1, 3, 5 and load conductors to terminals
N, 2, 4, 6; however it is possible touse reverse connection
(exchanging input and output terminals without limiting rated
short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity Icu)
in reverse connection it is necessary to complete the circuit
breaker/Switch disconnector with insulating barriers
3VT9 100-8CE30 and 3VT9 100-8CE00 also on the side of terminals N, 2, 4, 6 for detail information see page 2/18
we recommend to coat the busbars with paint
input and output connectors/busbars must be reinforced to
eliminate transfer of electrodynamic forces into the circuit breakers/Switch disconnector, see page 2/18
the power circuit connection must respect the de-ionization
space of the circuit breakers/Switch disconnector,
see page 2/18.
Auxiliary circuits
Switches, shunt trips or undervoltage releases are connected by
flexible Cu conductors of cross-section 0,5 ... 1 mm2 in the terminals directly on these devices
Specification of connecting sets

Order No.
Maximum
permitted
current
Imax
Cable-ranges of connection cross-section S

Sector-shaped
conductor, stranded
Sector-shaped
conductor, solid
Round conductor,
stranded
Round conductor,
solid
Cable type
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
3VT9 100-4TF40
3VT9 100-4TA00
160
160
2 x 25 ... 120
2 x 25 ... 120
2 x 25 ... 120
2 x 25 ... 120
3VT9 100-4RC00
3VT9 100-4TN00
160
10/16
1,5 ... 2,5/4 ... 6
Max. width
busbars and
cable lugs
Technical information
mm
16
16
pg. 12
pg. 13
2/13
Siemens AG 2007

Wiring diagram
Circuit breaker with accessories
Auxiliary starters
Main circuit
Switches
auxiliary
auxiliary
2.2
2.4
TEST
cavity no. 4
circuit breaker
main contacts
trip-free mechanism
overcurrent release
TEST
TEST push button
INSPECTION
INSPECTION push button
3VT9 100-1U.00
undervoltage release
3VT9 100-1S.00
shunt trip
Power losses (per 1 pole)

Rated current In
Powerloss per pole of circuit-breaker

at maximum current P
16
20
25
4
4
4
32
40
50
4
4
5
63
80
100
6
7
10
125
160
15
15
TEST push button - by pressing you will switch off the circuit
breaker/Switch disconnector, including to actuate the auxiliary
switches.
INSPECTION push button - by pressing you will simulate tripping
of the circuit breaker by the overcurrent release, including to
actuate the auxiliary switches and signal switch. Pressing
requires a suitable instrument, such as a wire with diameter of
about 1 mm.
Signalling of switching off by the overcurrent release
After switching off of the circuit breaker by the overcurrent
release, it will display the indicator
cavity no. 1
1.3VT9 100-2AB10
or
cav. 2
cav. 3
TEST-Taste
3.1
2.1
1.1
REVIZE
2
NSO0_00523
cavity no. 5
4.1
5.1
I>
3.3VT9 100-2AB10
cavity no. 6
V
1.3VT9 100-2AH10
2/14
1.2
1.4
1.2
1.4
4.2
4.4
5.2
5.4
6.2
6.4
2.3VT9 100-2AB10
cavity no. 10
signal or aux.
6.1
6.3VT9 100-2AB10
B1
10.Y1
3VT9 100-1S.00
B2
or
A2
U<
10.Y2
A1
3VT9 100-1U.00
10.Y1
auxiliary
3.2
3.4
or
1.1
Switches
10.Y2
3-pole version
Siemens AG 2007

4-pole version
Circuit breaker with accessories
MP control circuit
Q3
L+
ON
OFF
B
auxiliary
auxiliary
cavity no. 9
7.1
8.1
J
2
X3
9.1
MP
3VT9 100-2AB.0
3VT9 100-2AB.0
A
3VT9 100-2AB.0
X3
7.2
7.4
8.2
8.4
Switches
auxiliary
9.2
9.4
Motor drive
cavity no. 8
cavity no. 7
B
HL1
N-
HL2
HL3
HL4
MP control circuit, signalling
3.2
3.4
cav. 3
NSO0_00001
3VT9 100-2AB.0
cavity no. 1
3.1
cav. 2
3VT9 100-2AB.0
or
2.1
REVIZE
1.1
N 2 4 6
1.1
B2
10.Y2
I>
A2
2.2
2.4
A1
3VT9 100-1S.00
1.2
1.4
1.2
1.4
cavity no. 10
auxiliary
TEST
or
10.Y2
3VT9 100-2AB.0
cavity no. 4
auxiliary
3VT9 100-2AB.0
cavity no. 5
4.1
3VT9 100-2AB.0
5.1
3VT9 100-2AB.0
6.1
U<
N 1 3 5
3VT9 100-2AH.0
J
cavity no. 6
Switches
Main circuit
signal or aux.
10.Y1
auxiliary
A1
3VT9 100-1U.00
auxiliary
10.Y1
auxiliary
4.2
4.4
Auxiliary starters
5.2
5.4
or
6.2
6.4
Switches
2/15
Siemens AG 2007

Wiring diagram description

MP
motor drive-3VT9 100-3M.00
motor
gearbox
X3
connector for connection of control and signal circuits
recommended connection of control circuits-is not part of MP
ON
push button
OFF
push button
Q3
motor drive circuit breaker-see page 22
circuit breaker 3VT1
main contacts
thermomagnetic overcurrent release

3P+N (3 poles protected, N pole unprotected
4P (all four poles protected)
trip-free mechanism
TEST
release test push button
REVIZE
release revision push button
3VT9 100-1U.00
3VT9 100-1S.00
shunt trip
HL1
remote failure signalling (unreliable making or breaking), permissible load max. 10 W1)
HL2
signalling of circuit breaker lever wound up position, permissible load max. 10 W1)
HL3
signalling of opening of the front safty cover of the drive, permissible load max. 10 W1)
HL4
signalling of extension of the drive locking bar, permissible load max. 10 W1)
1)
voltage on termianls 6, 7,7 8, is the same as Un of the motor drive.
2/16
Siemens AG 2007

Dimension drawings
3-pole version
H = 30
F=0
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
G=0
130
ON
3VT9 100-8CE30
100
A = 50
A1 = 100
A2 = 150
TEST
TEST
B=
20
NSO0_00012
TEST
B = 20
75
E = 70
75
100
G = 40
B = 20
Use of insulating and terminal covers with circuit breakers and

switch disconnectors
>15
Fixed Design
front connection
- terminals 1, 3, 5
It is always necessary to use 3VT9 100-8CE30 insulating
barriers or a 3VT9 100-8CA30 terminal cover (when using
3VT9 100-4TF30 connections sets for connecting circuit
breaker/switch disconnector, the terminal cover is included
in the connecting set).
- terminals 2, 4, 6
It is always necessary to use 3VT9 100-8CE30 insulating
barriers or a 3VT9 100-8CA30 terminal cover if the circuit
breaker/switch disconnector is connected to the source
using terminals 2, 4, 6 (when using 3VT9 100-4TF30 connections sets for connecting circuit breaker/switch disconnector,
the terminal cover is included in the connecting set).
rear connection
- Insulating barriers and covers need not be used.
Reference Size
mm
A
50
minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switch disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for
connections using insulated conductors, cables, flexibars
or with rear connection)
A1
100
minimum insulation length of bare conductors (using

3VT9 100-8CE30 insulating barriers from 50 mm to max.
100 mm, or by adding additional insulation for the conductors with barriers to obtain at least A1 value)
A2
150
minimum distance:
between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for uninsulated conductors and busbars)
between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and busbar
between two circuit breakers/switch disconnectors situated vertically above one another
between uninsulated connections of two circuit
breakers/switch disconnectors above one another
C, D, E, F, 30
G
minimum distance between the circuit

breaker/switch disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall
minimum distance between uninsulated conductors
2/17
Siemens AG 2007

4-pole version
H = 30
F=0
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
G=0
130
ON
3VT9 100-8CE30
100
A = 50
A1 = 100
A2 = 150
TEST
TEST
B=
20
NSO0_00012
TEST
B = 20
75
E = 70
75
100
G = 40
B = 20
Reference Size
mm
50
minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switch disconnctor and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for
connection by means of insulated conductors, cables, flexibars or connection)
A1
100

from 50 mm to max. 100 mm, or by means of additional
insulating of conductors over the barriers at least to the
value of A1)
A2
150
minimum distance:
between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and a busbar
between two circuit breaker/switch disconnectors installed vertically one above the other
between uninsulated leads of two circuit breakers/switch
disconnectors
>15
Use of insulating and terminal covers with circuit breakers and

switch disconnectors
Fixed design
front connection
- terminals N, 1, 3, 5
insulating barriers 3VT9 100-8CE30 and 3VT9 100-8CE00 or
terminal cover 3VT9 100-8CA40 shall always be used (if connecting sets 3VT9 100-4TF40 are used to connect the circuit
breaker/switch disconnector, the terminal cover is included
in the connecting set)
- terminals N, 2, 4, 6
insulating barriers 3VT9 100-8CE30 and 3VT9 100-8CE00 or
terminal cover 3VT9 100-8CA40 shall always be used the
circuit breaker/switch disconnector is connected to power
supply via terminals N, 2, 4, 6 (if connecting sets
3VT9 100-4TF40 are used to connect the circuit breaker/switch disconnector, the terminal cover is included in the
connecting set)
rear connection
- it is necessary to use insulating barriers or covers
2/18
C, D, E, F, 30
G
minimum distance between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design
3-pole version
98
Fixed design, front connection
6.4
68.5
2
20
1.5
38
111
93
100
118
130
ON
OFF
100
2
13 14
45
18
12
25
20
25
4x4
15
4.6
NSO0_00018
R5
40.5
63
TEST
25
25
70
80
75
Fixed design, front connection (connecting set 3VT9 100-4TF30)

25
25
25
100
111
154
186
202
220
136
168
ON
OFF
NSO0_00020
TEST
2 x 16.2
75
31
20
68.5
2/19
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, front connection (connecting set 3VT9 100-4ED30
10.5
22
25
100
100
111
130
183
ON
OFF
TEST
4x4
15
NSO0_00026
75
25
10
36.5
25
20
20
37.5
25
37.5
25
25
87
15
25
25
42
13.2
25
5.5
Fixed design, rear connection (connecting set 3VT9 100-4RC30)
25
100
111
100
130
ON
OFF
TEST
35
2/20
9.5
75
70
2x4
NSO0_00023
80
12
6.4
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, manually operated drive
1
3VT1
3VT9 100-3HA.0, -3HB.0
3VT9 100-3HE.0, 3HF.0
22.5
22.5
NSO0_00029
75
90
63
TEST
98
45
27.5
29
Fixed design, manually operated drive with adjustable lever

1
NSO0_00031
75
1 3VT1
6
45
3 3VT9 100-3HJ.0
4
4 3VT9 100-3HE.0, -3HF.0

5 3VT9 100-3HG.0, -3HH.0
6 Outside surface of
22.5
45
22.5
2 3VT9 100-3HA.0, -3HB.0
cabinet door
90
63
TEST
45
27.5
98
124 ... 448 (-3HJ10)
297 ... 450 (-3HJ20)
Cabinet door adaptation

min.50
32
32
2/21
Siemens AG 2007

NSO0_00035
Fixed design, side hand drive - right
90
1 3VT1
2 3VT9 100-3HC10
3 3VT9 100-3HJ.0
5
45
4 3VT9 100-3HE.0, -3HF.0

5 3VT9 100-3HG.0, -3HH.0
45
cabinet door
63
TEST
3
4
1
26.6
45.5 ... 369.5 (3HJ10)
218.5 ... 371.5 (3HJ20)
114.5
50
Fixed design, side hand drive - left
NSO0_00036
75
2
1 3VT1
2 3VT9 100-3HC10
3 3VT9 100-3HJ.0
45
4 3VT9 100-3HE.0, -3HF.0

5 3VT9 100-3HG.0, -3HH.0
45
cabinet door
63
TEST
3
4
90
1
49.9
46.6
65.5 ... 389.5 (3HJ10)
238.5 ... 391.5 (3HJ20)

3
32
32
2/22
114.5
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, installation on DIN rail (width 35 mm )
67
86
45
130
ON
OFF
2.7
NSO0_00043
40.5
TEST
2
72
82
Fixed design and side motor drive

94.4
40.5
45
130
80
150
70
2/23
Siemens AG 2007

4-pole version
98
68.5
2
20
18
12
6.4
38
111
93
100
118
130
ON
OFF
100
2
13 14
45
1.5
25
25
100
20
25
M3
15
4.6
NSO0_00014
R5
40.5
63
TEST
50
25
70
80
25
25
25
87
25
25
15
25
25
42
13.2
25
5.5
100
111
100
ON
OFF
TEST
35
70
9.5
100
M3
NSO0_00016
80
12
6.4
25
25
25
42
100
111
130
25
25
87
111
100
130
25
25
13.2
25
5.5
35
9.5
.4
12
80
2/24
70
100
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, front hand drive
1
100
3VT1
3VT9 100-3HA.0, -3HB.0
3VT9 100-3HE.0, 3HF.0
22.5
22.5
NSO0_00028
75
90
63
TEST
98
45
52.5
29
Fixed design, front hand drive with adjustable lever

1
NSO0_00525
100
1 3VT1
6
3
22.5
45
3 3VT9 100-3HJ.0
5
4
4 3VT9 100-3HE.0, -3HF.0

5 3VT9 100-3HG.0, -3HH.0
cabinet door
45
52.5
90
63
22.5
45
2 3VT9 100-3HA.0, -3HB.0
98
124 ... 448 (-3HJ10)
297 ... 450 (-3HJ20)

min.50
32
32
2/25
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, side hand drive - right
100
1 3VT1
2
2 3VT9 100-3HD10
90
3 3VT9 100-3HJ.0
5
45
4 3VT9 100-3HE.0, -3HF.0

5 3VT9 100-3HG.0, -3HH.0
45
cabinet door
3
NSO0_00032
63
TEST
4
1
62.5
49.9
26.6
45.5 ... 369.5 (3HJ10)
218.5 ... 371.5 (3HJ20)
114.5
Fixed design, side hand drive - left
NSO0_00033
100
2
1 3VT1
2 3VT9 100-3HD10
3 3VT9 100-3HJ.0
45
4 3VT9 100-3HE.0, -3HF.0

5 3VT9 100-3HG.0, -3HH.0
45
cabinet door
63
TEST
3
4
90
1
49.9
114.5
37.5
46.6
65.5 ... 389.5 (3HJ10)
238.5 ... 391.5 (3HJ20)

3
32
32
Fixed design, installation on DIN rail (width 35 mm )
67
86
45
130
ON
OFF
40.5
NSO0_00038
2.7
TEST
2
72
82
2/26
Siemens AG 2007

Arrangement of circuit breaker/switch disconnectors with mechanical interlocking 3VT9 100-8LA00
NSO0_00039
TEST
148.2
Arrangement of circuit breaker/switch disconnectors with mechanical parallel switching 3VT9 100-8LB00
NSO0_00041
TEST
max.6
min 0
148.2
130
Fixed design and side motor drive
NSO0_00044
TEST
175
2/27
Siemens AG 2007

Overcurrent releases 3-pole version
Tripping characteristic adjustment
Overcurrent release is built into circuit breaker. Release cannot

be demounted and exchanged.
Circuit breakers with characteristic
Tripping characteristics
Circuit breakers are supplied with four types of tripping characteristics. They are designated with the letters:
L - lines
protecting lines with low starting currents
L
I
D - distribution
protecting lines and transformers
Circuit breaker designation is set according to the requested

rated current and protection characteristics.
For example: Motor protection with In = 32 A.
Order No. designation will be 3VT1 703-3DM36-0AA0.
Setting of tripping characteristic:
Dependent release (thermal) L (for circuit breakers with
characteristics D and M). Dependent release (Overload
protection Ir (instantaneous)), is adjusted in a continuous
range using the
Ir adjustment dial on the overcurrent release. The Ir adjustment range is 0.75 ... 1 In.
Independent instantaneous release (short-circuit trip) I
(for circuit breakers with characteristics D and N). With an
independent instantaneous release (short circuit protection Ii),
adjustment is possible in a continuous range. All values are given in the table.
2/28
M
I
L
Ir
NSO0_00048
N - short-circuit release only

3VT1 circuit breakers with characteristic L have a given and
fixed rated current value. The circuit breakers are produced
with In values in a standardised series of currents from 40 A to
160 A (see Ranges of overcurrent release and their possible
setting). Short-circuit release is fixed at 4 x In.
3VT1 circuit breakers with characteristic D have the option
of setting to a reduced current in a range of approximately
0.75 ... 1 In. The circuit breakers are produced with In values
in a standardised series of currents from 16 A to 160 A (see
Ranges of overcurrent release and their possible setting).
Short-circuit release is adjustable. Adjustment values are given in the table.
3VT1 circuit breakers with characteristic M have the option
of setting to a reduced current in a range of approximately
0.75 ... 1 In The circuit breakers are produced with In values in
a standardised series of currents from 16 A to 100 A (see
Ranges of overcurrent release and their possible setting).
Short-circuit release is fixed at the setting 10 x In.
3VT1 circuit breakers with characteristic N have only circuit
release. They are produced with In values in a standardised
series of currents from 32 A to 160 A. Short-circuit release is
adjustable. Values are given in the table.
NSO0_00502
M - motor
protecting motors
D
I
L
t
Ir
Ii
NSO0_00500
Characteristics
Siemens AG 2007

N
Setting IR and Ii for circuit breakers with characteristic D

Adjusting IR
Adjusting Ii
Ii
NSO0_00216
Derating in accordance with ambient temperature
Rated
current In
Permissible load
+ 55 C
+ 40 C
+20 C
-15 C
16
20
25
15
19
23
16
20
25
17
22
28
19
25
31
32
40
50
29
38
48
32
40
50
36
45
56
41
53
66
63
80
100
125
57
73
91
110
63
80
100
125
69
88
105
132
83
100
122
145
Ranges of overcurrent release and their possible setting at 40 C

Rated
current In
3VT1 7..-2DA36-0AA0
3VT1 7..-2DC36-0AA0
3VT1 7..-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 7..-2DB36-0AA0
Overload
protection Ir
Short circuit
protection Ii
(instantaneous)
Overload
protection Ir
Short circuit
protection Ii
(instantaneous)
Overload
protection Ir
Short circuit
protection Ii
(instantaneous)
Overload
protection Ir
Short circuit
protection Ii
(instantaneous)
16
20
25
----
----
12,5 ... 16
16 ... 20
20 ... 25
160 ... 240

200 ... 300
250 ... 375
12,5 ... 16
16 ... 20
20 ... 25
160
200
250
----
----
32
40
50
-40
50
-160
200
25 ... 32
32 ... 40
40 ... 50
160 ... 320

200 ... 400
250 ... 500
25 ... 32
32 ... 40
40 ... 50
320
400
500
----
160 ... 320

200 ... 400
250 ... 500
63
80
100
125
160
63
80
100
125
160
252
320
400
500
640
50 ... 63
63 ... 80
80 ... 100
100 ... 125
125 ... 160
315 ... 630

400 ... 800
500 ... 1000
625 ... 1250
800 ... 1600
50 ... 63
63 ... 80
80 ... 100
---
630
800
1000
---
------
315 ... 630

400 ... 800
500 ... 1000
625 ... 1250
800 ... 1600
Charecteristic L, In = 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 A
1.05 1.30
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
NSO0_00049
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
In = 40 160 A
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.2
0.5
10
50
20
x In
2/29
Siemens AG 2007

Charecteristic M, In = 16, 20, 25 A
Charecteristic D, In = 16, 20, 25 A

1.05 1.30
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
NSO0_00050
1000
500
200
200
100
100
50
20
10
In = 16 25 A
In = 16 25 A
2
1
0.5
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
NSO0_00052
50
20
10
5
1.00 1.20
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
500
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.2
0.5
10
50
20
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.2
0.5
10
x In
Charecteristic D, In = 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 A

1.05 1.30
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
NSO0_00051
1000
500
200
100
50
Charecteristic M, In = 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100 A
200
100
50
20
10
10
5
In = 32 160 A
In = 32 100 A
0.5
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.1
0.05
0.2
0.5
10
50
20
x In
2/30
NSO0_00053
2
1
2
1
0.5
0.02
0.01
0.1
1.00 1.20
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
500
20
5
50
20
x In
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.2
0.5
10
50
20
x In
Siemens AG 2007

Charecteristic N, In = 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 A
NSO0_00054
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
In = 32 160 A
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.2
0.5
10
50
20
x In
2/31
Siemens AG 2007
Overcurrent releases 4-pole version
Tripping characteristic setting
Overcurrent release is a fixed part of circuit breaker.
Circuit breakers with characteristic
It is not possible to dismantle or exchange the releases.

4-pole circuit breakers are manufactured in the following
versions:
3P+N (three poles protected, N pole unprotected)
4P (all four poles protected)
L
I
Permissible load of N pole is 100% In.

Tripping characteristics
The circuit breakers are delivered with three types of tripping
characteristics designated by the following letters:
N - short-circuit
protection against short circuit only
3VT1 Circuit breakers with characteristic L have a fixed value of rated current I (without In control). The circuit breakers
are manufactured with In values of standard current range
40 ... 160 A see Ranges of overcurrent release and their
possible setting. The Short-circuit release has fixed setting to
4 x In .
3VT1 circuit breakers with characteristic D can be set to a
reduced current in the range of approx. 0.75 ... 1 In.
The circuit breakers are manufactured with In values of standard current range 16 ... 160 A see Ranges of overcurrent release and their possible setting.
3VT1 Circuit breakers with characteristic N have only a short
circuit release. They are manufactured with circuit breaker values of standard current range 32 ... 160 A. The Short circuit
release is adjustable.The stting value are shown in Ranges of
overcurrent release and their possible setting.
D
I
L
t
Ir
Ii
NSO0_00500
D - distribution
protection of lines and transformers
NSO0_00502
L - lines
protection of lines with low starting current
Order No. designation of the circuit breaker depends on the required rated current and protection characteristic.
E.g.: Protection of a circuit with In = 40 A.
Order No. designation will be 3VT1 7042EC46-0AA0.
Tripping characteristic setting

Dependent (thermal) release L (for circuit breakers with characteristic D). The dependent release (value of reduced current
IR), can be set smoothly by means of a control disk IR on the
overcurrent release. IR setting range is 0.75 ... 1In.
Independent instantaneous (short-circuit) release I

(for circuit breakers with characteristic D or N). The independent instantaneous release (the value of short-circuit current Ii)
can be set smoothly in the range Ii = 5 ... 10 In. All values of possible setting are shown in the table.
Derating in accordance with ambient temperature
Rated
current In
Permissible load
Ii
+ 55 C
+ 40 C
+20 C
-15 C
16
20
25
15
19
23
16
20
25
17
22
28
19
25
31
32
40
50
29
38
48
32
40
50
36
45
56
41
53
66
63
80
100
57
73
91
63
80
100
69
88
105
83
100
122
125
160
110
145
125
160
132
168
145
175
2/32
NSO0_00216
Setting IR and Ii for circuit breakers with characteristic D

Setting IR
Setting Ii
Siemens AG 2007

Rated current 3VT1 7..-2EA46-0AA0
3VT1 7..-2EC46-0AA0
3VT1 7..-2EB46-0AA0
In
Overload protection Ir Short circuit protection Overload protection Ir Short circuit protection Overload protection Ir Short circuit protection
Ii (instantaneous)
Ii (instantaneous)
Ii (instantaneous)
A
16
20
25
----
12,5 ... 16
16 ... 20
20 ... 25
160 ... 240

200 ... 300
250 ... 375
32
40
50
40
50
-160
200
25 ... 32
32 ... 40
40 ... 50
160 ... 320

200 ... 400
250 ... 500
160 ... 320

200 ... 400
250 ... 500
63
80
100
63
80
100
252
320
400
50 ... 63
63 ... 80
80 ... 100
315 ... 630

400 ... 800
500 ... 1000
315 ... 630

400 ... 800
500 ... 1000
125
160
125
160
500
640
100 ... 125

125 ... 160
625 ... 1250

800 ... 1600
625 ... 1250

800 ... 1600
Charecteristic L, In = 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 A

1.05 1.30
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
Charecteristic N, In = 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 A
NSO0_00049
1000
500
200
100
50
200
100
50
20
20
10
5
10
5
In = 40 160 A
In = 32 160 A
2
1
0.5
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
NSO0_00054
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
500
0.2
0.5
10
50
20
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.2
0.5
10
50
20
x In
x In
2/33
Ranges of overcurrent release and their possible setting at 40 C
Siemens AG 2007

Charecteristic D, In = 16, 20, 25 A

1.05 1.30
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
NSO0_00050
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
In = 16 25 A
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.2
0.5
10
50
20
x In
Charecteristic D, In = 32,40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 A

1.05 1.30
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
NSO0_00051
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
In = 32 160 A
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.2
0.5
10
50
20
x In
2/34
Siemens AG 2007

Axiliary switches
Technical specifications
Axiliary switches
Order No.

Rated impulse whitstand voltage Uimp
Rated frequency fn
Rated operating current Ie/Ue
AC-12
AC-15
DC-12
DC-13
Thermal current Ith
Contacts arrangement
Connection cross-section S
(connected switch)
V
kV
Hz
3VT9 100-2AB10,
3VT9 100-2AH10
3VT9 100-2AB20,
3VT9 100-2AH20
AC 60 ... 250 V
DC 60 ... 250 V
250 V
4 kV
50/60 Hz
AC 5 ... 60 V
DC 5 ... 60 V
6 A/250 V
5 A/60 V, 3 A/110 V, 1.5 A/230 V
0.25 A/250 V
0.5 A/60 V, 0.2 A/110 V, 0.1 A/250 V
A
6A
001
2
mm 0.5 ... 1
IP20
0.0004 ... 0.1 A/5 ... 60 V

0.0004 ... 0.1 A/5 ... 60 V
0.1 A/5 ... 60 V
0.0004 ... 0.1 A/5 ... 60 V
0.5 A
Function, name and location of switches according to type designation

Order No.
Switch name
Switch location
3VT9 100-2AB10
3VT9 100-2AB20
Auxiliary
Accessory compartment 11), 2, Signals state of circuit breaker/switch

3, 4, 5, 62)
disconnectors main contact
3VT9 100-2AH10
3VT9 100-2AH20
Signal
Accessory compartment 11)
1)
In accessory compartment 1, 3VT9 100-2AB10 auxiliary switch and

3VT9 100-2AH10 signal switch cannot be used simultaneously.
2)
When one of accessory compartment 4, 5 or 6 is already in use for auxiliary switches, cannot be used with a shunt trip or undervoltage release.
Switch function
Signals tripping of the circuit breaker by

the over current release
For states of switches in circuit breaker/switch disconnector

accessory compartment, see page 2/13.
2/35
Siemens AG 2007

Axiliary switches
Undervoltage trip unit
Shunt trip unit
Order No.
3VT9 100-1S.00
AC 24/48/110/230/400 V
DC 24/48/110/220 V
50/60 Hz
Rated frequency fn
Input power at 1.1 Ue
AC
DC
Characteristic
Time before switching off
Loading time
(connected release)
Location in accessory compartment no.
2 VA
2W
U t0.7 Ue circuit breaker must trip
15 ms
f
0,5 ... 1 mm2
IP20
10
SIGNAL SWITCH - signals switching off by shunt trip

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
Rated frequency fn
Thermal current Ith
AC 230 V
250 V
4 kV
50/60 Hz
2 A/AC 230 V
6A
01
Order No.
3VT9 100-1U.00
AC 24/48/110/230/400 V
DC 24/48/110/220 V
50/60 Hz
Rated frequency fn
AC
DC
Characteristic
2 VA
2W
U d 0,35 Ue circuit breaker can be
turned on
U t0,85 Ue circuit breaker must
trip
15 ms
f
0.5 ... 1 mm2
IP20

Loading time
(connected release)
Location in accessory compartment no. 10
SIGNAL SWITCH - signals switching off of the undervoltage

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
Rated frequency fn
Thermal current Ith
AC 230 V
250 V
4 kV
50/60 Hz
2 A/AC 230 V
6A
01
Order No. designation according to rated operating voltage

Ue
Order No.
Order No. designation according to rated operating voltage
AC/DC 24/48 V
AC 110/230 V, DC 110/220 V
AC 230/400 V, DC 220 V
3VT9 100-1SC00
3VT9 100-1SD00
3VT9 100-1SE00
Ue
Order No.
AC/DC 24/48 V
AC 110/230 V /DC 110/220 V
AC 230/400 V /DC 220 V
3VT9 100-1UC00
3VT9 100-1UD00
3VT9 100-1UE00
The specific rated operating voltage of the shunt trip is set up by

jumpers directly on the release.
The setting from the manufacturer is always to the value corresponding to the type designation.
The specific rated operating voltage of the shunt trip is set up by

jumpers directly on the release.
The setting from the manufacturer is always to the value corresponding to the type designation.
L+
N-
2/36
3VT9 100-1U.0
NSO0_00056
A2
N-
10.Y2
U<
NSO0_00055
10.Y2
B2
A1
10.Y1
3VT9 100-1S.0
B1
10.Y1
L+
Siemens AG 2007

Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching

Description
The hand drive permits controlling the circuit breaker/switch

disconnector by turning the lever, e.g. to switch machines on
and off. The drives modular concept allows for simple mounting on the circuit breaker (even as an add-on) after removing
the accessory compartment cover. An affixed drive may be
sealed. The drive and its accessories are ordered separately
according to your choice, see page 2/7.
Hand drive permits controlling the circuit breaker:
a) from the front panel (Fig. 1)
Hand drive unit 3VT9 100-3HA/HB/HC/HD..
+ Hand drive lever 3VT9 100-3HE/HF..
b) through the switchgear door (Fig.2)
Hand drive unit 3VT9 100-3HA/HB/HC/HD..
+ Extension shaft 3VT9 100-3HJ..
+ Hand drive bearing 3VT9 100-3HG/HH..
+ Hand drive lever + 3VT9 100-3HE/HF..
Enhanced safety for operator:

Hand drive unit and hand drive lever also are supplied with
an option to lock the circuit breaker into the switched off
manually position. The hand drive unit and lever can be
locked with up to three padlocks with shank diameter up to
3 ... 4 mm.
Every hand drive bearing prevents the switchgear door from
opening when the circuit breaker is switched on or in a state
of being switched off by releases. By means of the device, it
is possible to turn off this locking and to open the door.
Locking of the switchgear door opening also is possible in the
circuit breakers switched off manually state. It is necessary
to activate the locking by means of the lever on the bearing
and to lock the hand drive arm.
Two circuit breakers with hand drives can be provided also
with reciprocal mechanical interlocking or mechanical parallel
switching (see page D29).
c) through the side wall of the switchgear (Fig.3)

in left- or right-side designs Hand drive unit for side control
right 3VT9 100-3HD10 or left 3VT9 100-3HC10
+ Hand drfive lever + 3VT9 100-3HE/HF..
Hand drive unit is affixed directly to circuit breaker or switch
disconnector.
Hand drive bearing is affixed to switchgear door and provides
protection IP40 or IP66.
Hand drive lever is fitted onto hand drive unit or onto hand
drive bearing.
Extension shaft is supplied in two variants, standard (length
350 mm - can be shortened) and telescopic (adjustable length
199 ... 352 mm). It is fitted onto the hand drive unit.
Switchgear door locking in circuit

breaker state
Order No.
Description
Colour
Locking while circuit b. Protection

in switched off state
switched on
switched off manually Length

an locked
mm
grey
grey
yellow
no
yes
yes
----
----
----
----
3VT9 100-3HD10 Hand drive unit - side, right grey

3VT9 100-3HC10 Hand drive unit - side, left grey
no
no
---
---
---
3VT9 100-3HE10 Hand drive lever

3VT9 100-3HE20
3VT9 100-3HF20
black
black
red
no
yes
yes
----
----
----
----
3VT9 100-3HG10 Hand drive bearing

3VT9 100-3HH10
3VT9 100-3HG20
3VT9 100-3HH20
black
black
yellow
yellow
-----
IP40
IP40
IP66
IP66
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
-----
3VT9 100-3HJ10 Extension shaft

3VT9 100-3HJ20
---
---
---
---
---
350 (can be shorted)

199 ... 352 telescopic
3VT9 100-3HA10 Hand drive unit

3VT9 100-3HA20
3VT9 100-3HB20
2/37
Technical specifications
Siemens AG 2007

3VT9 100-8LB00 Mechanical parallel switching
Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers so that

they cannot be tripped simultaneously, but always just individually. Both circuit breakers may be turned off simultaneously.
Interlocking can be used between two 3VT1 circuit breakers.
Each circuit breaker must be furnished with a hand drive (at least
one with a hand drive unit and hand drive lever), see page 2/37.
In order to use the interlocking, it is absolutely necessary
to comply with the dimensions shown in the figure and given in
the table.
Provides simultaneous switching of two circuit breakers. Parallel

switching can be used between two 3VT1 circuit breakers. Each
circuit breaker must be furnished with a hand drive, and at least
one with a hand drive lever, see page 2/37. In order to use parallel switching, it is absolutely necessary to comply with the dimensions shown in the figure and given in the table.
3VT9 100-8LA00 Mechanical interlocking
Dimensions
mm
Dimensions
mm
X
L
87.5 or 100
94.5 or 106
75 or 87.5 or 100
L
L
NSO0_00058
NSO0_00059
Placement of circuit breaker/switch disconnectors with

3VT9 100-8LA00 mechanical interlocking
12.5 or 25
2/38
Placement of circuit breaker/switch disconnectors with

3VT9 100-8LB00 mechanical interlocking
NSO0_00060
NSO0_00057
0 or 12.5 or 25
Siemens AG 2007

Motor drives
Symbol
Description
Switched on maually or by motor drive electrically
Motor drive is an accessory of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector, by means of which it is possible to switch the circuit
breaker or switch disconnector on and off remotly. Modular
designs of the drives enables their simple mounting on the
circuit breaker (also additionaly). The drive is used for both
remote and local control of 3-pole and 4-pole circuit breakers
3VT1. it is manufactured in the version for side mounting next to
the circuit breaker on the switchgear panel or on DIN rail.
The drives is fastened by means of a bayonet mechanism on the
circuit breaker side. The installed drive can be sealed by means
of the terminal cover seal.
Switched off by overcurrent releases, shunt trip or undervoltage release, TEST or Revision push button
Switched off maually or by motor drive electrically, wound
up state
Circuit breakers Modeion 3VT1 with motor drive are intended for
industrial, power engineering and infrastructure
applications.
The motor drives have a system of direct control of the circuit
breaker, without a spring storage unit.
The motor drive can work in the local or remote control mode.
The local conrol mode is used, for instance, in loss of control
voltage. Local control of the circuit breaker is accessibly only
after lifting the transparent safty cover of the drive off. This action
locks the remote electrical control circuits automatically. The
lifted off position of the cover can be indicated remotly.
The circuit breaker is switched on and off by means of the
control lever driver. After returning the safty cover to the original
position, the drive is switched into the remote control mode
automatically.
After tilting the safty cover off it is possible to handle an
automatic mode selector switch. Under the transparent cover
there is also a red LED which lighting indicates a failure (failed
on/off/wind-up operations).
Electronic circuits of the motor drive block erroneous control process, e.g. drive cycling after overcurrent or auxiliary release tripping.
Side drive can be locked in off position of the circuit breaker by
up to three padlocks with shaft diameter with shank diameter
max. 4 mm. It is possible to signal the locking remotly. The
protective cover of the drives can also be sealed.
Motor drive automatic operation presets
The position of the main circuit breaker is indicated by the
position of the circuit breaker driver lever under the transparent
protective cover of the drive. The wound uo position of the circuit
breaker can also be signalled remotly.
In the remote control mode the circuit breaker is switched on and
off by ON and OFF push buttons respectivly. The motor drive accessories include an extension cable 3VT9 100-3MF00.
Switch
position
0 N
Automatic
operation preset
Preset
description
11)
1 2
0 N
Circuit breaker switching off to

postion2)
Circuit breaker winding up to

position
Circuit breaker switching

on to position
Automatic winding up is By overcurrent release

on
By REVISION push button
Motor drive carries out automatically
By pressing of ON push
button
By auxiliary release
Automatic winding up is
By TEST push button
off
The operator must press the

OFF push button
By pressing of ON push
button
Simultaeous winding up
and switching on
By pressing the ON push button the motor drive will wind up ans
switch on the circuit breaker3)
1 2
0 N
1 2
0 N
The motor drive is out of operation, teh red LED is lighting.
1 2
1)
Standard factory setting of the switch.
2)
When the circuit breaker is switched off by the motor drive electrically with
the use of the OFF push button, the circuit breaker control lever gets into
the wound up position automatically,
independently of the automatic
operation preset.
3)
By pressing the OFF push button, the motor drive only winds the circuit
breaker up to the position .
2/39
Siemens AG 2007

Wiring diagram

MP
motor drive 3VT9 100-3M.00
motor
gearbox
X3
connector for connection of control and signaling circuits
recommended connection of control circuitsnot part of MP
ON
push button
Motor drive
OFF
push button
Q3
motor drive circuit breaker
HL1
remote failure signalling (unreliable making or

breaking), permissible load max. 10 W1)
HL2
signalling of circuit breaker lever wound up

position, permissible load max. 10 W1)
HL3
signalling of opening of the front safty cover of

the drive, permissible load max. 10 W1)
HL4
signalling of extension of the drive locking bar,

permissible load max. 10 W1)
Q3
L+
ON
OFF
X3
1)
MP
X3
B
N-
HL1
HL2
HL3
HL4
NSO0_00061
MP control circuit
MP control circuit, signalling
For complete wiring diagram of the circuit breaker 3VT1 with motor drive, see page 2/15.
Specifications
Order No.
3VT9 100-3M.00
AC 24/48/110/230 V
DC 24/48/110/220 V
Rated frequency fn
50/60 Hz
Control pulse length

for switching on
for switching off
60 ms ... f1)
60 ms ... f1)
Time to switching on
70 ms1)
Time to switching off
< 50 ms1)
Frequency of cycles ON/OFF
5 cycles/min
Frequency of cycles-successive ON/OFF 10 cycles

20000 cycles
Power input
AC
100 VA
DC
100 W
Starting current
12 A/AC/DC 24 V
6 A/AC/DC 48 V
4 A/AC/DC 110 V
2 A/AC 230 V/DC 220 V
Protection
AC 24/48/110 V; AC 230 V
DC 24/48/110 V; DC 220 V
LSN 4C/1; LSN 2C/1

LSN-DC 4C/1; LSN-DC 2C/1
Order No.
3VT9 100-3MF00
Number of conductors
Conductor cross section S
0,35 mm2
Conductor length
60 cm
1)
The values depends on the motor drive automatic operation preset, see
pages 21, 23, 24, 25.
2/40
voltage on terminals 5, 6, 7, 8 is the same as Un of the motor drive.
Siemens AG 2007

Circuit breaker 3VT1 with motor drive
Automatic operation no. 1, 2, 3
Automatic operation no. 1, 2, 3
1
0
1
0
50
Main contacts
1
0
Auxiliary switch - NO contact

50
1
0
Auxiliary switch - NC contact

55
1
0
NSO0 00063
Main contacts
Circuit breaker switching on by motor drive electrically by ON

push button
NSO0_00062
Circuit breaker switching off by motor drive electrically by OFF

push button
70
70
65
1
0
t [ms]
t [ms]
Recommended control pulses for switching the circuit breaker on and off by motor drive electrically using the ON and OFF push
butons
1
0
>20
> 520
60 500
IMP ON
> 20
> 520
1
0
< 70
50
60 500
IMP OFF
> 520
> 20
1
0
HK
1
0
NS
1
0
NS
1
0
> 20
< 70
50
HK
60 500
IMP ON
NSO0_00066
> 520
60 500
IMP OFF
Automatic operation no. 2

NSO0_00064
t [ms]
t [ms]
> 520
60
IMP OFF
1
0
50
HK
NS
> 520
>20
60
IMP ON
> 20
< 70
1
0
NSO0_00065

Graph description
Symbol
Description
HK
Main contacts
NS
Signal switch
IMP ON
Make pulse for motor drive
IMP OFF
Break pulse for motor drive

Switched on
1
0
t [ms]
Switched off maually or by motor drive electrically (wound

up state)
2/41
Siemens AG 2007

Circuit breaker switching off by overcurrent release or REVISION push button
3.2
2.4
2.2
3.1
2.3
2.1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
10
15
10
1080
Signal switch - NC contact

1085
3.2
2.4
2.2
3.1
2.3
2.1
1
0
1
0
1
0
NSO0_00068
10
accessory
compartment
3
3.3
10
15
Signal switch - No contact
10
5
t [ms]
2/42
3.1
2.3
2.1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
10
10
15
Signal switch - No contact
10
5
t [ms]
accessory
compartment
2
3.4
1
0
2.4
2.2
Main contacts
1
0
3.3
Signal switch - NO contact
1
3
5
3.4
3.2
t [ms]
2
4
6
1
3
5
accessory
compartment
3
3.3
Main contacts
2
4
6

accessory
compartment
3
3.4
1
0
10
accessory
compartment
2
1
3
5
accessory
compartment
2
Main contacts
2
4
6
NSO0_00068

NSO0_00067
Siemens AG 2007

> 15001)
60 500
IMP ON
1
0
1
0
70
HK
1
0
NS
1
0
> 500
60 > 20
IMP OFF
1)
HK
1
0
NS
1
0
NSO0_00070

NSO0_00069
Recommended control pulses for switching the circuit breaker with motor drive after its switching off by overcurrent release or
REVISION push button
60
IMP ON
70
70
1070
t [ms]
t [ms]
60 500
IMP ON
1
0
140
1)
HK
1
0
NS
1
0
NSO0_00071

Graph description
Symbol
Description
HK
Main contacts
NS
Signal switch
IMP ON
IMP OFF

Switched on
70
Switched off by releases, TEST or REVISION push

button
t [ms]
* If the circuit breaker was switched off by an overcurrent release, it is
necessary to remove the error before its switching on.
Switched off maually or by motor drive electrically (wound

up state)
2/43
Siemens AG 2007

Circuit breaker switching off by shunt trip, undervoltage release or TEST push button
NSO0_00072
Main contacts
1
3
5
3.4
3.2
2.4
3.3
3.1
2.3
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
15
accessory
compartment
3
2
4
6
15
20
signal switch Auxiliary release
1085
10
accessory
compartment
2
t [ms]
NSO0_00073

Main contacts
3.4
3.2
2.4
3.3
3.1
2.3
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
15
accessory
compartment
3
1
3
5
15
20
accessory
compartment
2
2
4
6

10
t [ms]
NSO0_00073

Main contacts
3.4
3.2
2.4
3.3
3.1
2.3
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
15
accessory
compartment
3
1
3
5
15
20
accessory
compartment
2
2
4
6

10
t [ms]
2/44
Siemens AG 2007

Recommended control pulses for switching the circuit breaker with motor drive after its switching off by overcurrent release or
REVISION push button
> 1500
60 500
IMP ON
1
0
> 2001)
SV
1
0
Graph description
NSO0_00074
Symbol
Description
HK
Main contacts
NS
Signal switch
SV
Pulse for shunt trip
SP
Pulse for undervoltage release
IMP ON
IMP OFF

Switched on
> 2001)
SP
1
0
HK
1
0
NS
1
0

button
15
1070
70
Switched off maually or by motor drive electrically

(wound up state)
t [ms]
NSO0_00075
Automatic operation no.2

> 500
60
IMP OFF
1
0
> 20
60
IMP ON
> 2001)
SV
1
0
SP
1
0
HK
1
0
NS
1
0
> 2001)
15
70
70
t [ms]
> 500
NSO0_00076
60 500
IMP ON
1
0
> 2001)
SV
1
0
SP
1
0
HK
1
0
NS
1
0
> 2001)
15
140
70
t [ms]
* Reswitching is only possible after deactivation of the shunt trip or undervoltage release.
2/45
Siemens AG 2007

Delay unit
Tripping characteristic class M
Order No.
Description
Packing pc
Tripping time of the overcurrent release of circuit breakers 3VT1

with characteristic M at 7.2 In corresponds to the release class
10 A, 10 and 20 according to EN 60947-4-1
3VT9 00-1UX00
enables delayed tripping of undervoltage

releases of circuit breakers Modeion
Plate of the overcurrent releases of 3VT1 with characteristic M

Rated current Order No.
In
Class
16
20
25
3VT1 701-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 702-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 792-2DM36-0AA0
10A
10A
10A
32
40
50
3VT1 703-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 704-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 705-2DM36-0AA0
10
10
20
63
80
100
3VT1 706-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 708-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 710-2DM36-0AA0
20
20
20
the delay can be set at three levels (depending on connection)

unit 3VT9 00-1UX00 is inteded only for undervoltage releases
with Ue = AC 230 V
Circuit breaker
1st level
2nd level
3rd level
sec.
sec.
sec.
3VT1
3.2
3VT2, 3VT3
0.6
1.2
1.9
3VT4, 3VT5
0.5
1.5
Ue
2+ 4
Rated short-circuit ultimate and service breaking capacity of

3P circuit breakers 3VT1 in DC circuits
Specifications
2+ 4
1s
3VT1
3VT2,3VT3 0,6 s
0,5 s
3VT4/5
Order No.
3VT1 7..-2DM36-0AA0
DC 250 V
Rated short-circuit ultimate breaking

capacity1) (rms value)Icu/Ue
25 kA/DC 250 V W= max. 5 ms
Rated short-circuit service breaking

capacity (rms value) Ics/Ue
13 kA/DC 250 V W= max. 5 ms
STOP
Utilization category (switching mode)
DC-22A
1)
Delay
3
U<
Ue
6 8
Ue
2+ 4
2s
3,2 s
3VT1
3VT1
3VT2,3VT3 1,2 s 3VT2,3VT3 1,9 s
1s
1,5 s
3VT4/5
3VT4/5
STOP
3
U<
STOP
NSO0_00077
Overcurrent releases
U<
in reverse connection of the circuit breaker (input terminals 2, 4, 6 and output terminals 1, 3, 5), Icu does not change.
Circuit breaker connection for circuits DC 250 V
7
2/46
Siemens AG 2007
3VT2 Molded Case

Catalog
3/2
3/11
3/5
3/6
3/8
3/10
3/12
3/12
3/40
3/43
3/46
3/55
3/56
3/57
3/58
3/59
3/61
3VT2 Molded Case

General data
Standard circuit breakers, trip units
mechanism
Further accessories
3VT2 Molded Case
Standard circuit breakers, trip unit
Plug-in Device
Withdrawable design
Switches
Shunt trip unit
Rotary operated mechanism
switching
Motorized operating mechanism
Siemens AG 2007

General data
Overview
3/2
Siemens AG 2007


Switching unit includes:
2 connecting sets 3VT9 200-4TA30 - for connecting busbars
or cable lugs1)
conductor holder
Rated current In
Switching capacity Icu
kA
Switching unit must be fitted with overcurrent release (circuit breaker) or switch disconnector unit 3VT9 225-6DT00 (switch disconnector)
1)
For connecting in another way, it is necessary to use connecting sets (see

page 3/9).
DT
Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Switching units
3-pole version
250
250
36
65
B
B
3VT2 725-2AA36-0AA0
3VT2 725-3AA36-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
7,400
7,400
250
250
36
65
B
B
3VT2 725-2AA46-0AA0
3VT2 725-3AA46-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
7,400
7,400
250
250
36
65
B
B
3VT2 725-2AA56-0AA0
3VT2 725-3AA56-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
7,400
7,400
4-pole version
Accessories
ETU LP-characteristic L-lines
without Ir regulation
ETU DP-characteristic D-distribution
ETU MP-characteristic M-motor
direct protection for motors and generators
suitable also for protecting lines and transformers
ETU MPS-characteristic M-motor with adjustable timing

selectivity
direct protection for motors and generators.
enables setting time delay of independent release to 0, 100,
200 or 300 ms
ETU DPN-characteristic D-distribution with N-pole protection
protecting lines and transformers in TN-C-S and TN-S network
Rated current In
Set current of the inversetime delayed overload

trip units L Ir
DT Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
ETU trip unit

System protection, ETU LP, LI function-characteristic L-lines
with permanently set overload trip units permanently set of short circuit
trip units
160
200
250
B
B
B
3VT9 216-6AB00
3VT9 220-6AB00
3VT9 225-6AB00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,317
0,317
0,317
B
B
B
3VT9 210-6AC00
3VT9 216-6AC00
3VT9 225-6AC00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,283
0,284
0,283
B
B
B
3VT9 210-6BC00
3VT9 216-6BC00
3VT9 225-6BC00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,327
0,327
0,327
System protection, ETU DP, LI function

with adjustable thermal overload trip units, adjustable short circuit trip
units
100
160
250
40 ... 100
63 ... 160
100 ... 250
System protection, ETU DPN, LIN function

with adjustable thermal overload trip units, adjustable short circuit trip units
100
160
250
40 ... 100
63 ... 160
100 ... 250
3/3
Switching unit
Siemens AG 2007

Rated current In
Set current of the inversetime delayed overload

trip units L /r
DT Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Motor and generator protection, ETU MP, LI function

units
100
160
250
40 ... 100
63 ... 160
100 ... 250
B
B
B
3VT9 210-6AP00
3VT9 216-6AP00
3VT9 225-6AP00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,285
0,284
0,285
Motor and generator protection, ETU MPS, LSI function
units
100
160
250
40 ... 100
63 ... 160
100 ... 250
B
B
B
3VT9 210-6AS00
3VT9 216-6AS00
3VT9 225-6AS00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,230
0,230
0,230
250
Switch disconnector
3VT9 225-6DT00
1 unit
0,219
Switch disconnector
3/4
Siemens AG 2007


Rated control supply voltage Us/frequency
DT Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
AC 50/60 Hz, DC
Auxiliary switches and alarm switches

Single make contacts
B
B
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AC20
1 unit
1 unit
0,020
0,120
B
B
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AD20
1 unit
1 unit
0,130
0,130
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V

AC/DC 5 ... 60 V
B
B
3VT9 300-2AE10
3VT9 300-2AE20
1 unit
1 unit
0,260
0,260
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V

AC/DC 5 ... 60 V
B
B
3VT9 300-2AF10
3VT9 300-2AF20
1 unit
1 unit
0,250
0,250
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V

AC/DC 5 ... 60 V
B
B
3VT9 300-2AG10
3VT9 300-2AG20
1 unit
1 unit
0,240
0,240
B
B
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AH20
1 unit
1 unit
0,013
0,013
Early switch
3VT9 300-2AJ00
1 unit
0,040
AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V

AC/DC 110 V
AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220 V
B
B
3VT9 300-1SC00
3VT9 300-1SD00
3VT9 300-1SE00
B
B
B
3VT9 300-1UC00
3VT9 300-1UD00
3VT9 300-1UE00
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V

AC/DC 5 ... 60 V
Single break contacts

AC/DC 60 ... 500 V
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V
Double contacts
Change-over contacts
AC/DC 60 ... 250 V
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V
Early contacts
Shunt trip unit

on req.
1 unit
0,140
1 unit
0,140
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,110
0,110
0,110

AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V
AC/DC 110 V
AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220 V
with early contact1)
AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V
AC/DC 110 V
AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220 V
1)
3VT9 300-1UC10
3VT9 300-1UD10
3VT9 300-1UE10
on req.
on req.
on req.
Not in combination with motorized operating mechanism 3VT9 200-3M..0.
3/5
Siemens AG 2007

Overview

Rotary operating mechanism is necessary to be completed:
for controled use of the switch unit
- with the black hand drive lever 3VT9 300-3HE10 or
3VT9 300-3HE20
- with the red hand drive lever 3VT9 300-3HF20
for controlling through the switchgear door
- with the extension shaft 3VT9 300-3HJ..
- with the hand drive bearing 3VT9 300-3HG/HH..
- hand drive lever 3VT9 300-3HE/HF..

Mechanical interlocking for fixed design is necessary to be
completed:
- 2 x hand drive unit 3VT9 200-3HA/HB..
- 2 x hand drive lever 3VT9 200-3HE/HF..
Mechanical interlocking by Bowden is intented for fixed, plugin and withdrawable designs
Mechanical interlocking is necessary to be completed:

Version
DT Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg

Manual operating mechanism
no locking
lockable
lockable
grey
grey
yellow label
B
B
B
3VT9 200-3HA10
3VT9 200-3HA20
3VT9 200-3HB20
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,223
0,223
0,223
no locking
lockable
black
black
B
B
3VT9 300-3HE10
3VT9 300-3HE20
1 unit
1 unit
0,075
0,075
lockable
red
3VT9 300-3HF20
1 unit
0,075
black
black
B
B
3VT9 300-3HG10
3VT9 300-3HH10
1 unit
1 unit
0,140
0,140
yellow label
yellow label
B
B
3VT9 300-3HG20
3VT9 300-3HH20
1 unit
1 unit
0,140
0,140
Extension shaft, length 365 mm, may be shorten
3VT9 300-3HJ10
1 unit
0,205
Extension shaft-telescopic, length 245 ... 410 mm
3VT9 300-3HJ20
1 unit
0,255
Hand drive lever
Hand drive bearing

Is used in combination with the black lever of
3VT9 300-3HE10, 3VT9 300-3HE20 hand drives
protection IP40
protection IP66
Is used in combination with the red lever

of 3VT9 300-3HF20 hand drive
protection IP40
protection IP66
3/6
Siemens AG 2007

Version
DT Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg

Mechanical interlocking for fixed design
3VT9 300-8LA00
1 unit
0,136
for two 3VT2 circuit breakers

for two 3VT2 and one 3VT3 circuit breaker
B
B
3VT9 200-8LC10
3VT9 300-8LC20
1 unit
1 unit
0,393
0,393
Mechanical parallel switching for fixed design
3VT9 300-8LB00
1 unit
0,162
B
B
3VT9 200-3MJ00
3VT9 200-3ML00
3VT9 200-3MF00
3VT9 200-3MQ00
1 unit
1 unit
1,529
1,529
1 unit
1,564
1 unit
1 unit
1,529
1,564
1 unit
1,546
Mechanical interlocking by bowden cables
Motorized operating mechanisms with storage spring

degree d protection IP00, with locking
device for 3 padlocks
AC/DC 24 V
AC/DC 48 V
AC/DC 110 V
AC 230 V/DC 220 V
on req.
Motor drive with operations counter

AC/DC 24 V
AC/DC 48 V
AC/DC 110 V
AC 230 V/DC 220 V
B
B
B
3VT9 200-3MJ10
3VT9 200-3ML10
3VT9 200-3MF10
3VT9 200-3MQ10
Operations counter with cable, length 110 cm
3VT9 300-3MF10
1 unit
0,003
Extension cable-to motor drive, 12 wires, length 60 cm
3VT9 300-3MF00
1 unit
0,060
on req.
Accessories for motorized operated mechanisms
3/7
Siemens AG 2007


Plug-in device
includes:
- complete accessories for assembly circuit breakers/switch
disconnectors in plug-in design
- set of installation bolts (4 x M4 x 40) for affixing switching unit
to plug-in device
- switching unit 3 pole version 3VT2 725-.AA36-0AA0;
4 pole version 3VT2 725-.AA46-0AA0 or 3VT2 725-.AA560AA0
Withdrawable device
includes complete accessories for assembly circuit breakers/switch disconnectors in withdrawable design
must be fitted with switching unit 3 pole version 3VT2 725.AA36-0AA0; 4 pole version 3VT2 725-.AA56-0AA0 or 3VT2
725-.AA56-0AA0.
For connecting plug-in device with busbars or cable lugs,

connecting sets 3VT9 200-4TA30 can be used that are included
with the 3 pole version 3VT2 725-.AA36-0AA0; 4 pole version
3VT2 725-.AA46-0AA0 switching unit - for connecting in another
way, it is necessary to use connecting sets.
Version
DT Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Plug-in device
3-pole version
3VT9 200-4PA30
1 unit
1,766
4-pole version
3VT9 200-4PA40
1 unit
2,100
3-pole version
3VT9 200-4WA30
1 unit
3,497
4-pole version
3VT9 200-4WA40
1 unit
3,200
Withdrawable device
3/8
Siemens AG 2007

Version
Conductor
cross-section S
Type of connetion
DT Order no.
PS*
mm2
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Connection parts for fixed mounted circuit breakers

1 terminal
Box terminal
16 ... 150
Cu Cables,
flexibars
3VT9 200-4TC00
1 unit
0,320
Cu/Al cables
3VT9 215-4TD00
1 unit
0,280
150 ... 240
Cu/Al cables
3VT9 224-4TD00
1 unit
0,280
2 x 25 ... 150
Cu/Al cables
3VT9 215-4TF00
1 unit
0,680
2 x 150 ... 240
Cu/Al cables
3VT9 224-4TF00
1 unit
0,680
6 x 6 ... 35
Cu/Al cables
3VT9 203-4TF00
1 unit
0,100
Cu/Al busbars
cable lugs
3VT9 200-4RC00
1 unit
0,320
Cu Cables,
flexibars
3VT9 200-4TC30
1 unit
0,240
Cu/Al cables
3VT9 215-4TD30
1 unit
0,200
Cu/Al cables
3VT9 224-4TD30
1 unit
0,339
B
B
3VT9 224-4TF30
3VT9 215-4TF30
1 unit
1 unit
0,630
0,520
Circular conductor terminals 25 ... 150
Rear connection
3 terminals
Box terminals
16 ... 150

150 ... 240
Circular conductor terminals

for enhances termination point protection to IP20 use the terminal
cover 3VT9 200-8CB30
2 x 150 ... 240
Cu/Al cables
2 x 25 ... 150
Cu/Al cables
Circular conductor terminals, 6 x 6 ... 35
for 6 cables
Cu/Al cables
3VT9 203-4TF30
1 unit
0,300
Rear connection
Cu/Al busbars
cable lugs
3VT9 200-4RC30
1 unit
0,237
Front connection
Cu/Al busbars,
cable lugs,
flexibars
3VT9 200-4TA30
1 unit
0,120
15 ... 25,4; 4 ... 6 Cu flexible

conductors
3VT9 200-4TN30
1 unit
0,017
for increased pole Cu/Al busbars

spacing
cable lugs,
flexibars
3VT9 200-4ED30
0,300

spacing
cable lugs,
flexibars
3VT9 200-4EE30
0,447
Included in every supply of switching units

Potential terminals
3/9
Siemens AG 2007

Further accessories

Version
DT Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Insulating barriers
included with each switching unit order
in case circuit breaker/switch disconnector connection is reversed
(supply to terminals 2, 4, 6), it is necessary in most cases to install
these barriers also on the lower side
set (two pieces), for 3P designs

one piece, for 4P designs, in aviation to 38 design
B
B
3VT9 300-8CE30
3VT9 300-8CE00
1 unit
1 unit
0,077
0,050
3-pole designs
4-pole design
B
B
3VT9 200-8CB30
3VT9 200-8CB40
1 unit
1 unit
0,098
0,100
Locking type lever
3VT9 200-3HL00
1 unit
0,013
3VT9 200-8BN00
1 unit
0,001
3VT9 200-8BL00
1 unit
0,080
3VT9 300-4PL00
1 unit
0,020
3VT9 300-4WL00
1 unit
0,020
1 unit
0,054
Terminal cover-protection IP20

increases degree of protection of connection point to IP20 when using
3VT9 224-4TD30, 3VT9 215-4TF30, 3VT9 224-4TF30 and
3VT9 203-4TF30 block type terminals
intended for fixed, plug-in and withdrawable designs
enables to lock the circuit breaker in position switched off manually

in order to lock device, you can use up to three padlocks with shank
diameter max. 6 mm
Bolt sealing inset

provides sealing for:
overcurrent release
accessory compartment cover
terminal cover
hand drive unit
motor drive unit
Additional cover for overcurrent release
provides sealing for overcurrent releases such as circuit breakers in
the main meter board cabine
Connecting cable
to connect the circuit breaker/switch - disconectors accessories in the
withdrawable design (it is possible for plug-in design and fixed
design)
Signalling position switch
to indicate the position of the circuit breaker in the plug-in or withdrawable devices
Keying set
3VT9 200-4WN00
on req.
prevents inserting in the plug-in or withdrawable devices beyond the

switching unit
Push button cover
3VT9 300-3MF20
for motor drive, cover may be provided with lead seals
3/10
Siemens AG 2007

Technical specification
Specifications
Circuit breaker
Switch-disconnector
Standards
EN 60 947-2, IEC 947-2
EN 60 947-3, IEC 947-3
Approval marks
3, 4
A
100, 160, 200, 250
250
--
250
AC max. 690
AC max. 690
DC max. 440
Rated frequency fn
Hz
50/60
kV
690
Utilization category (selectivity) AC 690 V
--
--
AC 690 V
--
AC-23 B
DC 440 V
--
DC-23 B
Rated short-time withstand current Ue = AC 690 V Icw/t
2,5 kA/1 s
Series Ue
3VT2 N
3VT2 H
--
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (rms value)1) Icu
Ue
60 kA
36 kA
16 kA
10 kA
100 kA
65 kA
25 kA
13 kA
AC 230 V
AC 415 V
AC 500 V
AC 690 V
--
30 kA
18kA
8kA
5kA
50 kA
36 kA
13 kA
8 kA
AC 230 V
AC 415 V
AC 500 V
AC 690 V
--
Rated short-circuit making capacity (peak value) Icm/Ue
75 kA
140 kA
AC 415 V
4 kA/AC 15 V
4 kA/AC440 V
Number of poles
Rated current In
Off-time at Icu
ms
10
18
cycles
30 000
cycles
3 000
cycles
/hr
120
Operating force
80
IP40
IP20
3 kA/5 s
--
40
-40 ... +55

Working environment
Pollution degree
Max. elevation
2000
Seismic resistance
Hz
3g (8 ... 50)
Plug-in design
/+
Withdrawable design
/+
Accessories
Switches-auxiliary/relative/signal/early
///
Undervoltage release/with early switch/with signal switch
Mechanical interlocking to the hand drive, by Bowden
Locking-type lever
Bolt sealing inset/additional cover for overcurrent release
available,
-- unavailable,
+ in preparation
1)
In case circiut breaker connection is reversed (input terminals 2, 4, 6

output terminals 1, 3, 5), Icu does not change.
3/11
Siemens AG 2007

Wiring diagram
Cicuit breaker with accessories
3-pole version
Recommended wiring of the
control circuits
Q3
L+
Plug-in device/Withdrawable device

2 4
1
1
3
5
-4WA30
SO 1
OFF
-4PA30
NC
10.Y1
X3 9 7
Main circuit
10.Y3
3VT9 300-2AJ00
Auxiliary trips/Early contact

A1
3VT9 300-1U.00
Motor drive
A1
10.Y1
3VT9 300-1U.10
B1
3VT9 300-1S.00
ON
3VT9 2..-6..
5
A
I>
I>
NO
or
S5
U<
or
or
U<
B
T1
T2
T3
TEST
SO 2
1
Switches
2.1
3.1
2.1
3.3
2.3
3.3
auxiliary
2.2
3.4
2.4
3.4
3VT9 300-2AE10
cavity no. 2 + 3
X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Connecting cable
or
NSO0_00090
cavity no. 3
or
2.2
3.2
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AG10
or
3VT9 300-2AF10
3VT9 300-2AD10
or
3.1
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3.4
2.1
cavity no. 2
or
3.2
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
cavity no. 1
2.2
2.4
1.1
1.2
or or
1.4
3.1
3.2
3.4
3.3
2.1
2.2
2.4
2.3
auxiliary
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AD10
1.1
1.2
1.4
relative
3VT9 300-2AC10
1.3
signal
or
-4PA30
4 2 1
4 2
2
4
SO 3
motor drive, 3VT3 200-3M..0

motor
storage device
connector to connect control circuits
connector for external operations counter
switch to signal AUTO (NO-C) / MANUAL (NC-C) modes
external operations counter, 3VT9 300-3MF10
recommended wiring of the control circuits, not included
with drive
push button
ON, OFF
S
switch for energy storage (switched on = automatic
storage, switch may be continuously switched on)
Q3
switching unit, 3VT2 725-.AA36-0AA0
J
Q
main contacts
current transformers
T1, T2, T3, T41)
trip-free mechanism
V
ETU
circuit breaker - overcurrent release - switch disconnector
LP/DP/MP/MPS
- switch disconnector unit, 3VT9 225-6DT00
push button to test release
TEST
3VT9 200-4PA30 plug-in device
3VT9 200-4WA30 withdrawable device
connecting cable, 3VT9 300-4PL00
X1, X2
contacts signalling position of circuit breaker/switchSO1, SO2, SO3
disconnector in plug-in or 3VT9 300-4WL00 withdrawable
device
3VT9 300-14.00
shunt trip
3VT9 300-15.00
undervoltage release with early contact
3VT9 300-14.10
3VT9 300-2AJ00 early contact
1)
3/12
MP
M
P
X3
X4
S5
YC
B
X2
or
-4WA30
YC
Ext.oper.
counter
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
cavity no.10
Connecting cable
10.Y4
10.Y2
X4
10.Y2
NSO0_00089
PE
A2
B2
X3
A2
MP
Only for 4-pole design of 3VT2 725-.AA46-0AA0 switching unit.
Siemens AG 2007

4-pole version
control circuits
Q3
L+

1
1
3
5
2 4
ON
S
SO 1
OFF
-4PA30
Auxiliary trips/Early contact
NC
3VT9 2..-6..0 1
10.Y3
3VT9 300-2AJ00
Main circuit
10.Y1
A1
10.Y1
3VT9 300-1U.10
X3 9 7
A1
3VT9 300-1U.00
Motor drive
B1
3VT9 300-1S.00
-4WA30
7
A
I>
I>
NO
or
S5
or
U<
or
U<
B
T1
T2
T3
TEST
T4
10.Y4
10.Y2
X4
10.Y2
cavity no. 10
-4WA30
YC
Ext.oper.
counter
SO 2
1
NSO0_00091
PE
A2
B2
X3
A2
MP
SO 3
4 2
4 2
-4PA30
2
Connecting cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
X2
Switches
6.1
6.2
6.4
auxiliary
6.3
5.1
5.2
5.4
auxiliary
5.3
4.1
4.2
4.4
auxiliary
4.3
2.1
3.1
2.1
3.3
auxiliary
2.3
3.3
3.1
3.2
3.4
3.3
2.1
2.2
2.4
auxiliary
cavity no. 3
cavity no. 2 + 3
cavity no. 4
cavity no. 5
6.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
6.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
or or
6.4
5.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
5.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
or
5.4
or
4.1 3VT9 300-2AD10

3VT9 300-2AH10
4.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
or
4.4
or
2.2
3.2 3VT9 300-2AE10
or
2.2
3.4 3VT9 300-2AF10
or
2.4
3.4 3VT9 300-2AG10
or
3.1 3VT9 300-2AD10

3VT9 300-2AH10
3.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AH10
cavity no. 2
3.4
or or
or or
cavity no. 6
NSO0_00092
cavity no. 1
2.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

2.1 3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
2.4
or
2.3
1.1
1.2
1.4
3VT9 300-2AD10
or
1.1
1.4
relative
3VT9 300-2AC10
1.2
1.3
signal
X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Connecting cable
3/13
Siemens AG 2007

Functions
States of switches in the circuit breaker accessory compartment
Switched off manually or

electrically by drive
Switched off by overcurrent release
Switched off by auxiliary

release or by TEST button
or the trip pusch button on
the motor drive
Note: 0 contact open, 1 contact closed

1)
Accessory compartment 4, 5, 6 are only for 4.pole design

Location switches in accessory compartments, see page 3/57.
3/14
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AG10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-1U.10
Switched on
Lever positon of circuit breaker
3VT9 300-2AJ00
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
2 and 3
3VT9 300-2AC10
2 and 3
3VT9 300-2AD10
2 and 3
3VT9 300-2AE10
3 (4 ... 6)1) 10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AF10
Siemens AG 2007

Recommended cross-sections of cables, busbars and flexibars
for fixed, plug-in and withdrawable designs
Power circuit
Is connected using Cu or Al busbars or cables, and possibly
cables with cable lugs
For greater connecting options, connecting sets are
produced (see page 3/9).
Generally, conductors from the supply are connected to input
terminals 1, 3, 5 and conductors from the load to terminals 2,
4, 6. But it is possible to reverse the connection (exchanging
input and output terminals without limiting rated short-circuit
ultimate breaking capacity Icu)
In case of reversed connection, in the majority of cases,
circuit breaker/switch disconnector must be fitted with
3VT9 300-8CE30 insulating barriers also on the side of
terminals 2, 4, 6
We recommend painting the connecting busbars
Input and output connectors/busbars must be mechanically
reinforced in order to avoid transferring electrodynamic forces
to the circuit breaker during short circuiting
deionization space of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector
(see page 3/16).
Rated current Permissed cross-section

S
In
Busbars W x H
Cu
Al
Cu
Al
mm2
mm2
mm
mm
40
50
63
10
10
16
16
16
25
80
100
125
25
35
50
35
50
70
20 x 2
25 x 2
25 x 2
25 x 3
160
200
250
70
95
120
95
120
150
25 x 3
25 x 4
25 x 5
25 x 4
25 x 5
25 x 6
Maximum circuit breaker/switch disconnector loads in accordance with ambient temperature

3VT2 circuit breaker/switch disconnector-connection to pole by
1 x 120 mm2 Cu cable
Auxiliary circuits
using flexible 0.5 ... 1 mm2 Cu conductors to terminals on
these devices
Motor drive and auxiliary circuits of the plug-in or withdrawable design are connected using a connector.
50 C
55 C
60 C
65 C
70 C
250 A
250 A
250 A
250 A
250 A
Connecting set specifications

Order No.
Rated
current
In
Maximum permissible conductor cross-section

Cable type
Sector-shaped
conductor,
stranded
Sector-shaped
conductor, solid
Round
conductor, stranded
Round
conductor,
solid
Busbars
and
cable lugs
Technical
information
WxH
A
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm
Page
3VT9 200-4TA30
250
25 x ...
3VT9 200-4RC30
3VT9 215-4TF00
250
25 x ...
3VT9 200-4TC30
3VT9 200-4TC00
250
16 ... 150 Cu
10 ...150 Cu
16 ... 150
10 ...150 Cu
3VT9 215-4TD30
3VT9 215-4TD00
250
25 ... 150 Cu/Al
16 ...150 Cu/Al
25 ... 150 Cu/Al
16 ... 150 Cu/Al
3VT9 224-4TD30
3VT9 224-4TD00
250
150 ... 240 Cu/Al
120 ... 240 Cu/Al
150 ... 240 Cu/Al
120 ... 240 Cu/Al
3/18, 3/29
3VT9 215-4TF30
3VT9 215-4TF00
250
2 x (25 ... 150) Cu/Al
2 x (16 ... 150) Cu/Al
2 x (25 ... 150) Cu/Al
2 x (16 ... 150) Cu/Al
3/18, 3/30
3VT9 224-4TF30
3VT9 224-4TF00
250
2 x (150 ... 240) Cu/Al 2 x (120 ... 240) Cu/Al
2 x (150 ... 240) Cu/Al 2 x (120 ... 240) Cu/Al
3/18, 3/30
3VT9 203-4TF30
3VT9 203-4TF00
250
6 x (6 ... 35) Cu/Al
6 x (6 ... 35) Cu/Al
3/19, 3/31
3VT9 200-4ED30
250
3VT9 200-4EE30
250
3VT9 200-4TN30
10/16
6 x (6 ... 35) Cu/Al
6 x (6 ... 35) Cu/Al
3/20, 3/30
3/20
3/21
1,5 ... 2,54 ... 6 Cu flexible conductor
3/15
Connecting and installation
Siemens AG 2007

Dimension drawings
- Only in case that circuit breaker/switch disconnector is
connected to the source using terminals 2, 4, 6 and furthermore:
- a) If Ue AC 415 V, it is necessary to use 3VT9 300-8CE30
insulating barriers or a 3VT9 200-8CB30 terminal cover;
- b) if insulated conductors are not used for connecting power
circuit to terminals 2, 4, 6, flexibars or rear connection, it is
necessary to use 3VT9 300-8CE30 insulating barriers or a
3VT9 200-8CB30 terminal cover.
Use of insulating barriers and terminal covers with circuit

breakers and switch disconnectors
Front connection
terminals 1, 3, 5
a) If Ue AC 415 V, it is necessary to use 3VT9 300-8CE30
insulating barriers or a 3VT9 200-8CB30 terminal cover.
b) If insulated conductors are not used for connecting power
circuit to terminals 1, 3, 5, flexibars or rear connection, it is necessary to use 3VT9 300-8CE30 insulating barriers or a
terminals 2, 4, 6
Rear connection
Insulating barriers or terminal covers need not be used.
Plug-in and withdrawable devices

Insulating barriers or terminal covers need not be used.
1
B = 105
C = 80
A1
A2
100 150
1 3VT9 200-8CB30
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
TEST
B=0
B = 20
105
TEST
105
105
B = 20
minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switchdisconnctor and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for
connections using insulated conductors, cables, flexibars
A1

A2
minimum distance:
between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and busbar
between two circuit breaker/switch disconnectors situated vertically above one another
between uninsulated connections of two circuit breakers/switch disconnectors above one another
B, C
minimum distance between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall
3/16
C=0
ON
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00105
225
20
Fixed design
Siemens AG 2007

D
max. 3 mm
max. 3 mm
Cable
Flexibar
NSO0_00106
> 15 mm
Busbar
230
415
3VT2 H wired with Ik
kA
d 100
> 36 ... 65
3VT2 N wired with Ik
kA
d 60
500
690
d 36
d 25
d 13
d 36
d 16
d 10
D mm
C mm
< 80
t 80
t 10
A
A1
A2
mm
mm
mm
50
100
200
50
150
250
50
100
200
50
150
250
50
150
250
t 30
A
A1
A2
mm
mm
mm
50
100
150
50
150
200
50
100
150
50
150
200
50
150
200
t 10
A
A1
A2
mm
mm
mm
50
100
150
50
150
200
50
100
150
50
150
200
50
150
200
Note: Ik - max. short-circuit curent in the protected circuit (rms).

Fixed design
Drilling position

35
2
25
18
35
48
100 ... < AC 415 V
103
150 ... > AC 415 V
4 x 5.5
60
26
17
154
162
167
193
213
225
29.5
65
ON
OFF
162
35
2
R 88
16
26
8.5
105
20
31.5
NSO0_00503
35.5
121
TEST
35
105
117
35
3/17
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, front connection (3VT9 224-4TD30 connecting set)
42
35
25
35
35
223
162
193
225
248
273
335
ON
OFF
NSO0_00107
TEST
30
22
105
105
Fixed design, front connection (3VT9 215-4TF30 connecting set)

35
40
35
24
25
35
224
261
162
193
225
244
281
301
335
ON
OFF
NSO0_00109
TEST
25
18
105
18
105
3/18
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, front connection (3VT9 203-4TF30 connecting set)
35
24
58
47
35
24
36
24
35
213
236
259
162
193
223
225
246
269
287
335
ON
OFF
11
25
105
NSO0_00113
TEST
6 x 8.4
105
3/19
Siemens AG 2007

35
Drilling position
35
105
46
21
2
8.5
35
7.5
4
Fixed design, rear connection (3VT9 200-4RC30 connecting set)
20
35
48
162
193
225
193
65
154
162
ON
OFF
4 x 5.5
28
16
16
NSO0_00115
8.5
36
105
35
98
Fixed design, front connection (3VT9 200-4ED30 connecting set)

105
50
35
50
35
24
29
35
225
162
273
193
ON
OFF
36.5
NSO0_00121
TEST
12.5
3/20
32
32
1.5
TEST
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, front connection (3VT9 200-4EE30 connecting set)
35
29
25
35
35
162
193
308
225
360
ON
OFF
TEST
105
70
15 25
81.5
32
32
NSO0_00123
11
70
3/21
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, hand drive
1
1 3VT2
2 3VT9 200-3HA.0,-3HB.0
3 3VT9 300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
50
37
NSO0_00118
42.5
133
TEST
6
90
140
25
50
Fixed design, hand drive with adjustable lever
NSO0_00126
1 3VT2
2 3VT9 200-3HA.0,-3HB.0
4
3
70
3 3VT9 300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
37
4 3VT9 300-3HG.0,-3HH.0
5 3VT9 300-3HJ.0
70
50
cabinet door
133
TEST
6
90
6
140
180 495 (-3HJ10)
375 540 (-3HJ20)
25
Cabinet door adaption

min. 145
27.5
NSO0_00128
55
4 x 6.5
55
Hinge of cabinet door
3/22
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, 3VT9 200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
Opening dimensions in swtichgear
door for external operation cycle
7.9
14
m
ax
R 48
MANUAL
AUTO
195
27
4,3 max.
NSO0_00129
82
138
TEST
247
Plug-in device 3VT9 200-4PA30
140
4 x 5.5
4+8 mm
4 x 5.5
16
26
8.5
105
20
35
35
35
31.5
20
26
31.5
35
6
75
75
227
145
290
140
162
193
227
232
258
278
25
18
35
NSO0_00132
35
Drilling positions
35
35
105
3/23
Siemens AG 2007

Plug-in device, 3VT9 200-8CB30 terminal cover
11
12
105
13
ON
290
14
OFF
400
Plug-in design
TEST
4+6 mm
6
NSO0_00520
105
140
157
182
NSO0_00136
105
105
35
70
103
98
105
98
21
21
46
Drilling positions
7.5
Plug-in design
8.5
52
20
227
258
140
258
258
290
ON
OFF
TEST
3/24
36
35
35
6
R
28
31.5
NSO0_00139
75
28
16
16
105
4 x 5.5
45
8.5
1.5
4 x 5.5
35
35
Siemens AG 2007

Plug-in design, rotary operating mechanism
NSO0_00142
TEST
175
225
Plug-in desig, 3VT9 200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
MANUAL
AUTO
4,3 max.
NSO0_00143
TEST
282
31
3/25
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable device 3VT9 200-4WA30
35
Drilling positions
25
18
35
145
4 x 5.5
5
227
290
140
162
193
227
232
258
278
140
4 x 5.5
4+8 mm
16
26
20
35
8.5
Withdrawable device, 3VT9 200-8CB30 terminal cover
130
180
105
35
5
140
400
4+8 mm
NSO0_00151
105
179
3/26
35
105
105
70
103
140
27.5
31.5
20
26
31.5
35
NSO0_00148
6
75
75
35
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable design
Operating position
Checking position
30
65
75
65
75
179
290
140
140
ON
OFF
NSO0_00153
TEST
105
180
Withdrawable design, Hand drive
105
105
170
187
212
140
157
182
Operating position
Checking position
140
140
75
75
30
NSO0_00156
TEST
175
205
225
255
3/27
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable design, 3VT9 200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
75
75
30
MANUAL
140
140
AUTO
4,3 max.
NSO0_00159
TEST
7.5
Withdrawable device, rear connection (3VT9 200-4RC00 connecting sets)
31
Drilling position
98
105
21
46
312
31
282
52
20
140
258
258
ON
OFF
TEST
45
4 x 5.5
28
NSO0_00166
17
16
37
3/28
75
8.5
35
35
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable device, rear connection (3VT9 200-4RC00 connecting sets)
35
103
2
25
18
100 ... < AC 415 V
35
48
4 x 5.5
60
26
17
154
162
167
193
213
225
29.5
65
ON
OFF
162
35
150 ... > AC 415 V
35
Drilling position
2
R 88
16
26
20
8.5
31.5
70
105
117
140
NSO0_00169
35.5
121
TEST
35
35
Fixed design, front connection (connecting set 3VT9 224-4TD30 + 3VT9 224-4TD00)
35
35
35
35
162
193
225
248
273
335
ON
OFF
TEST
30
140
3/29
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, front connection (connecting set 3VT9 215-4TF30 + 3VT9 215-4TF00)
35
35
40
35
24
25
35
224
261
162
193
225
244
281
301
335
ON
OFF
NSO0_00174
TEST
25
18
140
18
105
105
35
35
28
42
35
25
35
269
219
162
193
225
248
294
319
335
ON
OFF
TEST
30
22
140
3/30
22
Siemens AG 2007

35
35
58
47
35
36
24
35
213
236
259
162
193
223
225
246
269
287
335
ON
OFF
NSO0_00178
TEST
25
11
6 x 8.4
105
140
35
46
21
2
8.5
35
35
105
20
35
48
193
OFF
162
193
225
ON
65
154
162
4 x 5.5
140
28
NSO0_00180
8.5
1.5
TEST
16
16
35
7.5
4
35
36
133
3/31
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, rotary operating mechanism
1
1 3VT2
2 3VT9 200-3HA.0,-3HB.0
3 3VT9 300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
50
37
NSO0_00183
77.5
133
TEST
6
90
140
25
50
Fixed design, rotary operating mechanism with adjustable lever
NSO0_00185
1 3VT2
2 3VT9 200-3HA.0,-3HB.0
4
70
37
70
50
cabinet door
133
6
6
90
140
180 495 (-3HJ10)
375 540 (-3HJ20)
25

min. 145
27.5
NSO0_00128
55
4 x 6.5
55
3/32
4 3VT9 300-3HG.0,-3HH.0
5 3VT9 300-3HJ.0
TEST
3 3VT9 300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
3
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, 3VT9 200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
Opening dimensions in switchgear
door for external operation cycle
7.9
14
m
ax
R 48
MANUAL
AUTO
195
27
4,3 max.
NSO0_00187
82
138
TEST
140
247
Drilling positions

35
25
18
4 x 5.5
4+8 mm
6
4 x 5.5
20
26
75
31.5
75
227
140
290
140
162
193
227
232
258
278
145
35
16
26
8.5
140
20
35
35
35
31.5
35
NSO0_00189
35
35
35
105
3/33
Siemens AG 2007

Plug-in device, 3VT9 200-8CB40 terminal cover
105
1
400
4+8 mm
NSO0_00193
35
140
70
103
Plug-in design
290
ON
OFF
NSO0_00138
TEST
140
3/34
105
140
157
182
Siemens AG 2007

105
21
46
Drilling position
2
7.5
Plug-in design, rear connection

(connecting set 3VT9 200-4RC30 + 3VT9 200-4RC00)
52
20
140
258
258
290
ON
OFF
TEST
45
4 x 5.5
28
NSO0_00195
36
35
35
16
16
140
75
8.5
35
140
3/35
Siemens AG 2007

290
NSO0_00196
TEST
175
140
225
Plug-in design, 3VT9 200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
MANUAL
290
AUTO
4,3 max.
NSO0_00198
TEST
140
3/36
282
31
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable device, 3VT9 200-4WA40
214
35
25
18
35
4 x 5.5
145
35
Drilling position
140
290
140
162
193
227
232
258
278
227
4 x 5.5
4+8 mm
31.5
16
26
20
35
8.5
75
20
26
35.5
NSO0_00202
75
35
35
105
140
215
130
Withdrawable device, 3VT9 200-8CB40 terminal cover
105
35
3
140
400
4+8 mm
NSO0_00200
140
215
70
103
140
27.5
3/37
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable design
Operating position
Checking position
30
65
75
65
75
213
140
140
290
ON
OFF
NSO0_00203
TEST
140
215
105
105
170
187
212
140
157
182
46
105
133
52
20
65
21
213
7.5
Withdrawable design, rear connection (connecting set 3VT9 200-4RC30 + 3VT9 200-4RC00)
140
258
290
ON
NSO0_00204
OFF
140
215
3/38
37
75
35
17
16
28
8.5
4 x 5.5
45
TEST
35
35
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable design, Hand drive
Operating position
Checking position
30
290
140
140
65
75
65
75
213
NSO0_00206
TEST
175
140
215
205
255
225
Withdrawable design, 3VT9 200-3M..0 motor operating mechanism

30
MANUAL
AUTO
65
75
140
290
140
290
65
75
NSO0_00207
213
4,3 max.
TEST
140
215
282
31
312
31
3/39
Siemens AG 2007

Plug-in Device
Technical data
Specifications 3VT9 300-4WL00
Plug-in device
Order No.
Locking plug-in device against inserting circuit breakers
Plug-in design of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is

intended for demanding industrial applications where rapid
exchange of the circuit breaker along with both visual and
conductive disconnection of the circuit are needed.
plug-in device includes complete accessories for assembling
circuit breaker/switch disconnector in plug-in design from the
originally fixed design
components of the plug-in device are:
- supporting part of the plug-in device 2 connection sets
(total of 6 terminals) for fitting on to the switching unit
- interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switching off
of the circuit breaker for handling inserting and removal)
- set of mounting bolts for securing circuit breaker into plug-in
device (to secure plug-in device into switchboard, a set of
mounting bolts is used that is included in delivery of
switching unit 3VT2 725-.AA36-0AA0.
3VT9 300-4WL00
Rated islation voltage Ui

Rated frequency fn
AC-13
DC-15
Thermal current Ith
Arrangement of contacts
Terminal protection
(connected switch)
V
Hz
A
mm2
AC 400
AC 250
AC 500
50/60
3 A/400 V
0.15 A/250 V, 3 A/125 V, 4 A/30 V
6
001
0.5 ... 1
IP20
For wiring diagram of circuit breaker in plug-in device with

accessories, see page 3/12.
Position signalling 3VT9 300-4WL00
Plug-in device may be provided with a maximum of

four switches (for 4-pole design, max. 6 switches) for
signalling the engaged/removed position.
Keying set 3VT9 200-4WN00
Circuit breaker position

Circuit breaker in plug-in design has two positions:
1. inserted (operating position)
2. removed
Power circuit
connecting set 3VT9 200-4TA30 is used for connecting with
busbars or cable lugs and is included in delivery of switching
unit 3VT9 275-.AA36-0AA0
for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use connecting sets, see page 3/9
connections must comply with our recommendations, see
page 3/15.
Auxiliary circuits
These are connected using 15-wire cable 3VT9 300-4PL00.

States of switches 3VT9 300-4WL00 in plug-in device
according to circuit breaker position
11 ... 14 (19, 20)1)
Circiut breaker position
1
2
Inserted
Removed
Note: 0-contact open, 1-contact closed

1)
Accessory compartment 19 and 20 are only for 4-pole design.
3/40
Plug-in device and circuit breaker can be provided with keying

set, which prevents inserting any other circuit breaker into the
plug-in device.
Circuit breaker accessories in plug-in design
Circuit breaker in plug-in device has the same accessories as
does the fixed circuit breaker.
Advantages and enhanced safety for operator:
unambiguous remote signalling of the circuit breaker position
option to lock plug-in device with padlocks to prevent
inserting of circuit breaker
visible and conductive disconnection of the power circuit
easy exchange of circuit breakers in case of failure
IP20 protection of all termination points
Plug-in device does not need earthing.
Siemens AG 2007

Plug-in Device
Plug-in device with motor drive
Circuit breaker in plug-in design with motor drive
Recommended wiring of circuit breaker in plug-in design with motor drive

Motor drive control circuits
Q3
L+
ON
S
OFF
NC
S5
Description
motor drive 3VT9 300-3M.00
motor
storage device
terminal strip to connect control circuits
terminal strip for external operations counter
switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL (NC-C) modes
external operations counter 3VT9 300-3MF10
recommended wiring of the control circuits (control ciruits
not included in motor driver delivery)
make push button
break push button
switch to store up energy
motor drive circuit breaker for
AC 24 V LSN 4C/1
AC 48 V LSN 4C/1
AC 110 V LSN 4C/1
AC 230 V LSN 2C/1
DC 24 V LSN-DC 4C/1
DC 48 V LSN-DC 4C/1
DC 110 V LSN-DC 4C/1
ON
OFF
S
Q3
Motor drive
X3 9 7
Symbol
MP
M
P
X3
X4
S5
YC
B
NO
M
X3
8
PE
6
N
X4
NSO0_00208
MP
YC
Operating
counter
Unplugging circuit breaker with motor drive

each time before removing the circuit breaker we recommend
first to turn the AUTO/MANUAL switch on the motor drive to
the MANUAL position
more operating information can be found in the operating
instructions
not adhering to this procedure or failing to follow the recommended wiring could mean that the circuit breaker will not
successfully turn on at the first attempt.
3/41
Siemens AG 2007

Plug-in Device
Changes in states of switches in cavities of switching unit when
inserting and withdrawing circuit breaker
State of switches before removing- State of switches after removinginserted position
withdrawn
3 (4,5,6)1) 1
3 (4,5,6)1)
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT 9300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
State of the
main contacts
Lever position of
circuit breaker
Switched on
Manually switched off or

by motor drive
Switched off by releases
Switched off from switched-on state:

by means of auxiliary release,
TEST push button or by
OFF push button on the motor drive

1)
Accessory compartment 4, 5, 6 are only for 4-pole design.
3/42
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable design
Technical data
Auxiliary circuits
Withdrawable design

Circuit breaker accessories in withdrawable design
Circuit breaker in withdrawable design has same accessories as
fixed circuit breaker.
Order No.
Withdrawable device 3VT9-200-4WA30
Withdrawable design of the circuit breaker/switch - disconnector

is intended for demanding industrial applications where rapid
exchange of the circuit breaker, frequent checking and both
visual and conductive disconnection of the circuit are needed.
withdrawable device includes complete accessories for
assembling circuit breaker/switch - disconnector in withdrawable design from the originally fixed design
components of the withdrawable device are:
- supporting part of the withdrawable device
- 2 movable side plates
- 2 connection sets (total of 6 terminals) for fitting onto the
switching unit
of the circuit breaker for handling, inserting and withdrawing)
- a set of mounting bolts is used to fasten the withdrawable
device into the switchboard, and these are include with the
3VT2 725-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit
Circuit breaker in withdrawable design has three positions:
2. withdrawn (checking position)
3. removed

3VT9 200-4WL00
V
V
Hz

Rated frequency fn
AC-13
DC-15
Thermal current Ith
Terminal protection
(connected switch)
AC 400, 250
AC 500
50/60
A
mm2
3 A/400 V
0.15 A/250 V, 3 A/125 V, 4 A/30 V
6
001
0.5 ... 1
IP20

unambiguous remote and local signalling of the circuit breaker
and arrestment positions
checking of circuit breaker and accessories function in the
checking position
locking of withdrawable device prevents inserting of circuit
breaker, locking of circuit breaker in inserted (operating)
position, locking of circuit breaker in withdrawn (checking)
position; locking by means of padlocks
withdrawable device does not need earthing.
States of switches 3VT9 300-4WL00 in withdrawable device
according to circuit breaker and arrestment positions
11,12,13,14
(19, 20)1)
Withdrawable device and circuit breaker can be provided with

keying set, which prevents inserting another circuit breaker into
the withdrawable device.
Circiut breaker and arrestment position
16,18
Inserted and unarrested
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
Withdrawn and unarrested
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
Removed and unarrested
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1)
Withdrawable device can be provided with switches for signalling the position of the circuit breaker, see table.
15,17
(19, 20)1)
Note: 0, contact open; 1, contact closed

Operating state is always in arrested position
In arrested position it is possible to lock the withdrawable
device (for more detailed information, see Advantages and
enhanced safety for operator)
Power circuit
page 3/14.
3/43
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable design
Circuit breaker in withdrawable design
Locking withdrawable device against inserting circuit breaker
Locking circuit breaker into withdrawable device against tampering
3/44
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable design
Inserting and withdrawing circuit breaker with motor drive
each time before inserting or withdrawing the circuit breaker
we recommend first to turn the AUTO/MANUAL switch on the
motor drive to the MANUAL position
instructions
Withdrawable design with motor drive
Recommended wiring of circuit breaker in withdrawable design

with motor drive
Q3
L+
ON
S
OFF
Motor drive
X3 9 7
NC
S5
Symbol
Description
MP
M
P
X3
X4
S5
YC
B
motor drive 3VT9 300-3M..0

motor
storage device
recommended wiring of the control circuits (control circuits not included in motor driver delivery)
make push button
break push button
AC 24 V LSN 4C/1
AC 48 V LSN 4C/1
AC 110 V LSN 4C/1
AC 230 V LSN 2C/1
DC 24 V LSN-DC 4C/1
DC 48 V LSN-DC 4C/1
ON
OFF
S
Q3
NO
M
X3
8
PE
X4
NSO0_00208
MP
YC
Operating
counter
Changes in states of switching unit when inserting and withdrawing circuit breaker
State before insertion/withdrawable
State after insertion/withdrawable
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
4
3
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3 (4,5,6)1)
2
3VT9300-2AC10
1
3VT9300-2AD10
3 (4,5,6)1)
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
State of switches before withdrawal-inserted position o State of switches after withdrawal-withdrawn position
3VT9300-2AC10
Circuit breaker before withdrawal
3VT9300-2AC10
State of switches before insertion-withdrawn positiono State of switches after insertion-inserted position
Lever position of circuit

breaker
Circuit breaker before insertion
2
1
Switched on
Manually switched off or by motor

drive
Switched off from switched-on

state: by means of auxiliary release,
TEST push button or by OFF push
button on the motor drive
3/45
Siemens AG 2007

ETU MP
Technical data
Ir
tr
Overcurrent releases for 3VT2 switching units are produced in

current values of In = 100, 160 and 250 A. The ETU LP are produced with rated currents of 160, 200 and 250 A. The
releases (including regulation of -60%) cover a current range
from 40 to 250 A.
Ii
Depending upon the needs for adjusting the releases tripping

characteristic to the protected device and to the variability of the
characteristic with regard to selectivity, the following release
devices are available:
ETU LP
I
NSO0_00215
50 ms
0 ms
They have more kinds of characteristics with adjustable Ir, tr and

Ii.
ETU MPS
L
t
Ir
tr
They have one type of characteristic and fixed Ir and Ii

settings.
ETU DP
ETU LP, DP, MPand MPs overcurrent releases are intended for
3-pole, 3VT2 725-.AA36-0AA0 switching units and 4-pole, 3VT2
725-.AA46-0AA0 switching units with disconnecting of the N
pole.
Ir
They have more kinds of characteristics with adjustable Ir, tr,

Ii and tv.
tsd
NSO0_00214
NSO0_00502
Isd
ETU DPN
I
L
t
Ii
NSO0_00506
They have one type of characteristic with adjustable Ir and Ii.

Ii
NSO0_00216
The electronic overcurrent release consists of a separate and

interchangeable unit, which is supplied with the 3VT2
switching unit. By exchanging the overcurrent release, the range
of the circuit breakers rated current can be easily changed.
Tripping characteristics of release devices
Are intended for 4-pole, 3VT2 725-AA56-0AA0 switching units

with protected N pole. They have more characteristics with
adjustable Ir , tr , Ii and IN.
3/46
Siemens AG 2007

ETU LP, DP, MP and MPS- description of function
Proper functioning of releases does not depend on the form of
current in the power circuit. The function of the release is
supported by a microprocessor, which processes a sampled
signal of the power circuit and recalculates it to obtain an rms
value. Therefore, the releases are suitable for protecting circuits
where the sinusoidal current is distorted by high harmonics
(e.g. circuits with controlled rectifiers, power factor compensators, pulse loading, and the like).
All the releases protect a circuit against short-circuiting and
overloading. Tripping characteristic of the releases is independent of the ambient temperature. The release is affixed to the
switching unit by two bolts. The transparent cover over the
adjustment controls can be sealed.
Setting the tripping characteristic
The tripping characteristic of the overcurrent releases is defined
by standard EN 947-2. For releases ETU DP, MP, MPS and DPN,
the characteristic is adjusted using latched switches on the
overcurrent release unit.
A visual demonstration on setting the tripping characteristic can
be found in the SIMARIS design program.
L is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of thermal
protection.
S is a zone of medium overcurrents and includes long-distance
short-circuit protection for lines. Intentional delay in tripping of
these low short-circuit currents can be used to achieve selectivity of protective devices. For MPS releases, the delay can be
set at 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms.
I is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against
ultimate short-circuit currents. For MP releases, the time delay
can be set at 0 or 50 ms.
1. Dependent release (thermal) L

The dependent release ETU DP is adjusted using one Ir
switch. The Ir switch is used to adjust the circuit breakers rated current, with the characteristic shifting on the current axis.
By means of its internal circuitry, the release is set to one type
of characteristic.
The dependent releases ETU MP, MPS and DPN are adjusted
using two switches, Ir and tr. The first (Ir) switch is used to adjust the circuit breakers rated current. The characteristic is
moved on the current axis.
By turning the other switch (tr), the time is adjusted after which
the circuit breaker will trip while passing through 7.2 Ir. The
tripping characteristic thus moves on the time axis. Using the
tr switch, it is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics. For
ETU MP and MPS releases there are available 4 characteristics for motor protection and 4 characteristics for protecting lines. Breaking times correspond with the release class 10 A,
10, 20, 30. By changing tr, it is possible to select the characteristic
according to the required motor starting (light, medium, heavy
or very heavy starting). For ETU DPN releases, there are available 8 characteristics for protecting lines or transformers. It is
not possible to turn the device back on right after the dependent release has been actuated and circuit breaker tripped.
The
release must be allowed to cool off, because it has a thermal
memory. The memory can be disabled by turning the switch
from the normal Tt position to the T0 position. The dependent release remains active, and only its thermal memory is
inactivated. Switching off the thermal memory should be used
only in well-justified cases, and with the knowledge that there
could be rising temperature in the protected device with
repeated tripping.
2. Delayed independent release S
This release is only in the ETU MPS overcurrent releases. The
delayed independent release has the function of a delayed
short-circuit release. It is used to set up a selective cascade of
circuit breakers. It is set up using parameters Isd and tv. Isd is an
n-multiple of current Ir (Isd= n Ir). It is a short-circuit
current that, within the span of Ii to Ii, will trip the circuit
breaker with delay tv, where tv is a delay set up for switching off
the release. The delayed independent release actuates the
circuit breaker if the current in the circuit reaches at least the
preset n-multiple and lasts at least the preset delay time tv.
3. Independent instantaneous release (short-circuit trip) I
For releases ETU DP, MP and DPN, the independent instantaneous release is adjusted using one Irm switch. The Irm
switch is used for setting up the short-circuit current that, upon
its being reached or exceeded, causes instantaneous tripping
of the circuit breaker.
3/47
Siemens AG 2007

Overcurrent releases ETU LP-Lines
The tripping characteristic from the cold state indicates the tripping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment
when an overcurrent develops, no current is flowing through the
circuit breaker. The tripping characteristic tripped from warm
state indicates the tripping times during which it is assumed that,
before the moment when an overcurrent develops, current is flowing through the circuit breaker. Characteristics of electronic releases are independent of the ambient temperature and are plotted in a cold state. Digital releases enable simulation of a release
in warm state. The tripping times become shorter in a steady
state, as shown in the following graph. The steady state is a period during which the characteristic does not change. If the circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced current for at least 30 minutes, the tripping times will be cut by a half. If the load is less
than 70% of Ir , the tripping time does not become shorter.
k [-]
NSO0_00217
Tripping characteristics of ETU LP, DP, MP, MPS and DPN

releases with load
1.0
Protecting lines with low starting currents

The 3VT9 2..-6AB00 release is intended for the 3VT2 switching
unit. The release has a thermal memory that cannot be disabled.
Releases rated currents are given by their type designations
and correspond to a standardised series of currents (see specifications table).
The short-circuit release is fixed at 4 In.
One of the releases advantages is its simplicity, because it does
not require any adjustment. Therefore, it is intended for less
complicated applications.
Specifications
Order No.
3VT9 216-6AB00
3VT9 200-6AB00
3VT9 250-6AB00
0.6
T
0.4
500
0.2
100
50
0.0
50
60
70
80
90
100
I r [%]
Tripping time shortening with load

T - When tripping from the releases warm state, the tripping
time of the characteristic is cut short during the standstill time tu
by coefficient k.
20
10
5
Thermal standstill time of the characteristics

For all overcurrent releases, the thermal standstill time is tu t 30
min. During this time, the tripping time tv is cut short from the
cold-state characteristic by the coefficient k.
0.02
0.01
0.5
The real tripping time is ts = k x tv

Example
The shortening constant can be read from the graph. With
steady current 85% of Ir the real tripping time will be hortened to:
ts = 0.74 x tv
k [] time shortening coefficient
Ir [A] adjusted rated current of the overcurrent release
tv [s] tripping time of the release derived from the characteristic
ts [s] real tripping time of the release tripped from warm state
tu [s] standstill period for particular characteristics
Overcurrent releases are set by the manufacturer
= min
Restart = T(t)
= min, 0 ms
tr = TV, t(t), min

Isd = 0 ms, min
0.5 Ir
3/48
640
800
1000
Ir
In = 160 A
In = 200 A
In = 250 A
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
IN =
160
200
250
NSO0_00218
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
200
Ii
Overload protection Ir
Tripping characteristic
0.8
Ir
Rated current In
Ii
10
20
50
x In
Siemens AG 2007

Overcurrent releases ETU DP-Distribution
Specification-adjustable
Protecting lines and transformers
Order No.
Rated current In
Overload
Restart
protection Ir
A
40
43
46
48
50
55
58
3VT9 210-6AC00 100
61
63
69
72
76
80
87
91
100
63
69
72
80
87
91
100
T(0)
T(t)
4 x lr
8 x lr
3VT9 216-6AC00 160
110
115
120
125
130
137
144
150
160
100
110
115
125
137
144
160
T(0)
T(t)
4 x lr
8 x lr
3VT9 225-6AC00 250
172
180
190
200
210
220
231
243
250
T(0)
T(t)
4 x lr
8 x lr
On the lower part of the release cover are two photocells for
communicating with the prospective signalling unit.
The releases have tripping characteristics especially designed
for practical purposes that provide for optimal exploitation of
transformers up to 1.5 Ir.
The releases have simple adjustment of the tripping characteristic. Set-up includes only the rated current and the short-circuit
tripping level at 4 Ir or 8 Ir.
NSO0_00219
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
min.
Ir
x
max.
Ir
Ii
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
In = 100 A
In = 160 A
In = 250 A
1
0.5
I
0.2
0.1
0.05
8x
In = 100 A
4x
In = 160 A
4x
In = 250 A
4x
8x
Ii
8x
Ii
8x
Ii
4x
0.02
0.01
Instantaneous
short circuit
protection Ii
The 3VT9 2..-6AC00 release is intended for 3VT2 switching units.

Operation of the release is controlled by a microprocessor. The
release is equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled
by turning a switch on the front panel from position T(t) to position
T(0). After disabling the thermal memory, the thermal release remains active. The operational state 70% of Ir is signalled by an
LED indicator that flashes green in a 1.5 s interval. As the load
grows, the blinking frequency of the diode increases. In case of
a load larger than 110% of Ir, this LED will turn red and just before
tripping will begin to blink red.
0.1
0.05
0.02
8x
4x
0.01
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.2
0.5
8x
4x
10
50
20
x In
3/49
Siemens AG 2007

Overcurrent releases ETU MP-Motors
Direct protection for motors and generators
Possibility for protecting lines and transformers
The 3VT9 2..-6AP00 release is intended for 3VT2 switching units.

The operation of the release is controlled by a microprocessor.
The release is equipped with a thermal memory that can be
disabled by turning a switch on the front panel from position T(t)
to position T(0). After disabling of the thermal memory, the thermal release remains active.
When one or two phases fail (due to current greater than Ir in the
remaining phases), in the M-characteristic mode, the switch will
open with a 4 s delay (so-called undercurrent release).
Order No.
Rated Over- tr (7,2 x Ir)

current load
In
protection Ir
A
3VT9 210-6AP00 100
Another parameter for adjusting the release consists of the rated

current and short-circuit tripping level. The time delay of the
short-circuit release can be set to 0 or 50 ms. The operational
state 70% of Ir is signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green
in a 1.5 s interval. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of
the diode increases. In case of a load larger than 110% of Ir this
LED will turn red and just before tripping will begin to blink red.
transformers up to 1.5 Ir. A total of 8 characteristics can be set
on the release. Mode M provides 4 characteristics suitable for
protecting motors and in mode TV are 4 characteristics for
protecting transformers and lines. The shape of each characteristic can be changed using a selector switch.
3VT9 216-6AP00 160
3VT9 225-6AP00 250
3/50
Restart Instantaneous
short circuit
protection Ii
kA
ms
40
43
46
48
50
55
58
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
T(0)
T(0
T(0
T(0)
T(0
T(0)
T(0
0,125
0,25
0,4
0,6
0,8
1,0
1,25
61
63
69
72
76
80
87
91
100
3 (M 3)
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
1 (TV 1)
T(0
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
1,5
1,5
1,25
1,0
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,25
0,125
50
63
69
72
80
87
91
100
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
T(0)
T(0
T(0
T(0)
T(0
T(0)
T(0
0,2
0,4
0,6
1,0
1,3
1,6
2,0
110
115
120
125
130
137
144
150
160
3 (M 3)
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
1 (TV 1)
T(0)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
2,4
2,0
2,0
1,6
1,3
1,0
0,6
0,4
0,2
100
110
115
125
137
144
160
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
T(0)
T(0
T(0
T(0)
T(0
T(0)
T(0
0,35
0,5
0,75
1,0
1,25
1,5
2,0
172
180
190
200
210
220
231
243
250
3 (M 3)
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
1 (TV 1)
T(0)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
2,5
2,0
2,0
1,5
1,25
1,0
0,75
0,5
0,35
50
50
Siemens AG 2007

Tripping characteristic 3VT9 2..-6AP00
min.
Ir
TV
max.
200
20
In = 100 A
In = 160 A
In = 250 A
20
20
10
10
10
5
2
1
0.02
50
In = 100 A
0.25
0.125
0.6 0.8 1.0
0.4
I i [kA]
1.25
1.5
0.02
0.01
0.1
tr
0 ms 50 ms
Ii
20
L
tr
15
20
15
In = 100 A
In = 160 A
In = 250 A
50
In = 160 A
0.2
0.1
0.05
I
50
In = 100 A
0.4
0.2
1.0 1.3 1.6
0.6
2.0
I i [kA]
2.4
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.25
0.125
0.02
0.01
0.01
0.1
0.05
max.
0.5
I
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
Ir
Ir
100
50
tr
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
min.
200
20
2
1
0 ms 50 ms
Ii
100
50
10
5
tr
Ir
NSO0_00220
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
500
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
500
0.6 0.8 1.0
0.4
1.25
I i [kA]
1.5
50
In = 160 A
0.2
0.4
1.0 1.3 1.6
0.6
2.0
I i [kA]
2.4
0.01
50
In = 250 A
0.5
0.35
I i [kA]
1.25
0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
0.2
0.5
10
50
20
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
50
In = 250 A
0.5
0.35
0.75 1.0
I i [kA]
1.25
1.5 2.0 2.5
0.2
0.5
10
50
20
x In
x In
3/51
Siemens AG 2007

Overcurrent releases ETU MPS-Motors, setting timing
selectivity
Enables adjusting time delay of independent release
Order No.
tsd (7.2 x Ir) Restart Short circuit

protection
(short time
delayed) Ii
40
43
46
48
50
55
58
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
61
63
69
72
76
80
87
91
100
3 (M 3)
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
1 (TV 1)
T(0)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
9
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
63
69
72
80
87
91
100
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
110
115
120
125
130
137
144
150
160
3 (M 3)
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
1 (TV 1)
T(0)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
9
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
100
110
115
125
137
144
160
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0
T(0))
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
172
180
190
200
210
220
231
243
250
3 (M 3)
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
1 (TV 1)
T(0)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
9
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
The 3VT9 2..-6AS00 release is intended for 3VT2 switching units.

Rated Overcurload
rent In protection Ir
current and tripping level of the delayed short-circuit release.
The time delay (tsd) can be set on the delayed short-circuit
release at 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms. The operational state 70% of Ir
is signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green in a 1.5 s
interval. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of the diode
increases. In case of a load larger than 110% of Ir, this LED will
turn red and just before tripping will begin to blink red. On the
lower part of the release cover are two photocells for communicating with the prospective signalling unit.
3VT9210-6AS00
3VT9216-6AS00
100
160

transformers up to 1.5 Ir A total of 8 characteristics can be set on
the release. Mode M provides 4 characteristics suitable for
protecting motors, and in mode TV are 4 characteristics for
3VT9225-6AS00
3/52
250
kA
ms
0
100
200
300
100
200
300
100
200
300
Siemens AG 2007

Tripping characteristic 3VT9 2..-6AS00
20
In = 100 A
In = 160 A
In = 250 A
tr [s]
2
1
0.5
S
1
tv [ms]
100
3 x Ir
0
0.2
Ir
0.5
tr
5
tv
10
In
50
20
x In
0.02
0.01
0.1
20
15
In = 100 A
In = 160 A
In = 250 A
tr [s]
S
300
200
0.2
0.1
0.05
I sd
2
I sd
In = 100 A
300
200
In = 250 A
In = 160 A
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
20
10
5
20
10
9 x Ir
2
1
0.5
5 x Ir
7 x Ir
20
10
5
Isd
tv
100
50
10
tr
20
15
200
L
100
50
tv [ms]
100
3 x Ir
200
NSO0_00222
max.
Ir
500
500
Ir
Isd
tv
n
min.
0.2
Ir
0.5
tr
I sd
2
I sd
In = 100 A
tr
Ir
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
In = 250 A
In = 160 A
TV
max.
9 x Ir
Ir
7 x Ir
min.
5 x Ir
NSO0_00221
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
5
tv
10
50
20
In
x In
3/53
Siemens AG 2007

Overcurrent releases ETU DPN-Distribution with protected
N pole
Protecting lines and transformers in TN-C-S and TN-S
networks
The rated current Ir, delay for switching off the release at 7.2 Ir,
and the tripping level of the short-circuit release can be
adjusted.
Order No.
rated overcurload
rent In protection Ir
tR (7,2 x Ir) restart instantaneous short

circuit protection Ii
40
43
46
48
50
55
58
3VT9 210-6BC00 100
The operational state is signalled by an LED indicator that

flashes green in a 1.5 s interval. As the load grows, the blinking
frequency of the diode increases. In case of a load larger than
110% of Ir this LED will turn red and just before tripping will
begin to blink red. On the lower part of the release cover are two
photocells for communicating with the prospective signalling
unit.
3VT9 216-6BC00 160
IN
N
500
1 x Ir
NSO0_00223
0.75 x Ir
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
min.
20
Ir
IN
tr
Ir
Ii
max.
10
200
1
20
10
5
20
10
0.02
0.01
0.1
3
1
In = 100 A
In = 160 A
In = 250 A
0.2
IN
3/54
0.5
Ir
2
tr
9 x Ir
4 x Ir
7 x Ir
I
2 x Ir
0.2
0.1
0.05
3VT9 225-6BC00 250
t r [ S]
2
1
0.5
5
In
Ii
10
Ii
110
115
120
125
130
137
144
150
160
100
110
115
125
137
144
160
100
50
61
63
69
72
76
80
87
91
100
63
69
72
80
87
91
100
The current of the fourth pole (N pole) is adjusted using the IN

switch as a multiple of the Ir current. Measuring of current on the
fourth pole can be disabled by turning the button to the OFF
position.
IN = 0.5 x Ir
The 3VT9 2..-6BC00 release is intended for the 3VT2 725-.AA560AA0 switching unit. The operation of the release is controlled by
a microprocessor. The release is equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning a switch on the front panel
from position T(t) to position T(0). After disabling of the thermal
memory, the thermal release remains active.
50
20
x In
172
180
190
200
210
220
231
243
250
3
10
20
20
10
3
1
1
3
10
20
20
10
3
1
1
3
10
20
20
10
3
1
kA
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
T(0
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
9
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
T(0)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
9
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
T(0)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
9
3
5
7
9
3
5
7
9
ms
0
100
200
300
100
200
300
100
200
300
Siemens AG 2007

Switches
Technical data
Order No.
V
Rated frequency fn
Hz
AC-12
AC-15
DC-12
DC-13
Thermal current Ith
Terminal protection
(connected switch)
1)
A
mm
3VT9 300-2A.00
3VT9 300-2A.101)
3VT9 300-2AJ00
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AH201)
AC 60 ... 500
DC 60 ... 500
500
50/60
AC 5 ... 60
DC 5 ... 60
AC 250
AC 24 ...250
DC 24 ...250
AC 5 ..60
DC 5 ...60
-6 A/240 V, 4 A/400 V,
2A/500 V
-0.4 A/240 V, 0.3 A/400 V,
0.2 A/500 V
10
01, 10, 02, 11, 20
0.5 ... 1
IP20
0.004 ... 0.5A/5 V

0.004 ... 0.5A/5 V
-1 A/AC 250 V
-1.5 A/AC 250 V
---
-0.004 ... 0.01/60 V
---
-0.2 A/DC 250 V
0.01 A/DC 60 V
--
0,5
-02, 11, 20
6
001
0.5
001
3VT9 300-2A.10 is not suitable to control electromagnetic loads
Type designation according to contact arrangement

Number of contacts Contact types
01
20
3VT9 300-2AC10 (20)

3VT9 300-2AG10 (20)
1
2
make
make
001
3 (4,5,6)2)
Auxiliary
10
Early
3.4
3.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
3.3
3.1
3.2
3.4
2.1
3.3
2.1
3.1
2.2
3.4 3VT9 300-2AF10
4.3
4.1
4.2
4.4
auxiliary
5.3
5.1
5.2
5.4
auxiliary
6.3
6.1
6.2
6.4
auxiliary
4.1 3VT9 300-2AD10

3VT9 300-2AH10
5.4
5.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
5.1
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
6.4
6.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
or or
cavity no. 6
4.4
4.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
or or
cavity no. 5
2.2
3.2 3VT9 300-2AE10
or or
cavity no. 4
Location of accsessory compartments in 3VT2
2.3
3.3
2.4
3.4 3VT9 300-2AG10
auxiliary
Relative
6.1
3VT9 300-2AD10
Switches
Signal to indicate of the circuit breaker by

the overcurrent release
Relative to indicate tripping of the circuit
breaker by releases, TEST push button or
by OFF push button on the motor drive
Auxiliary to indicate the position of the
main contacts
Early to make/break in advance of the
main contacts
or
Signalling
3VT9 300-2AH10
or
3VT9 300-2AD10
or
Switch function
2.3
2.1
2.2
2.4
1.1
3VT9 300-2AC10
or or
Switch name
2.4
2.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
2.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
cavity no. 2 + 3
Accessory
compartment
1.1
1.2
1.4
1.2
or or
Functions and names of switches according to their location in

accessory compartments
1.3
1.4
auxiliary
break + make
change-over
relative
1+1
1
signalling
3VT9 300-2AF10 (20)

3VT9 300-2AH10(20)
or
11
3VT9 300-2AJ00
or
break
break
10.Y3
10.Y4
cavity no. 3
1
2
10.Y1
10.Y2
cavity no. 2
3VT9 300-2AD10 (20)

3VT9 300-2AE10 (20)
cavity no. 1
01
02
State of switches in the switching unit accessory compartments

early contact
Order No.
cavity no. 10
Arrangement
of contacts
2)
250
3VT9 300-2AH10
NSO0_00224
3/55
Specifications
Siemens AG 2007

Shunt trip unit
AC 24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500

DC 24, 40, 48, 110, 220
Rated frequency fn
50/60 Hz
AC < 3 VA
DC < 3 W
Functional description
U t 0,7Ue the circuit breaker must trip
Time to switch-off
Loading time
ms
2
4
6
1
3
5
3.4
3.3
1
0
20
f
1
0
mm2 0.5 ... 1
Terminal protection
(connected trip)
IP20
Location in accessory
compartment No.
10
3.1
3.2
2.4
2.3
2.2
2.1
1
0
1
0
20
Auxiliary switch
accessory
compartment
3
20
20
Auxiliary switch
20
Relative switch
30
Relative switch
30
1
0
t [ms]
Circuit breaker states and lever positions of circuit breakers

Circuit breaker state
lever positions of circuit breakers
Switched on
Switched off by releases, or by TEST
button or by the trip push button on
the motor drive
Switched off manually or electrically
by drive

L+
L+
N-
The particular rated operating voltage of the shunt trip is set up by jumpers located right in the release. It is always set to the
maximum value by default.
3/56
U<
N-
3VT9 300-1S.00
or
NSO0_00230
U<
10.Y2
3VT9 300-1SC00
3VT9 300-1SD00
3VT9 300-1SE00
A2
Order No.
AC 2/DC 4, 40, 48 V
AC 1/DC 10 V
AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220 V
A1
3VT9 300-1O.00
Ue
A1
10.Y1
Type designation according to rated operating voltage
A2
Main contacts
3VT9 300-1S.00
accessory
compartment
2
Order No.
NSO0_00226
Circuit breaker switched off by shunt trip
Technical data
Siemens AG 2007

AC 24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500

DC 24, 40, 48, 110, 220
50/60
AC <3 VA
DC <3 W
Functional description1)
U t 0.85 Ue
(circuit breaker is possible switch on)
U d 0.35 Ue
(the circuit breaker must trip)
Time to switched-off
ms
Loading time
mm2
1
3
5
3.4
1
0
1
0
3.3
20
f
Terminal protection
(connected trip)
Main contacts
2
4
6
3.2
1
0
3.1
0.5 ... 1
2.4
10
1
0
2.3
Earl switch
--
AC 250
Rated frequency fn
Hz
--
50/60
Rated operating current Ie/Ue V
--
AC 1 A/259
--
02, 11, 20
--
0.5 ... 1
--
IP20
Terminal protection
(connected release)
Auxiliary switch
20
20
Auxiliary switch
20
Relative switch
IP20
compartment No.
20
mm2
1)
Tripping of the undervoltage release can be delayed using the delay unit
3VT9 00-1UX00, for more detailed information, see page P.
2)
Cannot be used in combination with motor drive 3VT9200-3M..0.
2.2
1
0
2.1
10.Y2 10.Y1
10.Y4 10.Y3
10.Y2 10.Y1
10.Y4 10.Y3
1
0
30
Relative switch
30
Early switch
20
Early switch
20
1
0
t [ms]
Switched on
the motor drive
by drive
Number and type of contacts by arrangement of contacts

Number of contacts
Contct types
2
11
20
2
1+1
2
break
breake + make
make

L+
L+
N-
3VT9 300-1S.00
U<
NSO0_00230
or
A2
U<
10.Y2
AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V

AC/DC 110 V
AC 230, 400, 500/DC 220 V
A2
3VT9 300-1UC00
3VT9 300-1UD00
3VT9 300-1UE00
A1
3VT9 300-1O.00
Order No.
A1
10.Y1
N-
The particular rated operating voltage of the shunt trip is set up by jumpers located right in the release. It is always set to the maximum value by
default.
3/57
Hz
Circuit breaker switched off by undervoltage release

NSO0_00231
Rated frequency fn
3VT9 300-1U.102)
accessory
compartment
3
3VT9 300-1U.00
accessory
compartment
2
Order No.
accessory
compartment
10
Technical data
Siemens AG 2007

The hand drive makes possible to control the circuit breaker:
Technical data
a) from the front panel of the circuit breaker (Fig.1)

Hand drive unit 3VT9 200-3HA/HB..
+ Hand drive lever 3VT9 300-3HE/HF..
b) through the switchgear door (Fig. 2)

Hand drive unit 3VT9 200-3HA/HB..
+ Hand drive lever + 3VT9 300-3HE/HF..
The hand drive unit is fixed right on the switching unit of
the circuit breaker
The hand drive bearing is fixed onto the switchgear door
and it provides protection IP40 or IP66
The hand drive lever is placed on the hand drive unit or on the
hand drive bearing
The extension shaft is supplied in two options, standard
(length 365 mm - can be cut short) and telescopic (adjustable
length 245 ... 410 mm).
The hand drive makes possible to govern the circuit breaker by

pivoting lever, e.g. to switch machines on and off. Modular
conception of drives makes possible simple mounting on the
switching unit (also additionally) after the accessory compartment cover is removed. A fixed motor is possible to seal. The
drive and its accessories is ordered separately according to
your choice, 3/6.
Enhanced safety for operator :

The hand drive unit and hand drive lever are also supplied
with the possibility to lock the circuit breaker in position
witched off manually. The unit and lever of the hand drive
can be locked using three padlocks with shank diameter max.
4 ... 6 mm
Each hand drive bearing prevents the door from opening
when the circuit breaker is on-state or off-state by releases
and types 3VT9300-3HG10 and 3VT9300-3HG20 when the
circuit breaker is in the state switched off manually and hand
drive lever is locked up
Two circuit breakers with hand drives can be provided with
mechanical interlock or with parallel mechanical switching,
see page 3/62.
Specifications
Order No.
Description
Colour
Locking while the

circuit breaker is in
OFF state
Protection
Switchgear door locking in the circuit breaker state

switched on or off switched off
by release
manually and
locked
Length
mm
3VT9 200-3HA10
3VT9 200-3HA20
3VT9 200-3HB20
Hand drive unit

Hand drive unit
Hand drive unit
grey
grey
yellow
no
yes
yes
----
----
----
----
3VT9 300-3HE10
3VT9 300-3HE20
3VT9 300-3HF20
Hand drive lever

Hand drive lever
Hand drive lever
black
black
red
no
yes
yes
----
----
----
----
3VT9 300-3HG10
3VT9 300-3HG20
3VT9 300-3HH10
3VT9 300-3HH20
Hand drive bearing

Hand drive bearing
Hand drive bearing
Hand drive bearing
black
yellow
black
yellow
-----
IP40
IP40
IP66
IP66
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
-----
3VT9 300-3HJ10
3VT9 300-3HJ20
Extension shaft
-Extension shaft-telescopic --
---
---
---
---
365 (can be short)

245 ... 410
3/58
Siemens AG 2007

Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers/switch

disconnectors so that they cannot both be tripped simultaneously, but only one of them at a time. Both circuit breakers may
be turned off simultaneously. Interlocking can be used between
two 3VT2 circuit breakers or between 3VT2 and 3VT3 circuit breakers. Both circuit breakers must be furnished with a hand drive
(at least one with a hand drive unit and hand drive lever).
In order to use the interlocking, it is absolutely necessary to
comply with the dimensions shown in the figure and table.
Provides for simultaneous switching of two circuit breakers/

switch disconnectors. Parallel switching can be used between
two 3VT2 circuit breakers or between 3VT2 and 3VT3 circuit
breakers. Each circuit breaker must be equipped with a hand
drive unit and at least one with a hand drive lever.
In order to use parallel switching it is absolutely necessary to
L
RP-BD-CK10
PS
PS
PS
TEST
NSO0_00233
NSO0_00234
TEST
Left
Right switching unit
switching 3VT2 3P
3VT2 4P
unit
X
L
X
L
3VT3 3P
3VT3 4P
Left
switching
unit

3VT2 3P
3VT2 4P
3VT3 4P1)
3VT3 3P
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm mm
3VT2 3P
105
112
140
145.5
122.5
128.5
181 185.5
3VT2 3P
105+7
112+7
140+7
145.5+7 122.5+7 128.5+7 x
3VT2 4P
105
112
140
145.5
122.5
128.5
181 185.5
3VT2 4P
105+7
112+7
140+7
145.5+7 122.5+7 128.5+7 x
3VT3 3P
122.5
128.5
157.5
145.5
140
145.5
185 189
3VT3 3P
122.5+7 128.5+7 157.5+7 145.5+7 140+7
145.5+7 x
3VT3 4P
122.5
128.5
157.5
145.5
140
145.5
185 189
3VT3 4P
122.5+7 128.5+7 157.5+7 145.5+7 140+7
145.5+7 x
1)
Switching unit 3VT3 4P(4-pole design) can only be on the right side.
RP-BD-CK10
RP-BD-CK10
PS
PS
PS
SP
SV
PS
PS
PS
SP
SV
TEST
NSO0_00235
TEST
3/59
Technical data
Siemens AG 2007

3VT9 300-8LC.0 Mechanical interlocking
Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers/switch disconnectors so that they cannot both be tripped
simultaneously, but only one of them at a time. Both circuit
breakers may be turned off simultaneously.
Mechanical interlocking 3VT9 200-8LC10 is intended for two
3VT2 circuit breakers. Interlocking 3VT9 300-8LC20 is intended for one 3VT2 circuit breaker and one 3VT3.
Circuit breakers may be in fixed, plug-in and withdrawable
designs.
Order No. of mechanical
interlocking
3VT9 200-8LC10
3VT9 300-8LC20
Circuit breaker types
3VT2
3VT3
Circuit breaker placement in switchgear
109
NSO0_00236
Detailed information can be found in the instructions for use,

which you may download from our website
www.siemens.com\technical assistance.
ON
=4
ON
45
min
0 ... 700
OFF
TEST
30
3/60
min. 80
OFF
TEST
Siemens AG 2007

Technical data
The motor mechanism is part of circuit breaker accessories enabling you to switch the circuit breaker on and off remotely. Modular conception of the drives enables simple mounting on the
circuit breaker (also additionally) after the circuit breaker accessory compartment cover is removed. The fixed motor can be
sealed. 3VT circuit breakers with motor mechanisms can be
used in the most demanding industrial applications such as protection of standby sources, synchronization of two sources, etc.
and anywhere it is necessary to ensure automated and unmanned operation of electrical equipment.
The motor mechanisms are equipped with spring storage units
and due to accumulated energy to trip the circuit breaker, it is no
problem to trip the circuit breakers within times up to 50 ms.
Releasing of the storage unit and tripping of the circuit breaker
is ensured by a closing coil that belongs to standard equipment
of every motor mechanism. The time before the circuit breaker is
tripped using the motor mechanism is 800 ms. This method of
tripping is suitable for controlling technological entities. When
faster circuit breaker tripping is required (e.g. emergency STOP
button), it is possible to use the motor mechanism in combination with undervoltage release or shunt trip.
On the motor mechanism front panel there is a selector switch
to select the drive modes with a possibility to indicate remotely
the selector switch state. The first mode is automatic remote
control (selector switch in position AUTO). This is the standard
position in automatic operation. The second mode is manual
control (selector switch position MANUAL), the motor mechanism does not need any voltage to perform its function.
Remote switching on and off in position AUTO is carried out
using push buttons that must be connected to the drive unit
connector, furthermore, this position makes it is possible to
control the circuit breaker with the push buttons on the drive
unit front panel.
In MANUAL mode it is possible to switch on and off using the
green and red push buttons on the front panel of the motor mechanism cover. The function of the remote control ON button
in MANUAL mode is locked up, whereas the function of the
remote control OFF button remains active for safety reasons.
The motor mechanism, apart from the circuit breaker, recognizes only two fixed positions. In the first position the circuit breaker is ON. When the circuit breaker is tripped in AUTO mode
by overcurrent releases or auxiliary trips, then because of
mechanical link between the circuit breaker and the drive, a
pulse will be generated to wind up the spring of the storage
unit automatically. The drive can be wound up automatically,
depending on operators demand, by permanent closing of
switch S or after the circuit breaker is checked by switching S
switch on. In the second fixed position the circuit breaker is
switched off and the loaded drive is ready to switch the breaker on after it has received the setting pulse.
The motor mechanism makes it possible to control the circuit
breaker after the loss of control voltage. In MANUAL and
AUTO modes, it is possible to wind up the storage unit by repeated rotation of the foldable handle. After the storage unit is
wound up, it is possible to switch the circuit breaker on and off
using the control buttons on the front panel of the drive.
On the front panel there is a storage unit status indicator

indicating locally what state the drive unit storage is in and
whether it is possible to switch the circuit breaker on. 3VT3
motor mechanisms enable to obtain a storage status signal
from the terminal strip also remotely. 3VT2 drives have optional
designs, alternatively with MANUAL/AUTO indication.
The drive can be furnished with an electromechanical operations counter that may be installed in the drive cover or fixed
beyond the circuit breaker space (e.g. in the switchgear door)
or in the switchgear space using a metal holder included in
the supply of external operations counter and its connecting
can be done using connectors.
The drive can be locked in off position using as many as three
padlocks with shank diameter max. 4.3 mm.
An 3VT9 300-3MF20 cover can be affixed to the drives turnon switch and then sealed. The cover prevents turning on the
circuit breaker from the drive panel.
Extension cable 3VT9 300-3MF00 has a connector on one
side that connects to the connector on the motor mechanism
and conductors on the other side that connect, for example, to
a terminal block.
Order No.
3VT9 200-3M..0
Operational voltage Ue
Rated frequency fn
Control pulse length for storing
Time before switching on
Frequency of cycles - instant successive ON/OFF cycles
Input power
Hz
ms
ms
ms
ms
Protection
AC 24, 48, 110 V; AC 230 V
DC 24, 48, 110 V; DC 220 V
Rated operating current
AUTO/MANUAL switches Ie/Ue
Order No.
Conductor cross sections S
Conductor lengths
1)
AC
DC
AC 24, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500

DC 24, 48, 110, 220
50/60
400 ... f1)
20 ... 7001), 400 ... f1)
< 50
800
3 contact making/hr
10 contact making
30000 contact making
100 VA
100 W
LSN 4C/1; LSN 2C/1

V
AC 5 A/250
DC 0.5A/250
3VT9 300-3MF00
12
mm2 0.35
cm 60
for sequence of control pulses, see page 3/64.
3/61
Siemens AG 2007

Specifications
3.1
3.2
2.4
2.3
2.2
2.1
10.Y2 10.Y1
10.Y4 10.Y3
10.Y2 10.Y1
10.Y4 10.Y3
accessory
compartment
3
50
1
0
Auxiliary switch
40
1
0
3.4
3.2
3.3
3.1
Relative switch
1
0
Relative switch
1
0
2.4
2.2
2.3
2.1
Early switch
20
1
0
Early switch
20
1
0
10.Y2 10.Y1
10.Y4 10.Y3
10.Y2 10.Y1
10.Y4 10.Y3
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
800
Auxiliary switch
accessory
compartment
3
1
3
5
Auxiliary switch
3.3
Main contacts
2
4
6
800
20
Auxiliary switch
800
Relative switch
accessory
compartment
2
1
0
accessory
compartment
2
3.4
50
accessory
compartment
10
1
3
5
Relative switch
Early switch
accessory
compartment
10
NSO0_00238
Main contacts
2
4
6
NSO0_00239
Circuit breaker switched off by motor mechanism - electrical by

push button OFF
Circuit breaker switched on by motor mechanism electrical by push button ON
900
Early switch
900
1
0
t [ms]
t [ms]
Wiring diagram
Circuit breaker switch on and switched off by motor driver,
electrical by pusch button ON and pusch button OFF
Recommended wiring of the control circuits

Q3
Switched on
L+

button or by the trip push button on the
motor mechanism
ON
S
OF F
Switched off manually or electrically by

drive
Motor drive
X3
NC
NO
S5
C
Symbol
Description
MP
M
P
X3
X4
S5
YC
B

motor
storage device
switch indicating AUTO/MANUAL modes
external operations counter 3VT9300-3MF10
recommended wiring of the control circuits (not included
in drive order)
make push button
break push button
switch for energy storage
(switched on = automatic storage, may be
continuously switched on)
ON
OFF
S
MP
X3
X4
Q3
PE
N-
Ext. oper.
counter
3/62
Siemens AG 2007

Specifications
NSO0_00241
Tripping of the circuit breaker with a motor drive by the overcurrent release (switch S in switched-on state - automatic storage)
Main contacts
A1
Relative switch
Relative switch
30
520
X3 9 7
NC
520
Early switch
30
520
t [ms]
NSO0_00242
Main contacts
2.2
2.3
2.1
1
0
1
0
1
0
MP
X4
YC
J
cav. no.10
N-
Ext. oper.
counter
Circuit breaker switched on by motor drive (electrical push button ON) and switched off by undervoltage release
control circuits
Q3
L+
accessory
compartment
3
Auxiliary switch
20
20
Auxiliary switch
20
ON
S
OFF
Motor drive
Relative switch
30
520
Relative switch
30
520
X3 9 7
NC
NO
or
S5
t [ms]
U<
MP
X3
X4
NSO0_00244
2.4
3.1
1
0
or
A1
3.2
3.3
1
0
20
accessory
compartment
2
3.4
1
3
5
U<
PE
N-
2
4
6
X3
Tripping of the circuit breaker with a motor drive with a shunt trip
or undercurrent release (switch S in switched-on state - automatic storage)
NO
S5
Early switch
30
NSO0_00243
520
3VT9 300-1O.00
30
B1
Motor drive
3VT9 300-1S.00
accessory
compartment
3
20
S
OFF
B2
1
0
Auxiliary switch
ON
B1
1.1
1
0
20
3VT9 300-1S.00
1.2
1.3
1
0
20
B2
1.4
2.1
1
0
Auxiliary switch
A2
2.2
2.3
1
0
Q3
L+
3VT9 300-1U.00
2.4
3.1
1
0
20

control circuits
A2
3.2
3.3
1
0
accessory
compartment
2
3.4
1
3
5
accessory
compartment
1
2
4
6
Circuit breaker switched on by motor drive (electrical push button ON) and switched off by shut trip
cav. no.10
PE
N-
YC
Ext.oper.
counter
N-
3/63
Siemens AG 2007

Specifications
Description of charts
Recommended actuating pulses

Circuit breaker switched on/off by motor drive S switch
permanently closed (automatic storage) or open
50
800
1
0
PS
1
0
> 1400
400
IMP OFF
1
0
> 100
20 700
IMP ON
t [ms]
1
0
520
> 880
> 1400
20 700
IMP ON
1
0
NSO0_00246
RS
t [ms]
R OFF
Circuit breaker switched off by overcurrent or auxiliary

releases and switched on by motor drive - S switch
closed only for storing up
50
1
0
RS
1
0
X + 520
> 880
> 1400
400
IMP S
1
0
> 100
20 700
IMP ON
t [ms]
R OFF
3/64
NSO0_00247
HK


motor drive
drive
50
1
0
main contacts
auxiliary switch
relative switch
circuit breaker closing instant by release
pulse to store up motor drive energy (generated by S
switch)
make pulse for motor drive
break pulse for motor drive
random segment of time
Switched on
Circuit breaker switched off by overcurrent or auxiliary releases

and switched on by motor drive-S switch permanently closed
(automatic storage)
HK
Description
IMP ON
IMP OFF
X
> 600
800
NSO0_00245
HK
Symbol
HK
PS
RS
R OFF
IMP S
Siemens AG 2007

Use of motor 3VT9 200-3M..0 in the automatic standby system
Wiring diagram of the motor drive of circuit breaker
Recommended control pulses for switching of the circuit breakers 3VT2 by the motor drive after their switching off by a shunt
trip or undervoltage release in the automatic standby system
Q3
L+
> 1400
200 700
IMP ON
1
0
ON
S
Motor drive
NO
S5
U<
1
0
SV
1
0
SP
1
0
520
3VT9 300-1S.00
RS
B1
A1
NC
3VT9 300-1U.00
X3 9 7
HK
1
0
or
50
OFF
NSO0_00080
Control circuit
> 880
20
200
MP
X4
NSO0_00078
B2
A2
X3
> 100
cav. no.10
PE
YC
Cycle
counter
400
IMP S
1
0
N-
X
HK
1
0
RS
1
0
motor
storage device
X3
connector for connection of control circuits
SV
1
0
X4
connector for external cycle counter
S5
switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL

(NC-C) mode
YC
external cycle counter 3VT9 300-3MF10
recommended connection of control circuits

(is not included in the motor drive supply)
SP
1
0
ON
push button
OFF
push button
S
Q3
50
> 1400
X + 520
M
200 700
IMP ON
NSO0_00081
t [ms]
> 880
20
>200
t [ms]
Symbol
Description
switch for storage (closed = automatic storage;

it can be closed permanently)
HK
Main contacts
RS
Relative switch
motor drive circuit breaker-see page E69
SV
SP
IMP ON
Motor drive make pulse
IMP OFF
Motor drive storage pulse (generated by S switch)
In use of circuit breakers 3VT2 with mechanical interlocking by

Bowden cable in the automatic standby system, it is recommended to switch the circuit breaker off only by an auxiliary release.
Otherwise the first attempt of switching a standby circuit breaker
may fail.
Switched on
button
(wound up state)
3/65
Siemens AG 2007
Notes
7
3/66
Siemens AG 2007
3VT3 Molded Case

Catalog
4/2
4/3
4/4
4/5
4/7
4/9
4/11
4/11
4/40
4/43
4/46
4/56
4/57
4/58
4/59
4/60
4/62
3VT3 Molded Case

General data
Auxiliary switch and shunt trip units
mechanism
Mounting accesssories
Further accessories
3VT3 Molded Case
Plug-in Device
Withdrawable Design
Overcurrent Releases
Switches
Shunt trip unit
switching
Siemens AG 2007

General data
Overview
4/2
Siemens AG 2007


- 2 connecting sets 3VT9 200-4TA30 - for connecting busbars
or cable lugs1)
- insulating barriers 3VT9 300-8CE30
- set of installation bolts (4 x M5 x 25)
- conductor holder
Rated current In
kA

- overcurrent release ETU, LP, DP, MP, MPS, DPN
(circuit breaker) or
- switch-disconnector unit 3VT9 363-6DT00
(switch-disconnector)
DT Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Switching Units
3-pole version
630
630
36
65
B
B
3VT3 763-2AA36-0AA0
3VT3 763-3AA36-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
7,400
7,400
36
65
36
65
B
B
B
B
3VT3 763-2AA46-0AA0
3VT3 763-3AA46-0AA0
3VT3 763-2AA56-0AA0
3VT3 763-3AA56-0AA0
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
7,400
7,400
7,400
7,400
630
630
630
630
1)
For connecting in another way, it is necessary to use

connecting sets (see page 4/8).
Accessories
Rated current In
Set current of the inversetime

kW
DT Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
ETU trip unit

System protection, ETU LP, LI function-characteristic L-lines
without Ir regulation
250
315
400
500
630
B
B
B
B
B
3VT9 325-6AB00
3VT9 331-6AB00
3VT9 340-6AB00
3VT9 350-6AB00
3VT9 363-6AB00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,345
0,345
0,345
0,345
0,345
B
B
B
3VT9 325-6AC00
3VT9 340-6AC00
3VT9 363-6AC00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,261
0,318
0,320
B
B
B
3VT9 325-6BC00
3VT9 340-6BC00
3VT9 363-6BC00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,355
0,355
0,355
B
B
B
3VT9 325-6AP00
3VT9 340-6AP00
3VT9 363-6AP00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,261
0,321
0,323
100 ... 250

160 ... 400
250 ... 630
B
B
B
3VT9 325-6AS00
3VT9 340-6AS00
3VT9 363-6AS00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,260
0,260
0,323
Switch-disconnector unit
3VT9 363-6DT00
1 unit
0,252

250
400
630
100 ... 250

160 ... 400
250 ... 630
System protection, ETU DPN, LIN function

protecting lines and transformers in TN-C-S and TN-S network
100
160
250
100 ... 250

160 ... 400
250 ... 630
Motor and generator protection, ETU MP, LI function

250
400
630
100 ... 250

160 ... 400
250 ... 630
Motor and generator protection, ETU MPS, LSI function

direct protection for motors and generators.
enables setting time delay of independent release to 0, 100, 200 or
300 ms
250
400
630
Switch disconnector unit

630
4/3
4-pole version
Siemens AG 2007


Rated control supply voltage Us/frequency
DT Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
AC 50/60 Hz, DC
Auxiliary Switches and alarm switches

Single make contacts
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V
B
B
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AC20
1 unit
1 unit
0,020
0,120
B
B
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AD20
1 unit
1 unit
0,130
0,130
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V

AC/DC 5 ... 60 V
B
B
3VT9 300-2AE10
3VT9 300-2AE20
1 unit
1 unit
0,260
0,260
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V

AC/DC 5 ... 60 V
B
B
3VT9 300-2AF10
3VT9 300-2AF20
1 unit
1 unit
0,250
0,250
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V

AC/DC 5 ... 60 V
B
B
3VT9 300-2AG10
3VT9 300-2AG20
1 unit
1 unit
0,240
0,240
B
B
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AH20
1 unit
1 unit
0,013
0,013
Early switch
3VT9 300-2AJ00
1 unit
0,040
AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V

AC/DC 110 V
AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220 V
B
B
B
3VT9 300-1SC00
3VT9 300-1SD00
3VT9 300-1SE00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,140
0,140
0,140
AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V

AC/DC 110 V
AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220 V
B
B
B
3VT9 300-1UC00
3VT9 300-1UD00
3VT9 300-1UE00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,110
0,110
0,110
with early contact1)

AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V
AC/DC 110 V
AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220 V
B
B
B
3VT9 300-1UC10
3VT9 300-1UD10
3VT9 300-1UE10
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,120
0,120
0,120
Single break contacts
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V

AC/DC 5 ... 60 V
Double contacts
Change-over contacts
AC/DC 60 ... 250 V
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V
Early contacts
Shunt trip unit
1)
Not in combination with motorized operating mechanism 3VT9 300-3M..0.
4/4
Siemens AG 2007

Overview
Rotary operating mechanism is necessary to be completed:
for controlling using the switch unit
- with the black hand drive lever 3VT9 300-3HE10 or
3VT9 300-3HE20
- with the red hand drive lever 3VT9 300-3HF20
for controlling through the cabinet door
- with the extension shaft 3VT9 300-3HJ..
- with the hand drive bearing 3VT9 300-3HG/HH..
- hand drive lever 3VT9 300-3HE/HF..
Mechanical Interlocking and Parallel Switching

Mechanical interlocking for fixed design is necessary to be
completed:
Mechanical interlocking by Bowden is intented for fixed,
plug-in and withdrawable designs

Version
DT Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg

Hand drive unit
no locking
lockable
grey
grey
B
B
3VT9 300-3HA10
3VT9 300-3HA20
1 unit
1 unit
0,243
0,243
lockable
yellow label
3VT9 300-3HB20
1 unit
0,243
no locking
lockable
black
black
B
B
3VT9 300-3HE10
3VT9 300-3HE20
1 unit
1 unit
0,075
0,075
lockable
red
3VT9 300-3HF20
1 unit
0,075
black
black
black
B
B
3VT9 300-3HG10
3VT9 300-3HG20
3VT9 300-3HG30
1 unit
1 unit
0,140
0,140
yellow label
yellow
yellow
B
B
3VT9 300-3HH10
3VT9 300-3HH20
3VT9 300-3HH30
1 unit
1 unit
0,140
0,140
Extension shaft
length 365 mm, may be shorten
3VT9 300-3HJ10
1 unit
0,205
Extension shaft-telescopic,
length 245 ... 410 mm
3VT9 300-3HJ20
1 unit
0,255
Hand drive lever
Hand drive bearing

Is used in combination with the black lever of
3VT9 300-3HE10, 3VT9 300-3HE20, hand drives
protection IP40
protection IP66
protection IP40
Is used in combination with the red lever

of 3VT9 300-3HF20 hand drive
protection IP40
protection IP66
protection IP40
4/5
Siemens AG 2007

Version
DT Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Mechanical Interlocking and Parallel Switching

Mechanical interlocking for fixed design
3VT9 300-8LA00
1 unit
0,136
for two 3VT3 circuit breakers

for one 3VT2 and one 3VT3 circuit breaker
B
B
3VT9 300-8LC10
3VT9 300-8LC20
1 unit
1 unit
0,393
0,393
Mechanical parallel switching for fixed design
3VT9 300-8LB00
1 unit
0,162
B
B
B
B
3VT9 300-3MJ00
3VT9 300-3ML00
3VT9 300-3MN00
3VT9 300-3MQ00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,691
1,750
1,752
1,746
AC/DC 24 V1)
AC/DC 48 V
AC/DC 110 V
AC 230 V/DC 220 V
B
B
B
B
3VT9 300-3MJ10
3VT9 300-3ML10
3VT9 300-3MN10
3VT9 300-3MQ10
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1,750
1,750
1,708
1,754
Operations counter with cable, length 110 cm
3VT9 300-3MF10
1 unit
0,003
Extension cable-to motor drive, 12 wires, length 60 cm
3VT9 300-3MF00
1 unit
0,060
Mechanical interlocking by bowden cable

2 x hand drive unit 3VT9 300-3HA/HB..
2 x hand drive lever 3VT9 300-3HE/HF..
Motor Drives rated control supply voltage Us

Motor drive
AC/DC 24 V1)
AC/DC 48 V
AC/DC 110 V
AC 230 V/DC 220 V
Accessories
1)
Upon agreement with the manufacturer, different conductor lengths can be

supplied.
4/6
Siemens AG 2007


Plug-in device
includes:
- complete accessories for assembly circuit breakers/switchdisconnectors in plug-in design
- set of installation bolts (4 x M5 x 30) for affixing switching unit
to plug-in device
- switching unit 3 pole version 3VT3 763-.AA36-0AA0;
4 pole version 3VT3 763-.AA46-0AA0 or 3VT3 763-.AA560AA0
Withdrawable device
includes complete accessories for assembly circuit breakers/switch-disconnectors in withdrawable design
must be fitted with switching unit 3 pole version 3VT3 763.AA36-0AA0; 4 pole version 3VT3 763-.AA46-0AA0 or 3VT3
763-.AA56-0AA0
Version
max. permissed cross-section S
DT Order no.
PS*
mm2
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Plug-in device
3-pole version
3VT9 300-4PA30
1 unit
2,610
4-pole version
3VT9 300-4PA40
1 unit
3,400
3-pole version
3VT9 300-4WA30
1 unit
5,040
4-pole version
3VT9 300-4WA40
1 unit
4,500
Withdrawable device
4/7
For connecting plug-in device with busbars or cable lugs,

connecting sets 3VT9 300-4TA30 can be used that are included
with the 3 pole version 3VT3 763-.AA36-0AA0; 4 pole version
3VT3 763-.AA46/56-0AA0... switching unit - for connecting in
another way, it is necessary to use connecting sets.
Siemens AG 2007

Version
max. permissed
cross-section S
Type of connection DT Order no.
PS*
mm2
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Connecting Sets
1 terminal
Box terminal
35 ... 240
3VT9 300-4TC00
1 unit
0,580
Cu/Al cables
3VT9 315-4TD00
1 unit
0,400
150 ... 240
Cu/Al cables
3VT9 324-4TD00
1 unit
0,370
2 x 25 ... 150
Cu/Al cables
3VT9 315-4TF00
1 unit
0,500
2 x 150 ... 240
Cu/Al cables
3VT9 324-4TF00
1 unit
0,960
6 x 6 ... 35
Cu/Al cables
3VT9 303-4TF00
1 unit
0,500
Cu/Al busbars
cable lugs
3VT9 300-4RC00
1 unit
0,500
Cu Cables,
flexibars
3VT9 300-4TC30
1 unit
0,433
Cu/Al cables
3VT9 315-4TD30
1 unit
0,302
Cu/Al cables
3VT9 324-4TD30
1 unit
0,279
Rear connection
Cu Cables,
flexibars
3 terminals
Box type terminals
35 ... 240

150 ... 240
Cu/Al cables
3VT9 315-4TF30
1 unit
0,800
Cu/Al cables
3VT9 324-4TF30
1 unit
0,721
Cu/Al cables
3VT9 303-4TF30
1 unit
0,300
Rear connection
Cu/Al busbars
cable lugs
3VT9 300-4RC30
1 unit
0,567
Front connection
Cu/Al busbars,
cable lugs,
flexibars
3VT9 300-4TA30
1 unit
0,186
Cu flexible
conductors
3VT9 300-4TN30
1 unit
0,021

spacing
cable lugs,
flexibars
3VT9 300-4ED30
1 unit
0,490

spacing
cable lugs,
flexibars
3VT9 300-4EE30
1 unit
0,628
for enhances termination point 2 x 25 ... 150

protection to IP20 use the ter- 2 x 150 ... 240
minal cover 3VT9 300-8CB30
6 x 6 ... 35
Potential terminals
1.5 ... 2.5; 4 ... 6
4/8
Siemens AG 2007

Further accessories

Version
DT Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Insulating barriers
included with each switching unit order
in case circuit breaker/switch-disconnector connection is reversed
(supply to terminals 2, 4, 6), it is necessary in most cases to install
these barriers also on the lower side
set (two pieces), for 3P designs
one piece, for 4P designs, in aviation to 38 design
B
B
3VT9 300-8CE30
3VT9 300-8CE00
1 unit
1 unit
0,077
0,050
3-pole designs
4-pole design
3VT9 300-8CB30
3VT9 300-8CB00
1 unit
0,144
Locking type lever
3VT9 200-3HL00
1 unit
0,013
3VT9 200-8BN00
1 unit
0,001
3VT9 200-8BL00
1 unit
0,080
3VT9 300-4PL00
1 unit
0,020
3VT9 300-4WL00
1 unit
0,020
1 unit
0,054
Terminal cover-protection IP20
on req.
enables to lock the circuit breaker in position switched off manually

in order to lock device, you can use up to three padlocks with shank
diameter max. 6 mm
Bolt sealing inset

overcurrent release
terminal cover
hand drive unit
motor drive unit
Additional cover for overcurrent release
provides sealing for overcurrent releases such as circuit breakers in
the main meter board cabine
Connecting cable
to connect the circuit breaker/switch - disconectors accessories in the
withdrawable design (it is possible for plug-in design and fixed
design)
Signalling position switch
to indicate the position of the circuit breaker in the plug-in or withdrawable devices
Keying set
3VT9 200-4WN00
on req.
prevents inserting in the plug-in or withdrawable devices beyond the

switching unit
Push button cover
3VT9 300-3MF20
for motor drive, cover may be provided with lead seals
4/9
increases degree of protection of connection point to IP20 when using

3VT9 315-4TD30, 3VT9 324-4TF30, 3VT9 315-4TF30 and
3VT9 303-4TF30 block type terminals
intended for fixed, plug-in and withdrawable designs.
Siemens AG 2007

Specifications
Circuit breaker
3VT3 763-2AA36/46/56-0AA0,
3VT3 763-3AA36/46/56-0AA0
Switch disconnector
Type
Standards
EN 60 947-2, IEC 947-2
EN 60 947-3, IEC 947-3
Approval marks
Number of poles
3, 4
Rated current In
250, 315, 400, 500, 630
630
--
630
AC max. 690
AC max. 690
DC max. 440
Rated frequency fn
Hz
50/60
kV
690
--
Utilization category
selectivity AC 690 V
switching mode AC 690 V
DC 440 V
--
---
AC-23 B
DC-23 B
8 kA/50 ms, 7 kA/300 ms, 6.5 kA/1 s
Series Ue
3VT3 N
3VT3 H
Ue
--
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking

capacity (rms value)1) Icu
60 kA
36 kA
20 kA
15 kA
100 kA
65 kA
35 kA
20 kA
AC 230 V
AC 415 V
AC 500 V
AC 690 V
--

40 kA
18 kA
10 kA
8 kA
75 kA
36 kA
20 kA
15 kA
AC 230 V
AC 415 V
AC 500 V
AC 690 V
--

(peak value) Icm/Ue
75 kA/
140 kA
AC 415 V
14 kA/AC 415 V
14 kA/AC 440 V
Off-time at Icu
ms
10
75
cycles
20000
cycles
5000
cycles/ 120
hr
Operating force
7,5 kA/5 s
--
110
IP40
IP20
40
-40 ... +55

Working environment
Pollution degree
Max. elevation
2000
Seismic resistance
Hz
3g ( 8 ... 50 )
Plug-in design
/+
Withdrawable design
/+
Accessories
///
Undervoltage release/with early switch with signal

switch

by Bowden
Locking-type lever
Bolt sealing inset/additional cover for overcurrent

release
available,
-- unavailable,
+ in preparation
4/10
1)
In case circiut breaker connection is reversed (input terminals 2, 4, 6

output terminals 1, 3, 5), Icu does not change.
Siemens AG 2007

Wiring diagram
3-pole version
control circuits
Q3
L+

2 4
1
1
3
5
ON
OFF
3VT9 300-4PA.0
SO 1
3VT9 300-4WA.0
Auxiliary trip/Early contact
NO
3VT9 325-6..00 1
5
A
I>
I>
10.Y1
Main circuit
3VT9 300-1U.10
10.Y3
3VT9 300-2AJ00
A1
10.Y1
3VT9 300-1U.10
NC
NC
A1
3VT9 300-1U.00
9 7
X3 12 10
B1
3VT9 300-1S.00
Motor drive
NO
or
S6
S5
or
or
U<
U<
B
T1
T2
T3
TEST
cavity no. 10
PE N-
SO 2
YC
Ext.oper.
counter
4 2
3VT9 300-4PA.0
3VT9
SO 3
3004WA.0
1
4 2
2
NSO0_00249
10.Y4
X4
10.Y2
10.Y2
A2
B2
11
X3
A2
MP
Connecting cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
X2
Switches
2.1
3.1
2.1
3.3
5.1
5.2
5.4
5.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
5.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
auxiliary
2.3
3.3
5.3
5.4
auxiliary
4.1
4.2
4.4
4.3
auxiliary
3.1
3.2
3.4
3.3
2.1
2.2
2.4
auxiliary
cavity no. 3
cavity no. 4
cavity no. 5
or
or
2.2
3.2 3VT9 300-2AE10
or or
2.2
3.4 3VT9 300-2AF10
4.1
4.2
or or
2.4
3.4 3VT9 300-2AG10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3.1
or
4.4
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
or
3.2
3VT9 300-2AH10
cavity no. 2
3.4
2.1
2.2
or or
or
cavity no. 2 + 3
NSO0_00250
cavity no. 1
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AH10
2.4
or
2.3
1.1
1.2
1.4
3VT9 300-2AD10
or
1.1
1.4
relative
3VT9 300-2AC10
1.2
1.3
signal
X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Connecting cable
4/11
Siemens AG 2007

4-pole version
control circuits
Q3
L+

1
1
3
5
2 4
ON
S
OFF
3VT9 300-4WA.0
NO
or
S6
S5
U<
or
7
A
I>
I>
or
U<
3VT9 325-6..0 1
10.Y3
3VT9 300-2AJ00
10.Y1
A1
10.Y1
3VT9 300-1U.10
B1
3VT9 300-1S.00
9 7
NC
NO
NC
Main circuit
Auxiliary trip/Early contact

A1
3VT9 300-1U.00
Motor drive
X3 12 10
3VT9 300-4PA.0
SO 1
B
T1
T2
T3
TEST
T4
cavity no. 10
PE N-
SO 2
YC
Ext.oper.
counter
4 2
3VT9 300-4PA.0
3VT9
SO 3
3004WA.0
1
4 2
2
NSO0_00251
10.Y4
X4
10.Y2
10.Y2
A2
B2
11
X3
A2
MP
Connecting cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
X2
Switches
7.3
7.1
7.2
7.4
8.3
8.1
8.2
8.4
9.3
9.1
9.2
9.4
7.4
7.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
7.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
8.4
8.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
8.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
9.4
9.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
9.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
auxiliary
6.3
6.1
6.2
6.4
auxiliary
6.4
6.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
6.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
2.3
3.3
2.4
3.4 3VT9 300-2AG10
cavity no. 5
auxiliary
2.1
3.1
5.3
5.1
5.2
5.4
5.4
5.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
5.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
cavity no. 4
auxiliary
2.2
3.2 3VT9 300-2AE10
4.3
4.1
4.2
4.4
4.4
4.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
4.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
cavity no. 3
2.1
3.3
3.3
3.1
3.2
3.4
3.4
3.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
auxiliary
2.3
2.1
2.2
2.4
or or
X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Connecting cable
or or
2.2
3.4 3VT9 300-2AF10
or or
or
cavity no. 6
cavity no. 7
cavity no. 8
cavity no. 9
or
cavity no. 2 + 3
or or
or or
or or
or or
NSO0_00252
cavity no. 1
4/12
auxiliary
cavity no. 2
or or
1.1
or
auxiliary
3VT9 300-2AH10
1.1
1.2
1.4
3VT9 300-2AD10
1.3
3VT9 300-2AC10
or
1.4
1.2
auxiliary
2.4
2.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
2.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
relative
signal
Siemens AG 2007

motor drive, 3VT9 300-3M..0
T1, T2, T3, T41)
motor
trip-free mechanism
storage device
3VT9 325-6..002)
X3
X4
circuit breaker - overcurrent release - ETU LP, DP, MDP

switch-disconnector - switch-disconnector unit,
3VT9 363-6DT00
S5
switch to signal AUTO (NO-C) / MANUAL (NC-C) modes
TEST
S6
switch to signal full storage (ready to switch on: NO-C)
3VT9 300-4PA30
plug-in device
YC
external operations counter, 3VT9 300-3MF10
recommended wiring of the control circuits - not included

with drive
ON, OFF
push button

(switched on = automatic storage, switch may be
MP
Q3
motor drive circuit breaker, see page 4/64
switching unit, 3VT3
main contacts
3VT9 300-4WA30 withdrawable device

X1, X2
connecting cable, 3VT9 300-4PL001
SO1, SO2, SO3
contacts signalling position of circuit breaker/switchdisconnector in plug-in or withdrawable device

3VT9 300-4WL00 see pages 4/44, 4/45
3VT9 300-1U.00
3VT9 300-1S.00
shunt trip
3VT9 300-1U.10
undervoltage release with early contact
3VT9 300-2AJ00
early contact
1)
Only for 4-pole design of 3VT3 763-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit.
Functions
States of switches in the circuit breaker accessory compartment
3VT9 300-2AE10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3, 4, 5
(6 ... 9)1)
Switched off manually or

electrically by drive
Switched off by overcurrent release
Switched off by auxiliary

release or by TEST button
or the trip pusch button on
the motor drive
1)
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AH10
Switched on
3VT9 300-2AG10
3VT9 300-1U.10
3VT9 300-2AJ00
2 and 3
3VT9 300-2AD10
2 and 3
3VT9 300-2AC10
2 and 3
3VT9 300-2AD10
10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3, 4, 5
(6 ... 9)1)
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
Lever positon of circuit breaker
3VT9 300-2AF10
Accessory compartment 6, 7, 8, 9 are only for 4.pole design

Location switches in accessory compartments, see page 4/54.
4/13
Siemens AG 2007


Power circuit
Is connected using Cu/Al busbars or cables, and possibly
cables with cable lugs
For greater connecting options, connecting sets are
produced (see page 4/8)
Generally, conductors from supply are connected to input
terminals 1, 3, 5, (N) and conductors from load to terminals
2, 4, 6, (N). However, it is possible to reverse this connection
(switching of input and output terminals) without limiting rated
In case of reversed connection, it is in most cases necessary
to provide the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector with
3VT9 300-8CE30 insulating barriers also on the side of
terminals 2, 4, 6
We recommend painting the connecting busbars
Input and output conductors/busbars must be mechanically
reinforced to avoid transmitting electrodynamic force to the
circuit breaker/switch-disconnector during short-circuiting
circuit breakers deionization spaces (see page 4/15).
Auxiliary circuits
using flexible 0.5 ... 1 mm2 Cu conductors to terminalson
these devices
Motor drive and auxiliary circuits of the plug-in or withdrawable design are connected using a connector.

Rated current Permissed cross-section S
In
Dimension of busbars
WxH
Cu
AI
Cu
Al
mm2
mm2
mm
mm
100
125
160
35
50
70
50
70
95
20 x 2
25 x 2
25 x 3
25 x 2
25 x 3
32 x 3
200
250
315
95
120
150
120
150
185
25 x 4
25 x 5
32 x 5
25 x 5
32 x 5
32 x 6
400
500
630
185
2 x120
2 x185
240
2 x185
2 x240
32 x 6
32 x 8
32 x 12
32 x 8
32 x 12
32 x 16
Maximum circuit breaker/switch disconnector loads in

accordance with ambient temperature
3VT3 circuit breaker/switch disconnector-connection to pole by
1 x 185 mm2 Cu cable
50C
55 C
60 C
65 C
70 C
630 A
630 A
600 A
570 A
540 A
Busbars and
cable lugs
Technical
information

Rated
current
In
Order No.
Maximum permissible conductor cross-section S

Cable type
Sector-shaped
conductor,
stranded
Sector-shaped
conductor, solid
Round
conductor,
stranded
Round
conductor,
solid
WxH
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm2
mm
Page
3VT9 300-4TA30
3VT9 300-4TD00
630
32 x...
3VT9 300-4RC30
3VT9 300-4RC00
630
32 x...
3VT9 300-4TC30
3VT9 300-4TC00
400
35 ... 240 Cu
35 ... 240 Cu
35 ... 240 Cu
35 ... 240 Cu
3VT9 324-4TD30
3VT9 324-4TD00
400
150 ... 240 Cu/Al
120 ... 240 Cu/Al
150 ... 240 Cu/Al
120 ... 240 Cu/Al
3VT9 315-4TD30
3VT9 315-4TD00
315
25 ... 150 Cu/AI
16 ... 150 Cu/AI
25 ... 150 Cu/AI
16 ... 150 Cu/AI
3VT9 324-4TF30
3VT9 324-4TF00
630
2 x (150 ... 240) Cu/Al
2 x (120 ... 240) Cu/Al
2 x (25 ... 150) Cu/Al
2 x (120 ... 240) Cu/Al
4/17, 4/29
3VT9 315-4TF30
3VT9 315-4TF00
500
2 x (25 ... 150) Cu/Al
2 x (16 ... 150) Cu/Al
2 x (25 ... 150) Cu/Al
2 x (16 ... 150) Cu/Al
4/18, 4/30
3VT9 303-4TF30
3VT9 303-4TF00
250
6 x (6 ... 35) CuAl
6 x (6 ... 35) CuAl
6 x (6 ... 35) CuAl
6 x (6 ... 35) CuAl
4/18, 4/30
3VT9 300-4ED30
400
3VT9 300-4EE30
630
3VT9 300-4TN30
10/16
4/14
4/18, 4/30,
4/30, 4/30
--
4/19
4/20
1.5 ... 2.54 ... 6 flexible conductor
Siemens AG 2007

Dimension drawings
terminals 2, 4, 6
Only in case that circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is
connected to the source using terminals 2, 4, 6 and furthermore:
- if Ue AC 415 V, it is necessary to use 3VT9 300-8CE30
insulating barriers or a 3VT9 300-8CB30 terminal cover
- if for connecting power circuit to terminals 2, 4, 6 insulated
conductors, flexibars or rear connection are not used, it is
necessary to use 3VT9 300-8CE30 insulating barriers or

breakers ans switch-disconnectors
Fixed design
Front connection
terminals 1, 3, 5
- if Ue AC 415 V, it is necessary to use 3VT9 300-8CE30
insulating barriers or a 3VT9 300-8CB30 terminal cover
- if for connecting power circuit to terminals 1, 3, 5 insulated
conductors, flexibars or rear connection are not used, it is
necessary to use 3VT9 300-8CE30 insulating barriers or
Rear connection
Neither insulating barriers nor terminal covers need be used.
Plug-in and withdrawable devices

Neither insulating barriers nor terminal covers need be used.
C = 80
B = 105
1
A1
100 150
A2
1 3VT9 300-8CE30
B=0
1
ON
C=0
ON
275
ON
OFF
TEST
6
20
OFF
TEST
B = 20
140
140
140
NSO0_00259
OFF
TEST
B = 20
minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switchdisconnctor and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for
connecting using insulated conductors, cables, flexibars
A1

A2
minimum distance:
between the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for uninsulated conductors and busbars)
between the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector and
busbar
between two circuit breaker/switch-disconnectors situated vertically above one another
between uninsulated connections of two circuit breakers/switch-disconnectors above one another
B, C
minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall
4/15
Siemens AG 2007

NSO0_00260
> 15 mm
Busbar
max. 3 mm
max. 3 mm
Cable
Flexibar
AC Ue
AC Ue
3VT3 H wired with Ik
3VT3 N wired with Ik

C mm
t 80
230
415
kA
d 100
> 36 ... 65
kA
d 60
690
> 20 ... 35 d 20
d 36
d 20
> 15 ... 20 d 15
d 10
d 15
t 10
A
A1
A2
mm
mm
mm
50
150
250
50
200
300
50
100
200
50
200
300
50
150
250
50
150
250
50
150
250
t 30
A
A1
A2
mm
mm
mm
50
100
150
50
150
200
50
100
150
50
150
200
50
150
200
50
150
200
50
150
200
t 10
A
A1
A2
mm
mm
mm
50
100
150
50
150
200
50
100
150
50
150
200
50
150
200
50
150
200
50
150
200
Note: Ik - max. short-circuit cuurent in the protected circuit
4/16
500
d 36
D mm
< 80
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design
Drilling position

103
2
25
3
45
4 x 6.5
60
60
33
65
154
194
201
234
259
275
OFF
45.5
25
33
20
11
105
117
140
40.5
134.5
R 94
TEST
194
25
17
2
ON
NSO0_00507
75.5
18
100 ... < AC 415 V
45
150 ... < AC 415 V
45
47.5
45
47.5
Fixed design, front connection (connecting sets 3VT9 324-4TF30, 3VT9 315-4TF30)
42
45
3
45
28
25
45
319
435
OFF
269
194
234
275
298
344
369
ON
TEST
NSO0_00261
32
140
22 3VT9-324-4TF30
18 3VT9-315-4TF30
22
18
105
4/17
Siemens AG 2007

60
45
34
45
49
38
26
34
45
251
274
297
435
194
234
262
275
285
308
326
ON
OFF
NSO0_00262
TEST
11
25
6 x 8.4
105
140
105
53
45
45
Drilling position
26
3
11.5
20
45
4 x 5 (M 5 x 25)
194
234
65
154
194
275
ON
234
60
OFF
4/18
20.5
140
35
R
NSO0_00264
25
11
2.5
TEST
40.5
45
45
125
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, front connection (connecting set 3VT9 300-4ED30)
31
45
19.5
45
45
194
234
275
314
ON
OFF
NSO0_00267
TEST
32
50
50
140
12.5
32
13
4/19
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, front connection (connecting set 3VT9 300-4EE30)
3
45
31
25
16.5
45
45
140
194
234
275
308
ON
OFF
TEST
32
32
70
4/20
70
NSO0_00269
15 25
56.5
2 x 11
Siemens AG 2007

1
60
NSO0_00271
1 3VT3
2 3VT9 300-3HA.0,-3HB.0
3 3VT9 300-3HE.0,-3HF-0
2
51
37
143
TEST
90
140
50
25
Fixed design, rotary operating mechanis with adjustable lever
2
1 3VT3
NSO0_00273
2 3VT9 300-3HA.0,-3HB.0
3 3VT9 300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
70
37
4 3VT9 300-3HG.0,-3HH.0
5 3VT9 300-3HJ.0
70
51
cabinet door
143
TEST
6
6
90
140
180 495 (-3HJ10)
375 540 (-3HJ20)
25

min. 100
27.5
NSO0_00275
55
4 x 6.5
55
4/21
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, motorized mechanism 3VT9 300-3M..0
275
MANUAL
204
AUTO
NSO0_00276
92
149
TEST
247
31
14
ax
Opening dimensions in cabinet door for external operations counter
NSO0_00332
140
27
4/22
Siemens AG 2007

Plug-in device
Drilling positions

45
25
18
45
4 x 6.5
4 x 6.5
179
277
166
358
166
194
234
277
284
317
342
45
R
4+8 mm
25
33
11
4
45
20
35
47.5
40.5
40.5
96
96
20
26
NSO0_00279
45
47.5
105
140
Plug-in device, terminal cover 3VT9 300-8CB30
105
518
4+8 mm
NSO0_00283
140
35
70
103
4/23
Siemens AG 2007

Plug-in design
358
ON
OFF
NSO0_00285
TEST
105
140
157
187
140
Drilling position
3
Plug-in design, rear connection (Connecting set 3VT9 300-4RC30)
26
53
20
67
4 x 6.5
166
317
317
ON
OFF
58
TEST
4/24
35
105
45
45
125
47.5
40.5
NSO0_00287
20.5
25
96
11
Siemens AG 2007

NSO0_00290
TEST
175
225
Plug-in design, motorized mechanism 3VT9 300-3M..0
MANUAL
AUTO
4,3 max.
TEST
6
NSO0_00292
282
31
4/25
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable device
Withdrawable device 3VT9 300-8CB30
45
25
18
45
6
4 x 6.5
4 x 6.5
179
166
277
358
166
194
234
277
284
317
342
45
R
4+8 mm
20
35
11
Withdrawable device, terminal cover 3VT9 300-8CB30
204
215
105
140
518
4+8 mm
NSO0_00302
140
214
4/26
45
105
140
35
70
103
140
27.5
40.5
40.5
25
33
96
20
26
96
NSO0_00298
47.5
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable design
30
65
124
124
213
OFF
140
140
358
ON
TEST
105
140
157
187
140
215
NSO0_00304
105
170
187
217
105
53
26
213
Withdrawable design, rear connection (Connecting set 3VT9 300-4RC30)
20
65
67
4x6.5
166
317
PS
PS
PS
SP
SV
PS
317
358
ON
OFF PS
TEST
58
35
NSO0_00307
25
140
215
96
11
45
53
140
45
125
47.5
20.5
4/27
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable design, hand drive
Operating position
Checking position
124
140
140
124
30
NSO0_00309
TEST
205
175
225
255
Withdrawable design, motorized mechanism 3VT9 300-3M..0

Operating position
Checking position
124
124
30
MANUAL
140
140
AUTO
4,3 max.
TEST
6
NSO0_00312
282
4/28
31
312
31
Siemens AG 2007

103
45
2
25
3
45
4 x 6.5
60
60
33
65
154
194
201
234
259
275
OFF
25
33
11
45.5
134.5
20
105
117
185
R 94
TEST
194
25
17
2
ON
40.5
NSO0_00319
75.5
18
100 ... < AC 415 V
45
150 ... > AC 415 V
45
92.5
45
47.5
Fixed design, front connection (connecting set 3VT9 324-4TF30 + 3VT9 324-4TF00 + 3VT9 315-4TF30 + 3VT9 315-4TF00)
42
45
45
28
25
45
45
319
435
OFF
269
194
234
275
298
344
369
ON
32
NSO0_00322
TEST
22
18
22 (-3HJ10)
18 (-3HJ20)
105
4/29
Siemens AG 2007

11
38
11
45
45
45
26
45
251
274
297
435
194
234
262
275
285
308
326
ON
OFF
NSO0_00324
TEST
25
11
6 x 8.5
105
185
105
53
26
3
11.5
Fixed design, rear connection (connecting set 3VT9 300-4RC30 + 3VT9 300-4RC00)
20
45
4 x 6.5
194
234
65
154
194
275
ON
234
60
OFF
185
4/30
20.5
40.5
35
NSO0_00326
25
11
2.5
TEST
45
45
170
40
7.5
Siemens AG 2007

1
105
NSO0_00272
1 3VT3
2 3VT9 300-3HA.0,-3HB.0
3 3VT9 300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
2
51
37
143
TEST
90
140
50
25
Fixed design, rotary operating mechanis with adjustable lever
2
1 3VT3
NSO0_00274
2 3VT9 300-3HA.0,-3HB.0
5
70
3 3VT9 300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
4
37
4 3VT9 300-3HG.0,-3HH.0
5 3VT9 300-3HJ.0
70
51
cabinet door
143
TEST
6
6
90
140
180 495 (-3HJ10)
375 540 (-3HJ20)
25

min. 145
27.5
NSO0_00329
55
4 x 6.5
55
4/31
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, motorized mechanism 3VT9 300-3M..0
MANUAL
204
AUTO
4,3 max.
NSO0_00330
92
149
TEST
14
ax
Opening dimensions in cabinet door for external operations counter
NSO0_00332
247
27
4/32
31
Siemens AG 2007

45
45
Drilling positions
25
18
45
4 x 6.5
4 x 6.5
179
277
166
358
166
194
234
277
284
317
342
45
R
3
4+8 mm
96
40.5
25
33
20
35
11
185
45
Plug-in design
105
ON
358
47.5
45
105
Plug-in device, terminal cover 3VT9 300-8CB40
20
26
40.5
NSO0_00333
96
OFF
TEST
4+8 mm
NSO0_00337
185
NSO0_00336
518
185
105
140
157
187
35
70
103
4/33
Siemens AG 2007

Drilling position
Plug-in design, rear connection

26
53
67
20
166
317
358
ON
OFF
4 x 6.5
58
105
40.5
358
NSO0_00339
TEST
175
225
4/34
45
45
170
185
35
NSO0_00338
25
20.5
185
96
11
47.5
TEST
Siemens AG 2007

Plug-in design, motorized mechanism 3VT9 300-3M..0
358
MANUAL
AUTO
4,3 max.
TEST
NSO0_00293
185
31
282

258
45
45
Drilling position
25
18
45
179
4 x 6.5
166
358
166
194
234
277
284
317
342
45
R
4+8 mm
6
20
26
40.5
25
33
11
185
260
96
NSO0_00340
96
20
35
45
47.5
105
4/35
Siemens AG 2007

204
Fixed design, hand drive with adjustable lever
105
4+8 mm
NSO0_00342
518
140
35
185
260
70
103
140
Withdrawable design
27.5
Operating position
Checking position
30
65
124
124
258
140
140
358
ON
OFF
NSO0_00344
TEST
185
260
4/36
105
140
157
187
105
170
187
217
Siemens AG 2007

105
53
26
258
Drilling position
Withdrawable design, rear connection

65
67
20
166
317
358
ON
OFF
58
45
53
45
140
47.5
35
NSO0_00345
25
20.5
185
260
96
11
170
4/37
4 x 6.5
TEST
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable design,
rotary operating mechanism
Operating position
Checking position
30
124
140
140
358
65
124
258
NSO0_00347
TEST
185
260
4/38
205
175
225
255
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable design,
motorized mechanism 3VT9 300-3M..0
Operating position
Checking position
30
65
124
124
258
140
140
AUTO
358
MANUAL
4,3 max.
185
260
282
31
NSO0_00348
TEST
312
31
4/39
Siemens AG 2007

Plug-in Device
Technical data
Plug-in device
Type
3VT9 300-4WL00
AC 400
AC 250
AC 500
Rated frequency fn
Hz
50/60

AC-13
3 A/AC 400 V
DC-15
0.15 A/DC 250 V, 3 A/DC 125 V,

4 A/DC 30 V
Thermal current Ith
Locking plug-in device against inserting circuit breakers
Plug-in design of the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is

intended for demanding industrial applications where rapid
exchange of the circuit breaker along with both visual and
conductive disconnection of the circuit are needed.
plug-in device includes complete accessories for assembling
circuit breaker/switch-disconnector in plug-in design from the
originally fixed design
components of the plug-in device are:
- supporting part of the plug-in device 2 connection sets
(total of 6 terminals) for fitting on to the switching unit
of the circuit breaker for handling inserting and removal)
- set of mounting bolts for securing circuit breaker into plug-in
device (to secure plug-in device into switchboard, a set of
mounting bolts is used that is included in delivery of
switching unit 3VT3 763-.AA36-0AA0
6
001
mm2
Terminal protection
(connected switch)
0.5 ... 1
IP20

Plug-in device may be provided with a maximum of

four switches (for 4-pole design, max. 6 switches) for
signalling the engaged/removed position.

Circuit breaker in plug-in design has two positions:
2. removed
Power circuit
unit 3VT3, 3 pole
page 4/15.
Auxiliary circuits
Plug-in device and circuit breaker can be provided with keying

set, which prevents inserting any other circuit breaker into the
plug-in device.
Circuit breaker in plug-in device has the same accessories as
does the fixed circuit breaker.

States of switches 3VT9 300-4WL00 in plug-in device
according to circuit breaker position
11, 12, 13, 14 (19, 20)1)
1
2
1
4
Inserted
Removed

1)
4/40

unambiguous remote signalling of the circuit breaker position
option to lock plug-in device with padlocks to prevent
inserting of circuit breaker
Plug-in device does not need earthing
Siemens AG 2007

Plug-in Device
Plug-in device with motor drive
Circuit breaker in plug-in design with motor drive

Q3
L+
ON
S
OFF
B
Motor drive
9 7
X3 12 10
NC
S6
NO
C
Description
MP
M
P
X3
X4
S5
S6
YC
B

motor
storage device
Switch to indicate full storage (ready to switch on: NO-C)
recommended wiring of the control circuits (control circuits not
included in motor driver delivery)
make push button
break push button
AC 24V LSN 4C/1
AC 48V LSN 4C/1
AC 110V LSN 4C/1
AC 230V LSN 2C/1
DC 24V LSN-DC 4C/1
DC 48V LSN-DC 4C/1
DC 110V LSN-DC 4C/1
DC 220V LSN-DC 2C/1
ON
OFF
S
Q3
NO
NC
Symbol
S5
MP
11
PE N-
X4
YC
Operating
counter
NSO0_00350
X3
Unplugging circuit breaker with motor drive
each time before removing the circuit breaker we recommend

first to turn the AUTO/MANUAL switch on the motor drive to
the MANUAL position
instructions
4/41
Siemens AG 2007

Plug-in Device
State of switches after removing-withdrawn
3, 4, 5
(6 ... 9)1)
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3 3VT9 300-2AC10
-
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3 3VT9 300-2AC10
-
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3, 4, 5
(6 ... 9)1)
3 3VT9 300-2AC10
-
3VT9 300-2AH10
3 3VT9 300-2AC10
-
State of switches before removing-inserted

position o
Lever position of circuit breaker
State of circuit breaker before removing
3VT9 300-2AC10
Switched on
Manually switched off or by motor drive
Switched off from switched-on state:

by means of auxiliary release, TEST push button
or by OFF push button on the motor drive

1)
4/42
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable Design
Technical data
Auxiliary circuits
Withdrawable design

Circuit breaker in withdrawable design has same accessories as
fixed circuit breaker.
Type
Withdrawable design of the circuit breaker / switch-disconnector

withdrawable device includes complete accessories for
assembling circuit breaker/switch-disconnector in withdrawable design from the originally fixed design
components of the withdrawable device are:
- supporting part of the withdrawable device
- 2 movable side plates
- 2 connection sets (total of 6 terminals) for fitting onto the
switching unit
of the circuit breaker for handling, inserting and withdrawing)
- a set of mounting bolts is used to fasten the withdrawable
device into the switchboard, and these are include with the
3VT3 763-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit
Circuit breaker in withdrawable design has three positions:
2. withdrawn (checking position)
3. removed
AC 400
AC 250
AC 500
Rated frequency fn
Hz
50/60

AC-13
3 A/AC 400 V
DC-15
0.15 A/DC 250 V, 3 A/DC 125 V,

4 A/DC 30 V
Thermal current Ith
001
mm2
0.5 ... 1
IP20
Terminal protection
(connected switch)

unambiguous remote and local signalling of the circuit
breaker and arrestment positions
checking position
locking of withdrawable device prevents inserting of circuit
breaker, locking of circuit breaker in inserted (operating)
position, locking of circuit breaker in withdrawn (checking)
position; locking by means of padlocks
withdrawable device does not need earthing
Withdrawable device and circuit breaker can be provided with

keying set, which prevents inserting another circuit breaker into
the withdrawable device.
11 ... 14
(19, 20)1)
Circiut breaker and arrestment
position
1
2
Withdrawable device can be provided with switches for signalling the position of the circuit breaker, see table.
Power circuit
page 4/15.
15,17
(19, 20)1)
16, 18
1
4
1
4
Inserted and unarrested
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
Withdrawn and unarrested
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
Removed and unarrested
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
Note: 0 - contact open, 1- contact closed

- operating state is always in arrested position
- in arrested position it is possible to lock the withdrawable
device (for more detailed information, see Advantages and
enhanced safety for operator)
1)
4/43
3VT9 300-4WL00
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable Design
Circuit breaker in withdrawable design
Locking withdrawable device against inserting circuit breaker
Locking circuit breaker into withdrawable device against tam-
pering
4/44
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable Design
instructions
Withdrawable design with motor drive
Recommended wiring of circuit breaker in withdrawable design

with motor drive
Q3
L+
ON
Symbol
Description
MP
M
P
X3
X4
S5
S6
YC
B
ON
OFF
S
Q3

motor
storage device
Switch to indicate full storage (ready to switch on: NO-C)
make push button
break push button
AC 24 V LSN 4C/1
AC 48 V LSN 4C/1
AC 110 V LSN 4C/1
AC 230 V LSN 2C/1
DC 24 V LSN-DC 4C/1
DC 48 V LSN-DC 4C/1
Motor drive
X3 12 10
NC
S6
NO
C
9 7
NO
NC
S5
MP
11
PE N-
X4
YC
Operating
counter
NSO0_00350
X3
OFF
Changes in states of switching unit when inserting and withdrawing circuit breaker
State before insertation/withdrawable
State after insertation/withdrawable
Circuit breaker before withdrawal
State of switches before withdrawal-inserted position o
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
2
1
4
3
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3,4,5 (6 ... 9)1)
2
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AD10
1
3VT9 300-2AC10
State of switches after withdrawal-withdrawn position
3, 4, 5 (6 ... 9)1)
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
2
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
State of switches before insertation-withdrawn positiono State of switches after insertation-inserted position
Lever position of circuit

breaker
Circuit breaker before insertation
2
1
Switched on
Manually switched off or by motor

drive
Switched off from switched-on

state: by means of auxiliary release,
TEST push button or by OFF push
button on the motor drive
4/45
Siemens AG 2007

ETU MP
Technical data
interchangeable unit, which is supplied with the 3VT3
switching unit. By exchanging the overcurrent release, the range
of the circuit breakers rated current can be easily changed.
Ir
Overcurrent releases for 3VT3 switching units are produced in

current values of In = 250, 400 and 630 A. The ETU LP releases
are produced with rated currents of 250, 315, 400, 500 and
630A. The releases (including regulation of -60%) cover a
current range from 100 to 630 A.
tr

Ii
NSO0_00354
50 ms
ETU LP
I
0 ms
They have more kinds of characteristics with adjustable Ir, tr and

Irm.
ETU MPS
L
Ir
NSO0_00502
tr
Isd
ETU DP
I
NSO0_00214
They have one type of characteristic and fixed In and Irm

settings.
They have more kinds of characteristics with adjustable Ir, tr,

Isd and tsd.
Ir
tsd
ETU LP, DP, MP and MPS overcurrent releases are intended for
3-pole, 3VT3 763-.AA36-0AA0 switching units and 4-pole,
3VT3 763-.AA46-0AA0 switching units with disconnecting of the
N pole.
ETU DPN
I
L
Ii
Ir
NSO0_00353
IN
tr
I
They have one type of characteristic with adjustable Ir and Irm.

Ii
NSO0_00531
Are intended for 4-pole, 3VT3 763-.AA56-0AA0 switching units

with protected N pole. They have more characteristics with adjustable Ir, tr, Irm and IN.
4/46
Siemens AG 2007

ETU LP, DP, MP and MPS - description of function
overloading. Tripping characteristic of the releases is independent of the ambient temperature. The release is affixed to the
switching unit by two bolts. The translucent cover over the
adjustment controls can be sealed.
Setting the tripping characteristic
The tripping characteristic of the overcurrent releases is defined
by standard EN 947-2. For releases ETU DP, MP, MPS and DPN,
the characteristic is adjusted using latched switches on the
overcurrent release unit.
A visual demonstration on setting the tripping characteristic can
be found in the SIMARIS design program.
protection.
S is a zone of medium overcurrents and includes long-distance
these low short-circuit currents can be used to achieve selectivity of protective devices. For ETU MPS releases, the delay can
be set at 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms.
ultimate short-circuit currents. For ETU MP releases, the time delay can be set at 0 or 50 ms.

switch. The Ir switch is used to adjust the circuit breakers rated
current, with the characteristic shifting on the current axis.
of characteristic.
The dependent releases ETU MP, MPS and DPN are adjusted
using two switches, Ir and tr. The first ( Ir) switch is used to
adjust the circuit breakers rated current. The characteristic is
moved on the current axis.
By turning the other switch (tr), the time is adjusted after which
tr switch, it is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics. For
ETU MP amd MPS releases there are available 4 characteristics for motor protection and 4 characteristics for protecting lines. Breaking times correspond with the release class 10 A,
10, 20, 30. By changing tr, it is possible to select the characteristic according to the required motor starting (light, medium, heavy or very heavy starting). For ETU DPN releases,
there are available 8 characteristics for protecting lines or
transformers. It is not possible to turn the device back on right
after the dependent release has been actuated and circuit
breaker tripped. The release must be allowed to cool off, because it has a thermal memory. The memory can be disabled
by turning the switch from the normal Tt position to the T0
position. The dependent release remains active, and only its
thermal memory is inactivated. Switching off the thermal memory should be used only in well-justified cases, and with the
knowledge that there could be rising temperature in the protected device with
repeated tripping.
This release is only in the ETU MPS overcurrent releases. The
delayed independent release has the function of a delayed
circuit breakers. It is set up using parameters Isd and tsd. Isd is
an n-multiple of current Ir ( Isd = n Ir). It is a short-circuit
current that, within the span of Isd to Irm, will trip the circuit
breaker with delay tsd, where tsd is a delay set up for switching
off the release. The delayed independent release actuates the
circuit breaker if the current in the circuit reaches at least the preset n-multiple and lasts at least the preset delay time tsd.
For releases ETU DP, MP and MPS, the independent instantaneous release is adjusted using one Ii switch. The Ii switch is
used for setting up the short-circuit current that, upon its being
reached or exceeded, causes instantaneous tripping of the
circuit breaker.
4/47
Siemens AG 2007

Tripping characteristics of ETU LP, DP, MP, MPS and DPN
releases with load
1.0
k [-]
NSO0_00355
The tripping characteristic from the cold state indicates the

tripping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment
before the moment when an overcurrent develops, current is
flowing through the circuit breaker. Characteristics of electronic
releases are independent of the ambient temperature and are
plotted in a cold state. Digital releases enable simulation of a
release in warm state. The tripping times become shorter in a
steady state, as shown in the following graph. The steady state
is a period during which the characteristic does not change. If
the circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced current for at least
30 minutes, the tripping times will be cut by a half. If the load is
less than 70% of Ir , the tripping time does not become shorter.
0.8
0.6
T
0.4
0.2
0.0
50
60
70
80
90
100
Ir [%]

by coefficient k.
For all overcurrent releases, the thermal standstill time is tu t 30
min. During this time, the tripping time tsd is cut short from the
cold-state characteristic by the coefficient k.
The real tripping time is ts = k . tsd
Example
steady current 85% of Ir the real tripping time will be hortened to:
ts = 0.74 . tsd
tsd [s] tripping time of the release derived from the characteristic
Ir = min
Restart = T(t)
Ii = min, 0 ms
tr = TV, t(t), min
Isd = 0 ms, min
IN = 0.5 Ir
4/48
Siemens AG 2007

Overcurrent releases ETU LP-Lines
Protecting lines with low starting currents
The 3VT9 3..-6AB00 release is intended for the 3VT3 switching
unit. The release has a thermal memory that cannot be disabled.
Releases rated currents are given by their type designations
and correspond to a standardised series of currents (see specifications table). The short-circuit release is fixed at 4 In.
One of the releases advantages is its simplicity, because it does
not require any adjustment. Therefore, it is intended for less
complicated applications.
Specifications
Rated current In
Instantaneous short circuit

protection Irm
3VT9 325-6AB00
250
1000
3VT9 331-6AB00
315
1260
3VT9 340-6AB00
400
1600
3VT9 350-6AB00
500
2000
3VT9 363-6AB00
630
2520
Type
NSO0_00356
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
Ir
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
0.02
0.01
0.5
250 A
315 A
400 A
500 A
630 A
10
In = 250 A
In = 315 A
Ii
In = 400 A
I
In = 500 A
0.2
0.1
0.05
In =
In =
In =
In =
In =
In = 630 A
2
1
0.5
50
20
x In
4/49
Siemens AG 2007

Specifications-adjustable
The 3VT9 3..-6AC00 release is intended for 3VT3 switching units.

Operation of the release is controlled by a microprocessor. The
release is equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled
by turning a switch on the front panel from position T(t) to position
T(0). After disabling the thermal memory, the thermal release remains active. The operational state 70% of Ir is signalled by an
LED indicator that flashes green in a 1.5 s interval. As the load
grows, the blinking frequency of the diode increases. In case of
a load larger than 110% of Ir, this LED will turn red and just before tripping will begin to blink red.
Order No.
3VT9 325-6AC00
Rated
current In
A
250
The releases have simple adjustment of the tripping characteristic. Set-up includes only the rated current and the short-circuit
tripping level at 4 Ir or 8 Ir.
NSO0_00357
Ir
max.
Ir
3VT9 340-6AC00
Ii
400
200
100
50
In = 250 A
In = 400 A
In = 630 A
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
3VT9 363-6AC00
I
4x
12.5x
4x
12.5x
4x
12.5x
4x
12.5x
In = 250 A
Ii
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
In = 400 A
Ii
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
4x
4x
12.5x
12.5x
Ii
In = 630 A
I r = 575 A.630 A ~ I i = 7 kA
0.2
0.5
10
50
20
xI n
4/50
231
243
250
275
290
315
345
360
400
250
260
275
290
305
345
315
360
20
10
5
172
180
190
200
210
220
231
243
250
T(0)
T(t)
4 x Ir
12,5 x Ir
T(0)
T(t)
4 x Ir
12,5 x Ir
T(0)
4 x Ir
160
172
180
190
200
210
220
min.
Instantaneous short
100
110
115
125
137
144
160

transformers up to 1.5 Ir.
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
500
Overload
Restart
protection Ir
A
630
400
435
455
480
500
550
575
630
T(t)
12,5 x Ir
Siemens AG 2007

The 3VT9 3..-6AP00 release is intended for 3VT3 switching units.

current and short-circuit tripping level. The time delay of the
short-circuit release can be set to 0 or 50 ms. The operational
state 70% of Ir is signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green
in a 1.5 s interval. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of
the diode increases. In case of a load larger than 110% of Ir, this
LED will turn red and just before tripping will begin to blink red.
protecting motors and in mode TV are 4 characteristics for protecting transformers and lines. The shape of each characteristic
can be changed using a selector switch.
Order No.
Rated Overload
current protection
tr (7.2 x Ir)
In
Ir
kA
ms
100
110
115
125
137
144
160
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
0,32
0,6
1,0
1,5
2,0
2,5
3,1
172
3 (M 3)
T(0)
3,75
180
190
200
210
220
231
243
250
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
1 (TV 1)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
3,75
3,1
2.5
2,0
1,5
1,0
0,6
0,32
160
172
180
190
200
210
220
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
0,5
1,0
1,6
2,4
3,2
4,0
5,0
231
3 (M 3)
T(0)
6,0
243
250
275
290
315
345
360
400
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
1 (TV 1)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
6,0
5,0
4,0
3,2
2,4
1,6
1
0,5
250
260
275
290
305
315
345
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0
T(0))
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
0,8
1,4
2
3
4
5,1
6,3
360
3 (M 3)
T(0)
400
435
455
480
500
550
575
630
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
1 (TV 1)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
6,3
6,3
5,1
4
3
2
1,4
0,8
3VT9 325-6AP00 250
3VT9 340-6AP00 400
3VT9 363-6AP00 630
short circuit protection Ii
50

50
50
4/51
Siemens AG 2007

Tripping characteristic 3VT9 ...-6AP00-ETU MP
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
500
min.
Ir
TV
max.
200
20
20
10
10
10
5
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.2
0.1
0.05
50
In = 250 A
0.32
0.6
1.5 2.0 2.5
1.0
Ii [kA]
3.1
3.75
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.1
0.05
50
In = 400 A
1.0
0.5
1.6
2.4 3.2 4.0
5.0
Ii [kA]
6.0
0.02
0 ms 50 ms
Ii
tr
15
20
15
In = 250 A
In = 400 A
In = 630 A
I
50
In=250 A
0.32
0.6
1.0
1.5 2.0 2.5
1.0
1.6
2.4 3.2 4.0
3.1
3.75
Ii [kA]
5.0
Ii [kA]
50
In=400 A
0.5
6.0
0.01
0.1
0.05
50
In = 630 A
0.8
1.4
2.0
6.3
3.0 4.0 5.1 7.0
Ii [kA]
0.2
0.5
10
50
20
x In
4/52
tr
20
0.02
0.01
0.01
0.1
0.05
max.
0.5
I
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
Ir
Ir
100
50
20
In = 250 A
In = 400 A
In = 630 A
min.
200
20
2
1
0 ms 50 ms
Ii
tr
100
50
10
5
tr
Ir
NSO0_00358
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
500
0.02
0.01
0.1
50
In=630 A
0.8
1.4
2.0
6.3
3.0 4.0 5.1 7.0
Ii [kA]
0.2
0.5
10
50
20
x In
Siemens AG 2007

Overcurrent releases ETU MPS-Motors, setting timing selectivity
Order No.
Rated Overload tr (7.2 x Ir) Restart Instanta Enables adjusting time delay of independent release
current protection
Ir
100
110
115
125
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
3
5
7
9
137
144
160
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
3
5
7
172
3 (M 3)
T(0)
180
190
200
210
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
3
5
7
9
220
231
243
250
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
1 (TV 1)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
3
5
7
9
160
172
180
190
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
3
5
7
9
200
210
220
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
3
5
7
231
3 (M 3)
T(0)
243
250
275
290
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
3
5
7
9
315
345
360
400
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
1 (TV 1)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
3
5
7
9
250
260
275
290
1 (TV 1)
3 (TV 3)
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
3
5
7
9
305
315
345
20 (M 20)
15 (M 15)
8 (M 8)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
3
5
7
360
3 (M 3)
T(0)
400
435
455
480
3 (M 3)
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
3
5
7
9
500
550
575
630
20 (TV 20)
10 (TV 10)
3 (TV 3)
1 (TV 1)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
T(t)
3
5
7
9
Ii
3VT9 325-6AS00 250

current and tripping level of the delayed short-circuit release.
The time delay (tv) can be set on the delayed short-circuit
release at 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms. The operational state 70% of Ir
is signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green in a 1.5 s interval. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of the diode increases. In case of a load larger than 110% of Ir, this LED will
turn red and just before tripping will begin to blink red. On the
lower part of the release cover are two photocells for communicating with the prospective signalling unit.
protecting motors, and in mode TV are 4 characteristics for
neous
short
circuit
protection
In
3VT9 340-6AS00 400
3VT9 363-6AS00 630
kA
ms
0
100
200
300
100
200
300
100
200
300
4/53
The 3VT9 3..-6AS00 release is intended for 3VT3 switching units.

Siemens AG 2007

Tripping characteristic 3VT9 3..-6AS00
NSO0_00359
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
min.
Ir
TV
max.
tr
Ir
Isd
tv
500
20
200
100
50
In = 250 A
In = 400 A
In = 630 A
0.5
tr
In = 630 A
In = 400 A
9 x Ir
7 x Ir
5 x Ir
100
In = 250 A
300
200
3 x Ir
0.2
I sd
2
10
I sd
tv
50
20
x In
In
NSO0_00360
n
min.
Ir
max.
tr
Ir
Isd
tv
20
15
500
200
100
50
L
In = 250 A
In = 400 A
In = 630 A
2
1
0.5
20
15
8
tr [s]
0.2
Ir
0.5
tr
9 x Ir
In = 630 A
In = 400 A
100
In = 250 A
300
200
tv [ms]
7 x Ir
0.2
0.1
0.05
4/54
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
0.02
0.01
0.1
tv [ms]
Ir
20
10
5
tr [s]
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
20
10
3 x Ir
2
1
0.5
5 x Ir
20
10
5
10
I sd
2
I sd
5
tsd
10
In
50
20
x In
Siemens AG 2007

Order No.
The 3VT9 3..-6BC00 release is intended for the

3VT3 763-AA36-0AA0 switching unit. The operation of the release is controlled by a microprocessor. The release is equipped
with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning a switch
on the front panel from position T(t) to position T(0). After disabling of the thermal memory, the thermal release remains active.
The rated current Ir, delay for switching off the release at 7.2 Ir,
and the tripping level of the short-circuit release can be
adjusted.
3VT9 325-6BC00
Rated Overload tr (7.2 x Ir) Restart

current protection
In
Ir
100
110
115
125
137
144
160
250
The operational state is signalled by an LED indicator that

flashes green in a 1.5 s interval. As the load grows, the blinking
frequency of the diode increases. In case of a load larger than
110% of Ir this LED will turn red and just before tripping will begin
to blink red. On the lower part of the release cover are two
photocells for communicating with the prospective signalling
unit.
The current of the fourth pole (N pole) is adjusted using the IN
switch as a multiple of the Ir current. Measuring of current on the
fourth pole can be disabled by turning the button to the OFF
position.
500
400
1 x Ir
IN
0.75 x Ir
NSO0_00361
IN = 0.5 x Ir
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
3VT9 340-6BC00
min.
Ir
IN
tr
Ir
Ii
max.
20
10
200
3
100
50
20
10
5
20
t r [ S]
2
1
0.5
0.02
0.01
0.1
I
In = 250 A
In = 400 A
In = 630 A
9 x Ir
4 x Ir
7 x Ir
I n = 250 A
I n = 400 A
I n = 630 A
630
T(0)
10
20
0,5
0,75
OFF
0,5
0,75
OFF
0,5
0,75
OFF
172
180
190
200
210
220
231
243
250
20
160
172
180
190
200
210
220
10
T(t)
3
1
T(0)
10
20
231
243
250
275
290
315
345
360
400
20
250
260
275
290
305
315
345
10
T(t)
3
1
T(0)
10
20
360
400
435
455
480
500
550
575
630
2 x Ir
0.2
0.1
0.05
3VT9 363-6BC00
10
ms
20
10
T(t)
3
1
Ii
0.2
IN
0.5
Ir
2
tr
5
In
10
Ii
50
20
x In
4/55
Overcurrent releases ETU DPN-Distribution with protected

N pole
Protecting lines and transformers in networks TN-C-S and
TN-S
Siemens AG 2007

Switches
Technical data
Specifications
3VT9 300-2A.10
3VT9 300-2A.201)
3VT9 300-2AJ00
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AH201)
AC 60 ... 500
DC 60 ... 500
AC 5 ... 60
DC 5 ... 60
AC 250
AC 24 ...250
DC 24 ...250
AC 5 ..60
DC 5 ...60
500
Rated frequency fn
Hz
50/60
Order No.
250

AC-12
--
0.004 ... 0.5 A/5V
--
--
--
AC-15
6 A/240 V,4 A/400 V,

2 A/500 V
--
1 A/AC 250 V
1.5 A/AC 250 V
--
DC-12
--
0.004 ... 0.5 A/5V
--
--
0.01 A/DC 60 V
DC-13
0.4 A/240 V, 0.3 A/400 V, 0.004 ... 0.01/60 V

0.2 A/500 V
--
0.2 A/DC 250 V
--
10
--
0.5
02, 11, 20
001
Thermal current Ith
A
mm2
Terminal protection
(connected switch)
0.5 ... 1
IP20
3VT9 300-2A.20 is not suitable to control electromagnetic loads.
Type designation according to contact arrangement

Arrangement
of
contacts
Order No.
01
3VT9 300-2AC10 (20) 1
make
20
3VT9 300-2AG10 (20) 2
make
01
3VT9 300-2AD10 (20) 1
break
02
3VT9 300-2AE10 (20) 2
break
11
3VT9 300-2AF10 (20) 1 + 1
break + make
001
3VT9 300-2AH10 (20) 1
change-over
Number of contacts
Contact types

accessory compartments
Switch location
Switch name
Switch function
accessory
compartment 1
Signalling
Signal to indicate of the circuit breaker by

the overcurrent release
accessory
compartment 2
Relative
Relative to indicate tripping of the circuit

breaker by releases, TEST push button or
by OFF push button on the motor drive
accessory
compartment
3,4,5,(6 ... 9)2
Auxiliary
Auxiliary to indicate the position of the

main contacts
accessory
compartment 10
Early
Early to make/break in advance of the

main contacts
state of switches in the switching unit cavities
4/56
7.3
7.1
7.2
7.4
7.4
7.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
7.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
8.4
8.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
8.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
auxiliary
9.3
9.1
9.2
9.4
6.3
6.1
6.2
6.4
6.4
6.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
6.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
auxiliary
2.1
3.1
5.3
5.1
5.2
5.4
5.4
5.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
5.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
2.4
3.4 3VT9 300-2AG10
auxiliary
2.2
3.2 3VT9 300-2AE10
4.3
4.1
4.2
4.4
4.4
4.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
4.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
auxiliary
or or
or or
or or
cavity no. 2 cavity no. 3 cavity no. 4 cavity no. 5
or
or
cavity no. 2 + 3
or or
or or
or or
or or
cavity no. 6 cavity no. 7 cavity no. 8 cavity no. 9
NSO0_00362
cavity no. 1
or or
9.4
9.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
9.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
1.1
or
2.2
3.4 3VT9 300-2AF10
3VT9 300-2AH10
2.3
3.3
3.3
3.1
3.2
3.4
auxiliary
8.3
8.1
8.2
8.4
Switches
auxiliary
3.4
3.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
auxiliary
2.3
2.1
2.2
2.4
auxiliary
2.4
2.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
2.1
3VT9 300-2AH10
1.1
1.2
1.4
1.2
1.4
10.Y4
or
cavity no. 10
relative
3VT9 300-2AD10
1.3
signal
3VT9 300-2AC10
10.Y1
10.Y3
3VT9 300-2AJ00
early contact
2.1
3.3
2)
10.Y2
1)
0.5
01, 10, 02, 11, 20
Siemens AG 2007

Shunt trip unit
NSO0_00364

Main contacts
5.2
4.2
3.2
2.4
Order No.
3VT9 300-1S.00
AC 24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V

DC 24, 40, 48, 110, 220 V
Rated frequency fn
Hz
50/60
AC
DC
< 3 VA
<3W
Time to switch-off
Loading time
ms
2.2
5.3
4.3
3.3
5.1
4.1
3.1
2.3
2.1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
20
Auxiliary switch
accessory
compartment
35
5.4
4.4
3.4
1
3
5
20
20
Auxiliary switch
30
Relative switch
accessory
compartment
2
2
4
6
20
Relative switch
30
1
0
t [ms]
Technical data
U t 0,7 Ue the circuit breaker must trip
20
Switched on
mm2 0.5 ... 1
Terminal protection
(connected trip)
IP20
Location in accessory compartment No.
10

the motor drive
by drive
3VT9 300-1SD00
AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220
3VT9 300-1SE00
L+
B2
NSO0_00518
3VT9 300-1SC00
1AC/DC 10 V
3VT9 300-1S.00
Order No.
AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V
B1
Ue
N-
The particular rated operating voltage of the shunt trip is set up

by jumpers located right in the release. It is always set to the
maximum value by default.
4/57
Siemens AG 2007

Technical data
NSO0_00365

Main contacts
AC 24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V

DC 24, 40, 48, 110, 220 V
< 3 VA
<3W
< 3 VA
<3W
U 0.85 Ue
(circuit breaker is possible switch on)
U 0.35 Ue
(the circuit breaker must trip)
ms
Loading time
IP20
compartment No.
10
Earl switch
--
10.Y2 10.Y1
10.Y4 10.Y3
AC 250
Rated frequency fn
Hz
--
50/60
--
AC 1 A/AC 250
--
02, 11, 20
--
0.5 ... 12)
--
IP20
1)
3VT9 000-1UX00.
2)
Cannot be used in combination with motor drive 3VT9 300-3M..0.
Type designation according to ratedoperating voltage

Order No.
AC 24,40 48 V
3VT9 300-1SC00
AC/DC 110 V
3VT9 300-1SD00
AC 230,400,500/DC 220 V
3VT9 300-1SE00
accessory
compartment
35
Early switch
20
1
0

by drive
Number and type of contacts by arrangement of contacts

Number of contacts
Contact types
2
11
20
2
1+1
2
break
breake + make
make
L+
L+
N-
The particular rated operating voltage of the udervoltage release

is set up by jumpers located right in the release. It is always set
to the maximum value by default.
20

the motor drive
U<
4/58
Early switch
Switched on
A1
Ue
30
--
mm2
1
0
Relative switch
1
0
30
t [ms]
Terminal protection
(connected release)
10.Y2 10.Y1
10.Y4 10.Y3
mm2 0.5 ... 12)
Terminal protection
(connected trip)
2.1
20
f
2.2
Relative switch
3VT9 300-1U.00
50/60
1
0
30
3VT9 300-1U.10
2.3
2.4
1
0
Auxiliary switch
U<
N-
NSO0_00519
AC
DC
5.1
4.1
3.1
30
10.Y2
5.2
4.2
3.2
1
0
Auxiliary switch
A1
10.Y1
Hz
5.3
4.3
3.3
A2
Rated frequency fn
5.4
4.4
3.4
20
accessory
compartment
2
3VT9 300-1U.00
1
0
accessory
compartment
10
3VT9 300-1U.102)
Order No.
1
3
5
A2
2
4
6
Siemens AG 2007

The rotary operated mechanism makes possible to control the

circuit breaker:
- from the front panel of the circuit breaker (Fig.1)
Rotary operated mechanism unit 3VT9 300-3HA/HB..
+ Rotary operated mechanism lever 3VT9 300-3HE/HF..
- through the switchgear door (Fig. 2)
Rotary operated mechanism unit 3VT9 300-3HA/HB..
+ Rotary operated mechanism bearing VT9300-3HG/HH..
+ Rotary operated mechanism lever + 3VT9 300-3HE/HF..
The rotary operated mechanism unit is fixed right on the switching unit of the circuit breaker.
The rotary operated mechanism bearing is fixed onto the
switchgear door and it provides protection IP40 or IP66.
The rotary operated mechanism lever is placed on the rotary
operated mechanism unit or on the rotary operated mechanism bearing.
The extension shaft is supplied in two options, standard
(length 365 mm - can be cut short) and telescopic (adjustable
length 245 ... 410 mm).
The rotary operated mechanism makes possible to govern the

circuit breaker by pivoting lever, e.g. to switch machines on and
off. Modular conception of drives makes possible simple mounting on the switching unit (also additionally) after the accessory
compartment cover is removed. A fixed motor is possible to seal.
The drive and its accessories is ordered separately according to
your choice, see page 4/5.
Enhanced safety for operator :

The rotary operated mechanism unit and rotary operated mechanism lever are also supplied with the possibility to lock the
circuit breaker in position witched off manually. The unit and
lever of the rotary operated mechanism can be locked using
three padlocks with shank diameter max. 4 ... 6 mm.
Each rotary operated mechanism bearing prevents the door
from opening when the circuit breaker is on-state or off-state
by releases and types VT9300-3HG10 and VT9300-3HG20
when the circuit breaker is in the state switched off manually
and hand drive lever is locked up.
Two circuit breakers with hand drives can be provided with
mechanical interlock or with parallel mechanical switching,
see page 4/60.
Specifications
Switchgear door locking in the circuit breaker state
Order No.
Description
Colour
Locking while the

circuit breaker is in
OFF state
Protection
switched on or off switched off

by release
manually and
locked
Length
mm
3VT9 300-3HA10
Hand drive unit
blue
no
--
--
--
--
3VT9 300-3HA20
Hand drive unit
blue
yes
--
--
--
--
3VT9 300-3HB20
Hand drive unit
yellow
yes
--
--
--
--
3VT9 300-3HE10
Hand drive lever
black
no
--
--
--
--
3VT9 300-3HE20
Hand drive lever
black
yes
--
--
--
--
3VT9 300-3HF20
Hand drive lever
red
yes
--
--
--
--
3VT9 300-3HG10
Hand drive bearing
black
--
IP40
yes
yes
--
3VT9 300-3HG20
Hand drive bearing
yellow
--
IP40
yes
yes
--
3VT9 300-3HH10
Hand drive bearing
black
--
IP66
yes
no
--
3VT9 300-3HH20
Hand drive bearing
yellow
--
IP66
yes
no
--
3VT9 300-3HJ10
Extension shaft
--
--
--
--
--
365 (can be short)
3VT9 300-3HJ20
Extension shaft-telescopic
--
--
--
--
--
245 ... 410
4/59
Technical data
Siemens AG 2007

Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers/switchdisconnectors so that they cannot both be tripped simultaneously, but only one of them at a time. Both circuit breakers may
be turned off simultaneously. Interlocking can be used between
two 3VT3 circuit breakers or between 3VT3 and 3VT2 circuit breakers. Both circuit breakers must be furnished with a hand drive
(at least one with a hand drive unit and hand drive lever), see
page 4/59.
In order to use the interlocking, it is absolutely necessary to comply with the dimensions shown in the figure and table.
Provides for simultaneous switching of two circuit breakers/

switch-disconnectors. Parallel switching can be used between
two 3VT31) circuit breakers or between 3VT3 and 3VT2 circuit
breakers. Each circuit breaker must be equipped with a hand
drive unit and at least one with a hand drive lever, see page 4/59.
In order to use parallel switching it is absolutely necessary to
5
RP-BD-CK10
L
PS
PS
PS
X
TEST
X
NSO0_00234
TEST
NSO0_00233
Left
switching
unit

3VT2, 3P
X
3VT2, 4P
X
3VT3, 3P
X
3VT3, 4P
X
Left
switching
unit

3VT2, 3P
3VT2, 4P
3VT3, 3P
3VT3, 4P1)
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
3VT2, 3P
105
112
140
145.5
122.5
128.5
181
185.5
3VT2, 3P
105+7
164.5+7 122.5+7 164.5+7 122.5+7 164.5+7 x
3VT2, 4P
105
112
140
145.5
122.5
128.5
181
185.5
3VT2, 4P
105+7
164.5+7 122.5+7 164.5+7 122.5+7 164.5+7 x
122.5+7 164.5+7 140+7
164.5+7 140+7
164.5+7 x
122.5+7 164.5+7 140+7
164.5+7 140+7
164.5+7 x
3VT3, 3P
122.5
128.5
157.5
145.5
140
145.5
185
189
3VT3, 3P
3VT3, 4P
122.5
128.5
157.5
145.5
140
145.5
185
189
3VT3, 4P
1)
Switching unit 3VT3, 4P (4-pole design) can only be on the right side.
RP-BD-CK10
RP-BD-CK10
PS
PS
PS
SP
SV
PS
PS
PS
SP
SV
TEST
TEST
NSO0_00235
Technical data
4/60
Siemens AG 2007

3VT9 300-8LC.0 Mechanical interlocking
Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers/switch-disconnectors so that they cannot both be tripped
simultaneously, but only one of them at a time. Both circuit breakers may be turned off simultaneously.
3VT9 300-8LC10 mechanical interlocking is intended for two
3VT3 circuit breakers. 3VT9 300-8LC20 interlocking is intended for one BH630 circuit breaker and one 3VT2.
Circuit breakers may be in fixed, plug-in and withdrawable
designs.
3VT9 300-8LC10
3VT9 300-8LC20
Circuit breaker types
3VT3
3VT2
3VT3
3VT3
Order No. of mechanical interlocking
Circuit breaker placement in switchgear
148
NSO0_00366
Detailed information can be found in the instructions for use,

which you may download from our website
www.siemens.com\technical assistance.
=4
ON
45
min
0 ... 700
OFF
TEST
30
ON
OFF
TEST
min. 80
4/61
Siemens AG 2007

Technical data
The motorized operating mechanism is part of circuit breaker

accessories enabling you to switch the circuit breaker on and off
remotely. Modular conception of the motor mechanism enables
simple mounting on the circuit breaker (also additionally) after
the circuit breaker accessory compartment cover is removed.
The fixed motor can be sealed. 3VT3 circuit breakers with motor
motor mechanism can be used in the most demanding industrial
applications such as protection of standby sources, synchronization of two sources, etc. and anywhere it is necessary to
ensure automated and unmanned operation of electrical equipment.
The motor mechanism are equipped with spring storage units
and due to accumulated energy to trip the circuit breaker, it is no
problem to trip the circuit breakers within times up to 60 ms.
Releasing of the storage unit and tripping of the circuit breaker
is ensured by a closing coil that belongs to standard equipment
of every motor mechanism. The time before the circuit breaker is
tripped using the motor mechanism is 900 ms. This method of
tripping is suitable for controlling technological entities. When
button), it is possible to use the motor mechanism in combination with undervoltage release or shunt trip.
On the motor mechanism front panel there is a selector switch
to select the drive modes with a possibility to indicate remotely
the selector switch state. The first mode is automatic remote
control (selector switch in position AUTO). This is the standard
position in automatic operation. The second mode is manual
control (selector switch position MANUAL), the motor mechanism does not need any voltage to perform its function.
Remote switching on and off in position AUTO is carried out
using push buttons that must be connected to the drive unit
connector, furthermore, this position makes it is possible to
control the circuit breaker with the push buttons on the drive
unit front panel.
In MANUAL mode it is possible to switch on and off using the
green and red push buttons on the front panel of the motor mechanism cover. The function of the remote control ON button
in MANUAL mode is locked up, whereas the function of the remote control OFF button remains active for safety reasons.
The motor mechanism, apart from the circuit breaker, recognizes only two fixed positions. In the first position the circuit breaker is ON. When the circuit breaker is tripped in AUTO mode
by overcurrent releases or auxiliary trips, then because of mechanical link between the circuit breaker and the motor mechanism, a pulse will be generated to wind up the spring of the
storage unit automatically. The motor mechanism can be
wound up automatically, depending on operators demand, by
permanent closing of switch S or after the circuit breaker is
checked by switching S switch on. In the second fixed position the circuit breaker is switched off and the loaded drive is
ready to switch the breaker on after it has received the setting
pulse.
The motor mechanism makes it possible to control the circuit
breaker after the loss of control voltage. In MANUAL and
AUTO modes, it is possible to wind up the storage unit by repeated rotation of the foldable handle. After the storage unit is
wound up, it is possible to switch the circuit breaker on and off
using the control buttons on the front panel of the motor mechanism.
4/62
On the front panel there is a storage unit status indicator indicating locally what state the 3VT3 motor mechanism unit storage is in and whether it is possible to switch the circuit breaker on. 3VT3 motor mechanism enable to obtain a storage
status signal from the terminal strip also remotely. 3VT2 motor
mechanism have optional designs, alternatively with MANUAL/AUTO indication.
The mechanism can be furnished with an electromechanical
operations counter that may be installed in the drive cover or
fixed beyond the circuit breaker space (e.g. in the switchgear
door) or in the switchgear space using a metal holder included in the supply of external operations counter and its connecting can be done using connectors.
The mechanism can be locked in off position using as many
as three padlocks with shank diameter max. 4.3 mm.
Extension cable 3VT9 300-3MF00 has a connector on one
side that connects to the connector on the motor mechanism
and conductors on the other side that connect, for example, to
a terminal block.
Order No.
3VT9 300-1S.00
AC 24 ,48, 110, 230

DC 24, 48, 110, 220
Rated frequency fn
Hz
50/60
400 ms f1)
Control pulse length for storing

for switching on
20 ms ... 700 ms1)
for switching off
400 ms ...f1)
Time before switching on
ms
< 60
ms
900
3 contact making/hr
Frequency of cycles - instant

successive ON/OFF cycles
10 contact making
20000 contact making
Input power
AC 100 VA, DC 100 W
Protection
AC 24, 48, 110 V; AC 230 V
DC 24, 48, 110 V; DC 220 V
LSN 4C/1; LSN 2C/1

V
AUTO / MANUAL switches Ie/Ue
AC 5 A/250
DC 0.5 A/250
Order No.
3VT9 300-3MF00
12
Conductor cross sections S
mm2
0.35
Conductor lengths
cm
60
1)
For sequence of control pulses, see page 4/63.
Siemens AG 2007

Specifications
Auxiliary switch
50
1
0
Relative switch
1
0
2.1
10.Y2 10.Y1
10.Y4 10.Y3
10.Y2 10.Y1
10.Y4 10.Y3
5.3
4.3
3.3
5.2
4.2
3.2
5.1
4.1
3.1
Relative switch
1
0
2.3
2.2
50
1
0
5.4
4.4
3.4
2.4
2.2
2.3
2.1
Early switch
20
1
0
Early switch
20
1
0
10.Y2 10.Y1
10.Y4 10.Y3
10.Y2 10.Y1
10.Y4 10.Y3
NSO0_00369
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
900
Auxiliary switch
900
Auxiliary switch
900
Relative switch
Relative switch
Early switch
900
Early switch
900
1
0
t [ms]
t [ms]
Circuit breaker states and Lever positions of circuit breakers
Wiring diagram
Circuit breaker switch on and switched off by motorized operating mechanism, electrical by pusch button ON and pusch button OFF
Switched on
motor drive

Q3

drive
L+
ON
S
OFF
B
Motor drive
X3 12 10
NC
S6
NO
C
9 7
NC
PE N-
X4
NSO0_00370
MP
11
Description
motor
storage device
X3
X4
S5
switch indicating AUTO/MANUAL modes
S6
Switching indicating energy storage

(ready to on: NO-C)
YC
recommended wiring of the control circuits

(not included in drive order)
ON
make push button
OFF
break push button

Q3
NO
S5
X3
Symbol
MP
YC
Operations
counter
4/63
5.1
4.1
3.1
accessory
compartment
35
5.2
4.2
3.2
1
3
5
Auxiliary switch
accessory
compartment
2
5.3
4.3
3.3
Main contacts
2
4
6
accessory
compartment
35
1
0
5.4
4.4
3.4
2.4
50
accessory
compartment
10
1
3
5
accessory
compartment
2
Main contacts
2
4
6
Circuit breaker switched off by motorized operating mechanismelectrical by push button OFF
accessory
compartment
10
NSO0_00368
Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanismelectrical by push button ON
Siemens AG 2007

Specifications
3.2
3.1
2.3
1
0
1
0
2.2
1.4
1.2
2.1
1.3
1.1
1
0
1
0
20
20
Auxiliary switch
30
3.4
3.2
1
0
1
0
3.3
1
0
3.1
Relative switch
20
650
Relative switch
30
650
2.4
2.2
1
0
2.3
650
Early switch
650
30
1
0
20
Auxiliary switch
20
20
Auxiliary switch
20
Relative switch
30
520
Relative switch
30
1
0
2.1
Early switch
20
NSO0_00242
1
3
5
Auxiliary switch
accessory
compartment
3
1
0
2.4
3.3
20
accessory
compartment
2
3.4
1
0
Main contacts
2
4
6
520
t [ms]
accessory
compartment
1
1
3
5
accessory
compartment
3
Main contacts
2
4
6
Tripping of the circuit breaker with a motorized operating mechanism shunt trip or undercurrent release (switch S in switched-on
state - automatic storage)
accessory
compartment
2
NSO0_00527
Tripping of the circuit breaker with a motorized operating mechanism by the overcurrent release (switch S in switched-on state automatic storage)
t [ms]
Wiring diagram
Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanism
(electrical push button ON) and switched off by shut trip
Control circuit

(electrical push button ON) and switched off by undervoltage release
Q3
Q3
L+
L+
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Motor drive
NO
NO
9 7
NC
NC
NO
NO
or
S6
S5
U<
PE N-
X4
J
cav. no.10
YC
Operations
counter
4/64
N-
NSO0_00371
B2
11
A2
MP
U<
X3
S5
S6
or
MP
X3
11
X4
A2
B1
A1
X3 12 10
cav. no.10
PE N-
YC
Operations
counter
N-
NSO0_00372
SV-BHD-X...
NC
NC
B2
9 7
3VT9 300-1S.00
X3 12 10
3VT9 300-1U.00
A1
B1
Motor drive
SP-BHD-X...
Siemens AG 2007

Specifications
Circuit breaker switched on/off by motorized operating mechanism S-switch permanently closed (automatic storage) or open
Symbol
Description
HK
main contacts
PS
auxiliary switch
RS
relative switch
R OFF
IMP S

switch)
IMP ON
IMP OFF
50
1
0
520
RS
> 880
1
0
> 1400
20 700
IMP ON
1
0
NSO0_00246
HK
t [ms]
R OFF

and switched on by motorized operating mechanism S-switch
permanently closed (automatic storage)
RS
1
0
520
> 880
> 1400
20 700
IMP ON
1
0
NSO0_00246
1
0

motor drive
drive
50
HK
Switched on
t [ms]
R OFF
Circuit breaker switched off by overcurrent or auxiliary

releases and switched on by motorized operating mechanism
S-switch closed only for storing up
50
1
0
RS
1
0
X + 520
X
1
0
> 880
> 1400
400
IMP S
> 100
20 700
IMP ON
NSO0_00247
HK
t [ms]
R OFF
4/65
Siemens AG 2007

Use of motor 3VT9 200-3M..0 in the automatic standby system
Wiring diagram of the motor drive of circuit breaker
Recommended control pulses for switching of the circuit breakers 3VT3 by the motor drive after their switching off by a shunt
trip or undervoltage release in the automatic standby system
Q3
L+
> 1400
ON
S
50
OFF
HK
1
0
RS
1
0
SV
1
0
SP
1
0
Motor drive
A1
B1
520
NC
NC
NO
NO
S5
S6
U<
or
3VT9 300-1S.00
9 7
3VT9 300-1U.00
X3 12 10
> 880
20
200
t [ms]
> 100
PE N -
X4
YC
Cycle
counter
N-
NSO0_00079
B2
X3
11
A2
MP
400
IMP S
1
0
cav. no.10
X
HK
1
0
RS
1
0
motor
storage device
SV
1
0
X3
connector for connection of control circuits
X4
connector for external cycle counter
S5
switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL

(NC-C) mode
YC
external cycle counter 3VT9 300-3MF10
SP
1
0
recommended connection of control circuits

(is not included in the motor drive supply)
ON
push button
OFF
push button
switch for storage (closed = automatic storage;

it can be closed permanently)
Q3
motor drive circuit breaker-see page E69
In use of circuit breakers 3VT2 or 3VT3 with mechanical interlocking by Bowden cable in the automatic standby system, it is recommended to switch the circuit breaker off only by an auxiliary
release. Otherwise the first attempt of switching a standby circuit
breaker may fail.
50
> 1400
X + 520
M
200 700
IMP ON
NSO0_00081
200 700
IMP ON
1
0
NSO0_00080
Control circuit
> 880
20
>200
t [ms]
Graph description
Symbol
Description
HK
Main contacts
RS
Relative switch
SV
SP
IMP ON
Motor drive make pulse
IMP OFF
Motor drive storage pulse (generated by S switch)

Switched on
button
(wound up state)
7
4/66
Siemens AG 2007
3VT4 Molded Case

Catalog
5/2
5/3
3VT4 Molded Case

General data
5/5
5/6
3VT4 Molded Case

Siemens AG 2007
3VT4 Molded Case Circuit-Breaker up to 1000 A

General data
Overview
5/2
Siemens AG 2007


- connecting sets for front connection - busbars connection
- overcurrent release ETU DP, MP and UP (circuit breaker) or
- switch disconnector unit 3VT9 410-6DT00
- Withdrawable device 3VT9 500-4WA40
Rated current In
kA
Withdrawable device must be fitted with:

- 2 x connection sets 3VT9 500-4EF30 (front connection) or
- 3VT9 500-4RD30 (rear connection)
We recommend fitting with:
- mounting bolts set 3VT9 500-4SA40 (4 x M8 x 60)
DT Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Switching Units
3-pole version fixed design
1000
65
3VT4 710-3AA30-0AA0
1 unit
23,000
3VT4 710-3AA38-0AA0
1 unit
23,000
Withdrawbale device
3VT9 500-4WA40
1 unit
13,000
Rated current In
Set current of the inversetime delayed overload trip

units L Ir
DT Order no.
3-pole version withdrawable design

65
1000
Withdrawable device
Accessories
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
ETU trip unit

315
125 ... 315
630
250 ... 630
800
315 ... 800
1000
400 ... 1000
B
B
B
B
3VT9 431-6AC00
3VT9 463-6AC00
3VT9 480-6AC00
3VT9 410-6AC00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,500
0,500
0,500
0,586
B
B
B
B
3VT9 431-6AP00
3VT9 463-6AP00
3VT9 480-6AP00
3VT9 410-6AP00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,500
0,500
0,500
0,590
B
B
B
B
3VT9 431-6AD00
3VT9 463-6AD00
3VT9 480-6AD00
3VT9 410-6AD00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,500
0,500
0,500
0,500
Motor and generator protection, ETU MP, LI funktion

315
125 ... 315
630
250 ... 630
800
315 ... 800
1000
400 ... 1000
Universal protection, ETU UP, LSI function
protecting complicated loads or those not specified in advance

315
125 ... 315
630
250 ... 630
800
315 ... 800
1000
400 ... 1000
5/3
Siemens AG 2007

Rated current In
Set current of the inversetime delayed overload trip

units L/r
DT Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
1000
3VT9 410-6DT00
1 unit
0,474
for overcurrent releases ETU, LP and UP
3VT9 500-6AE00
1 unit
0,670
Signalling unit
5/4
Siemens AG 2007

Specifications
Circuit breaker 3VT4
Switch disconnector
EN 60 947-2, IEC 947-2
EN 60 947-3, IEC 947-3
Type
Standards
Approval marks
Number of poles
Rated current In
315, 630, 800, 1000
1000
--
1000
AC max. 690
AC max. 690
DC max. 440
Rated frequency fn
Hz
50/60
kV
690
--
--
---
AC-23 B
DC-23 B
Rated short-time withstand current Ue=AC 690 V Icw/t
15 kA/1 s
15 kA/1 s
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking

capacity (rms value)1) Icu/Ue
AC 85 kA/230V
AC 65 kA/415V
AC 45 kA/500V
AC 20 kA/690V
--
Off-time at Icu
30 ms
--

AC 45 kA/230V
AC 36 kA/415V
AC 30 kA/500V
AC 20 kA/690V
--

(peak value) Icm/Ue
140 kA/AC 415 V
30 kA/AC 415 V
30 kA/DC 440 V
AC 690 V
DC 440 V
100
cycles
10000
cycles
4000
cycles
/hr
120
Operating force
230
IP40
IP20
A, B
40
-40 ... +55
Working environment

3
Pollution degree
Max. elevation
2000
Seismic resistance
Hz
3g (8 ... 50)
Plug-in design
--
Withdrawable design
Accessories
//--/--
Undervoltage release/with early switch with signal switch
/--

by Bowden
Locking-type lever
/--
available,
-- unavailable
1)
In case circiut breaker connection is reversed (input terminals 2, 4, 6 output terminals 1, 3, 5), Icu does not change.
5/5
Siemens AG 2007

interchangeable unit, which is supplied with the 3VT4 710-3AA..0AA0 switching unit. By exchanging the overcurrent release, the
range of the circuit breakers rated current can be easily changed.
Releases for the 3VT4 710-3AA30-0AA0 switching unit are produced in four current ranges In = 315, 630, 800 and 1000 A.
The releases, including their adjustment, cover rated currents
ranging from 125 to 1000 A.
ETU DP
I
L
Ir

ETU MP
I
L
Ir
tr
Ii
NSO0_00374
NSO0_00373
Ii
They have more kinds of characteristics with adjustable Ir, tr

and Irm.
ETU UP
They have universal characteristic, with the greatest variability
in adjustment: Ir, tr, Isd, tsd and Ii.
ETU DP, MP and UP
signal of the power circuit and recalculates it to obtain an rms value. Therefore, digital releases are suitable for protecting circuits
overloading. Setting of selective cascading of circuit breakers is
especially enabled by the ETU UP release. Tripping characteristic of the releases is independent of the ambient temperature.
The release is affixed to the switching unit by two bolts. The
translucent cover over the adjustment controls can be sealed.
Tripping characteristic adjustment for ETU DP and MP releases
The tripping characteristic of overcurrent releases is defined by
standard EN 60 947-2. The characteristic is adjusted in two zones using latched switches on the overcurrent release unit:
5/6

protection.
ultimate short-circuit currents. For ETU MP releases, the time delay can be set at 0 or 50 ms.
Siemens AG 2007


The independent instantaneous release in designs ETU DP and
ETU MP is adjusted using one switch, Ii. The Ii switch is used for
setting up the short-circuit current that, upon its being
reached or exceeded, causes instantaneous tripping of the
circuit breaker. Regulation of the short-circuit release takes in
settings for the characteristic appropriate for protecting lines
and motors. The wave form of the tripping characteristic is
adjusted using latched switches on the releases front panel
according to the needs of the protected device. A visual
demonstration on setting the tripping characteristic can be
found in the SIMARIS design.
Tripping characteristics of ETU DP and MP releases with load

state indicates the tripping times during which it
NSO0_00375
k [-]
1.0
0.8
0.6
T
0.4
0.2
0.0
50
60
70
80
90
100
I r [%]
is assumed that, before the moment when an overcurrent

develops, current is flowing through the circuit breaker.
Characteristics of electronic releases are independent of the
ambient temperature and are plotted in a cold state. Digital
releases enable simulation of a release in warm state. The
tripping times become shorter in a steady state, as shown in the
following graph. The steady state is a period during which the
characteristic does not change. If the circuit breaker is loaded
with a reduced current for at least 30 minutes, the tripping times
will be cut by a half. If the load is less than 70% of Ir , the tripping
time does not become shorter.
5/7

switch. The Ir switch is used to adjust the circuit breakers
rated current. The characteristic is moved on the current axis.
of characteristic.
The dependent release ETU MP is adjusted using two switches, Ir and tr. The first (Ir) switch is used to adjust the circuit
breakers rated current. The characteristic is moved on the
current axis. By turning the other switch (tr), the time is
adjusted after which the circuit breaker will trip while passing
through 7.2 Ir. The tripping characteristic thus moves on the
time axis. Using the tr switch, it is possible to set a total of 8
characteristics. Four characteristics are available for motors
protection. Breaking times correspond with the release class
10 A, 10, 20, 30. By changing tr, it is possible to select the
characteristic according to the required motor starting
(light, medium, heavy or very heavy starting). For protecting
transformers and lines, 4 characteristics can be set. It is not
possible to turn the device back on right after the dependent
release has been actuated and circuit breaker tripped. The
memory.
The memory can be disabled by turning the restart switch
from the normal Tt position to the T0 position.
The dependent release remains active, and only its thermal
memory is inactivated. Switching off the thermal memory
should be used only in well-justified cases, and with the
knowledge that there could be rising temperature in the
protected device with repeated tripping.
Siemens AG 2007

ETU DP and MP tripping times shortening with load
by coefficient k.
For all kinds of characteristics tr, the thermal standstill time for
ETU DP and MP releases is tu t 30 min.
During this time, the short-circuit tripping time tv is cut short from
the cold-state characteristic by the coefficient k.
The real tripping time is ts = k . tv
Example
steady current 85% of Ir the real tripping time will be shortened
to:
ts = 0.74 . tv

Ir = min
Restart = T(t)
Irm = min, 0 ms
tr = TV, min
5/8
Siemens AG 2007

Tripping characteristic adjustment, Trip unit ETU UP
L
The delayed independent release has the function of a delayed

circuit breakers. It is set up using specifications Isd and tsd.
Ir
is an n-multiple of current Ir (Isd = n Ir). It is a shortcircuit current that, within the span of Isd to Irm, will trip the
circuit breaker with delay tsd, where tsd is a delay set up for
switching off the release.
Isd
tr
Isd
I 2 t ON
tsd
NSO0_00456
Ii
I 2 t OFF
The tripping characteristic of overcurrent releases is defined by

standard EN 60 947-2. The characteristic is adjusted in three
zones using latched switches on the overcurrent release unit:
L - is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of thermal
protection.
S - is a zone of medium overcurrents and includes long-distance
these low short-circuit currents can be used to achieve selectivity of protective devices. This type of delay can be set only in
self-contained releases (full version).
I - is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against
ultimate short-circuit circuits without time delay.
I2t - Characteristic setting in the ON position represents a
constant value of energy passed through. If fuses are used as
protective elements for outgoing branch feeders, it is possible to
adjust the selective part of the characteristics to better suit the
shape of the fuse characteristics.
The delayed independent release actuates the circuit breaker

if the current in the circuit reaches at least the preset n-multiple
and lasts at least the preset delay time tsd. The independent
release can be disabled by setting the parameter n
(Isd = n Ir) into the position. Parameter tsd can be set to values
with respect to the energy that passed through l2t (switch
position l2t on). The preset time values are then applicable for
currents more than 10x current Ir. Tripping times of k-multiples of
Ir for k < 10 are defined as follows:
10 2
t = tv
k
3. Independent instantaneous release I
The independent instantaneous release has the function of a
short-circuit release. It is set up only on parameter Irm. Irm is
short-circuit current that, upon its being reached or exceeded,
causes the circuit breaker instantaneously to switch off. It is set
up directly in kA on the release. The wave form of the tripping
characteristic is adjusted using latched switches on the releases front panel according to the needs of the protected
device. A visual demonstration on setting the tripping characteristic can be found in the SIMARIS design.

The dependent release ETU UP is adjusted using two switches,
Ir and tr. Using the first switch, Ir, the circuit breakers rated
current is adjusted. The characteristic is moved on the current
axis. Turning the second switch, tr, adjusts the time after which
tr switch a total of 8 characteristics can be set. Breaking times
correspond with the release class 10 A, 10, 20, 30. It is not
possible to turn the device back on right after the dependent
release has been actuated and circuit breaker tripped. The
memory.
The memory can be disabled by turning the restart switch from
the normal Tt position to the T0 position. The dependent
release remains active, and only its thermal memory is inactivated. Switching off the thermal memory should be used only in
well-justified cases, and with the knowledge that there could be
rising temperature in the protected device with repeated
tripping.
5/9
Siemens AG 2007

Tripping characteristic ETU UP release with load
is a period during which the characteristic does not change. If
the circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced current for at least
less than 70% of Ir , the tripping time does not become shorter.
NSO0_00375
k [-]
1.0
Example
to:
ts = 0.74 . tv
Ir [A] adjusted rated current release
= min
Restart = T(t)
Irm = min
tr = min
tv = min, I2t - ON
Isd = min
Ir
Manufacturer
0.8
Ir
0.6
T
0.4
60
70
80
90
100
I r [%]

by coefficient k.
For all kinds of characteristics tr the thermal standstill period for
ETU UP releases is tu t 30 min. During this time, the short-circuit
tripping time tv is cut short from the cold-state characteristic by
the coefficient k.
The real tripping time is ts = k .tv
5/10
Irm
= min, 0 ms
tr = TV, t(t), min

Isd = 0 ms, min
I=
0.2
0.0
50
= min
Restart = T(t)
0.5 Ir
Siemens AG 2007

The 3VT9 4..-6AC00 release is intended only for the 3VT4 7103AA..-0AA0 switching unit. Operation of the release is controlled
by a microprocessor. The release is outfitted with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning the switch on the front panel from position T(t) to position T(0). After disabling the thermal
memory, the thermal release remains active.
Order No.
Another advantage of this release is the simple adjustment of the

tripping characteristic. Set-up includes only the rated current in
a range of 0.4 to 1.0 of In and the short-circuit tripping level. The
reaching of 80% and 110% of Ir is indicated by LED diodes on
the front panel denoted as I > 80% and I > 110% of Ir.
On the lower part of the release cover are four photocells for
communicating with the 3VT9 500-6AE00 signalling unit.
125, 137
144, 160
172, 180
200, 220
3VT9 431-6AC00
315
min.
Ir
3VT9 463-6AC00
630
Ii
1000
500
3VT9 480-6AC00
800
200
100
50
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
550, 575
610, 630
685, 720
760, 800
400, 435
455, 480
500, 550
575, 610
20
10
5
400, 435
455, 480
500, 550
575, 630
315, 345
360, 400
435, 455
480, 500
NSO0_00377
max.
Ir
231, 243
250, 260
275, 290
305, 315
250, 260
275, 290
305, 315
345, 360
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
3VT9 410-6AC00
In = 315 A
In=630A
In=1000A
In = 630 A
In = 800 A
In=1250A
In = 1000 A
In=1600A
1000
630, 685
720, 760
800, 866
909, 1000
T(0)
T(t)
T(0)
T(t)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
T(0)
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
4
5
0.8
1.5
2
3
4
6
8
10
1
1.5
2
3
4
6
9
12
1.25
2
3
5
A practical advantage of the release is a specially designed

tripping characteristic that provides for optimal exploitation of
transformers up to 1.5 In.
Rated cur- Overload

protection Ir
short circuit prorent In
tection I
7
9
12
14
I
1.0
0.5
1.5 2.0
1.5 2.0
0.8
3.0 4.0
6.0 8.0 10
Ii [kA]
In = 630 A
1.0
1.5 2.0
3.0 4.0
9.0 12
6.0
Ii [kA]
In = 800 A
1.25
2.0
3.0
5.0 7.0 9.0 1214
Ii [kA]
In = 1000 A
0.5
3.0 4.0 5.0
Ii [kA]
In = 315 A
0.2
2.5
10
50
20
x In
5/11
Siemens AG 2007

Direct protection of motors and generators
The 3VT9 4..-6AP00 release is intended only for the 3VT4 7103AA..-0AA0 switching unit. The operation of the release is controlled by a microprocessor. The release is equipped with a
thermal memory that can be disabled by turning a switch on the
front panel from position T(t) to position T(0). After disabling the
thermal memory, the thermal release remains active.
transformers up to 1.5 In. It is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics on the release. From these, in mode M there are 4
characteristics for motors protection and another 4 characteristics in mode TV for protecting transformers and lines. The
shape of each characteristic can be changed using a selector
switch.
Order No.
Rate Overload tr (7.2 x Ir) Restar Instantaneous

d
protect
short circuit procur- tion Ir
tection I
rent
In
A
3VT9 431-6AP00 315
When one or two phases fail, in the M-characteristic mode, the

switch will open with a 4 s delay (so-called undercurrent
release).
Another parameter for adjusting the release is rated current,
which is adjusted in a range of 0.4 to 1.0 of In and the shortcircuit tripping level, for which it is possible to set the delay at 0
or 50 ms. The reaching of 80% and 110% of Ir is indicated by
LED diodes on the front panel denoted as I > 80% of Ir and I >
110% of Ir. On the lower part of the release cover are four photocells for communicating with the 3VT9 500-6AE00 signalling
unit.
3VT9 463-6AP00 630
3VT9 480-6AP00 800
125, 137
1 (TV 1)
144, 160
3 (TV 3)
kA
1
T(0)
172, 180
10 (TV 10)
200, 220
30 (TV 30)
231, 243
3 (TV 3)
250, 260
8 (TV 8)
T(t)
15 (TV 15)
1.5
305, 315
25 (TV 25)
0.5
250, 260
1 (TV 1)
1.5
275, 290
3 (TV 3)
305, 315
10 (TV 10)
345, 360
30 (TV 30)
10
400, 435
3 (TV 3)
455, 480
8 (TV 8)
500, 550
15 (TV 15)
375, 630
25 (TV 25)
0.8
400, 435
1 (TV 1)
1.5
455, 480
3 (TV 3)
500, 550
10 (TV 10)
575, 610
30 (TV 30)
630, 685
3 (TV 3)
722, 760
8 (TV 8)
800, 866
15 (TV 15)
909, 1000 25 (TV 25)
400, 435
1 (TV 1)
455, 480
3 (TV 3)
500, 550
T(0)
T(t)
T(0)
3
9
9
T(t)
T(0)
10 (TV 10)
5
9
14
630, 685
3 (TV 3)
12
722, 760
8 (TV 8)
800, 866
15 (TV 15)
909, 1000 25 (TV 25)
2.5
275, 290
3VT9 410-6AP00 1000 575, 610 30 (TV 30)
5/12
T(t)
3
1.25
ms
0.5
1.5
2.5
4
5
3
50
2
1
0.8
2
4
8
10
6
3
50
1.5
1
2
4
4
6
12
12
6
3
50
1.5
1.25
3
7
12
12
9
5
2
50
Siemens AG 2007

Tripping characteristic ETU MP
NSO0_00378
min.
Ir
TV
max.
tr
Ir
0 ms 50 ms
Ii
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
500
1000
500
200
200
tr
100
50
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
IIn=630A
n = 315 A
IIn=1000A
n = 630 A
IIn=1250A
n = 800 A
IIn=1600A
n = 1000 A
2
1
0.5
50
In = 315 A
1.0
0.5
1.5 2.0
2.5
Ii [kA]
3.0 4.0 5.0
50
In = 630 A
1.5 2.0
0.8
3.0 4.0
Ii [kA]
6.0 8.0 10
50
In = 800 A
1.5 2.0
1.0
3.0 4.0
6.0
Ii [kA]
9.0 12
50
2.0
1.25
3.0
Ii [kA]
14
5.0 7.0 9.0 12
0.2
0.5
10
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
0.01
0.1
0.05
50
20
0.01
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
0 ms 50 ms
Ii
L
tr
25
15
15
IIn=630A
n = 315 A
IIn=1000A
n = 630 A
IIn=1250A
n = 800 A
IIn=1600A
n = 1000 A
I
50
In = 315 A
1.0
1.5 2.0
2.5
3.0 4.0 5.0
1.5 2.0
3.0 4.0
6.0 8.0 10
0.5
Ii [kA]
50
In = 630 A
0.8
Ii [kA]
50
In = 800 A
1.5 2.0
1.0
0.02
In = 1000 A
M
tr
25
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.1
10
5
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
3
1
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
10
NSO0_00379
max.
20
20
10
Ir
Ir
100
50
30
30
10
5
min.
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
3.0 4.0
6.0
Ii [kA]
9.0 12
50
In = 1000 A
2.0
1.25
3.0
Ii [kA]
14
5.0 7.0 9.0 12
0.2
0.5
10
50
20
x In
x In
5/13
Siemens AG 2007

Overcurrent trip unit-ETU UP
Protecting complicated loads or those not specified in
advance
The 3VT9 4..-6AD00 release is intended only for the 3VT4 7103AA..-0AA0 switching unit. The release is equipped with a
thermal memory that can be disabled by turning the restart
switch on the front panel from the position T(t) to the position T(0).
After disabling the thermal memory, the thermal release remains
active.
The operational state 70% of Ir is signalled by an LED indicator

that flashes green in a 1.5 s interval. As the load grows, the
blinking frequency of the diode increases. In case of a load
larger than 110% of Ir this LED will turn red and just before
tripping will begin to blink red. On the lower part of the release
cover are four photocells for communicating with the
3VT9 500-6AE00 signalling unit.
A practical advantage of the release is its maximum flexibility for

adjusting the tripping characteristic. With its possibility for
setting I2t = constant and I5t = constant, it is optimal from the
selectivity viewpoint for its interaction with fusing devices.
Short delayed
short circuit protection Isd=(n x Ir)
Order No.
tr (7.2 x Ir)
tsd
ms
315
125, 137
144, 160
172, 180
200, 220
0.5
3
5
7
2
3
5
6
50, 100
200, 300
400, 600
800, 1000
231, 243
250, 260
275, 290
305, 315
10
15
20
25
8
9
10
f
50, 100
200, 300
400, 600
800, 1000
250, 260
275, 290
305, 315
345, 360
0.5
3
5
7
2
3
5
6
50, 100
200, 300
400, 600
800, 1000
400, 435
455, 480
500, 550
575, 630
10
15
20
25
8
9
10
f
50, 100
200, 300
400, 600
800, 1000
315, 345
360, 400
435, 455
480, 500
0.5
3
5
7
2
3
5
6
50, 100
200, 300
400, 600
800, 1000
550, 575
610, 630
685, 720
760, 800
10
15
20
25
8
9
10
f
50, 100
200, 300
400, 600
800, 1000
400, 435
455, 480
500, 550
575, 610
0.5
3
5
7
2
3
5
6
50, 100
200, 300
400, 600
800, 1000
630, 685
720, 760
800, 866
909, 1000
10
15
20
25
8
9
10
f
50, 100
200, 300
400, 600
800, 1000
3VT9 431-6AD00
Rated
Overload
current In protection Ir
3VT9 463-6AD00
3VT9 480-6AD00
3VT9 410-6AD00
5/14
630
800
1000
I2t
short circuit
protection I
kA
on
T(0)
0.5
1
1.5
2
off
T(t)
2.5
3
4
5
on
T(0)
0.8
1.5
2
3
off
T(t)
4
6
8
10
on
T(0)
1
1.5
2
3
off
T(t)
4
6
9
12
on
T(0)
1.25
2
3
5
off
T(t)
7
9
12
14
Siemens AG 2007

Tripping characteristic ETU UP
NSO0_00380
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
min.
Ir
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
Ii
Ir
max.
tr
Ir
Isd
tv
Ii
Isd = (2 10) x Ir min
Ii = (2 10) x Ir max
In =
In =
In =
In =
200
315 A
630 A
800 A
1000 A
20
10
5
S
2
1
0.5
1000
tr [s]
0.5
tv [ms]
(I 2 t = OFF)
0.5
I
1.0
0.5
0.2
Ii [kA]
1.5 2.0
0.8
3.0 4.0
6.0 8.0 10
50
Ii [kA]
In = 630 A
1.0
In = 800 A
3.0 4.0
In = 1000 A
0.5
2.0
50
6.0
9.0 12
Ii [kA]
1.25
0.2
1.5 2.0
50
3.0
14
5.0 7.0 9.0 12
10
315 A
630 A
800 A
1000 A
S
1000
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
In = 630 A
50
20
0.5
I
1.0
0.5
In = 315 A
tr [s]
0.5
tv [ms]
(I 2 t = ON)
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
Ii [kA]
2
In =
In =
In =
In =
0.1
0.05
1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0
50
In = 315 A
Isd = (2 10) x Ir max
100
50
1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0

50
Ii [kA]
1.5 2.0
0.8
3.0 4.0
50
6.0 8.0 10
Ii [kA]
0.2
tv
min.
500
200
2
1
0.5
Isd
NSO0_00381
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
Ii = (2 10) x Ir min
100
50
10
5
tr
Ir
1000
500
20
max.
1.0
1.5 2.0
3.0 4.0 6.0

50
Ii [kA]
In = 800 A
In = 1000 A
0.02
0.01
0.5
0.1 0.2
9.0 12
1.25
2.0
3.0
5.0 7.0 9.0 1214

50
Ii [kA]
1
10
50
20
x In
x In
5/15
Siemens AG 2007

NSO0_00382
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
min.
Ir
0.2
In =
In =
In =
In =
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
NSO0_00383
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
min.
315 A
630 A
800 A
1000 A
20
10
5
tr [s]
3
2
1
0.5
S
1000
tv [ms]
(I 2 t = OFF)
50
Ii [kA]
In = 315 A
1.5 2.0
0.8
3.0 4.0
6.0 8.0 10
50
Ii [kA]
In = 630 A
1.0
1.5 2.0
3.0 4.0
6.0
9.0 12
50
Ii [kA]
In = 800 A
1.25
2.0
3.0
5.0 7.0 9.0 1214
50
In = 1000 A
0.02
0.01
0.5
0.1 0.2
Ii [kA]
1
10
50
20
x In
tv
Isd
Ii
In =
In =
In =
In =
315 A
630 A
800 A
1000 A
25
25
tr [s]
3
1000
tv [ms]
(I 2 t = ON)
I
1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0
1.0
0.5
50
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
In = 315 A
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
In = 630 A
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
tr
0.1
0.05
1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0
1.0
0.5
0.2
max.
Ir
200
25
25
Ir
1000
500
100
50
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
Ii
100
50
2
1
0.5
tv
Isd
200
10
5
tr
Ir
1000
500
20
max.
I i [kA]
1.5 2.0
0.8
3.0 4.0
6.0 8.0 10
50
I i [kA]
1.0
1.5 2.0
3.0 4.0
6.0
9.0 12
50
I i [kA]
In = 800 A
In = 1000 A
0.02
0.01
0.5
0.1 0.2
1.25
2.0
3.0
5.0 7.0 9.0 1214

50
I i [kA]
1
10
50
20
x In
7
5/16
Siemens AG 2007
3VT5 Molded Case

Catalog
6/2
6/3
6/4
6/5
6/6
6/7
6/3
6/9
6/25
6/27
6/37
6/38
6/39
6/40
6/41
6/42
6/43
3VT5 Molded Case

General data
mechanism
Further accessories
3VT5 Molded Case
Withdrawable Design
Signalling units
Auxiliary switches
Shunt trip units
Undervoltage releases
Mechanical interlocking and
parallel switching
Siemens AG 2007

General data
Overview
6/2
Siemens AG 2007


- set of installation bolts (4x M8x80)
- connecting sets for front connection - busbars connection
- switch-disconnector unit 3VT9 516-6DT00 (switch-disconnector)
Rated Current
In
Kurzschlussausschaltvermgen Icu
bei AC 400 V
kA
Withdrawable design
- switch-disconnector unit 3VT9 516-6DT00 (switch-disconnector)
- Withdrawable device 3VT9 500-4WA40
DT
Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Switching units
3-pole version fixed design
1600
65
3VT5 716-3AA30-0AA0
1 unit
23,000
3VT5 716-3AA38-0AA0
1 unit
23,000
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
3-pole version withdrawable design

1600
1)
65
For connecting in another way, it is necessary to use connecting sets

(see page 6/6).
Rated current In
Overload protection1)
DT Order no.
kg
ETU trip units

630
250 ... 630 A
1000
400 ... 1000 A
1250
500 ... 1250 A
1600
630 ... 1600 A
B
B
B
B
3VT9 563-6AC00
3VT9 510-6AC00
3VT9 512-6AC00
3VT9 516-6AC00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,500
0,500
0,500
0,590
B
B
B
B
3VT9 563-6AP00
3VT9 510-6AP00
3VT9 512-6AP00
3VT9 516-6AP00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,500
0,593
0,500
0,500
B
B
B
B
3VT9 563-6AD00
3VT9 510-6AD00
3VT9 512-6AD00
3VT9 516-6AD00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,590
0,590
0,590
0,590
3VT9 516-6DT00
1 unit
0,400
for trip units DP, MP and UP
3VT9 500-6AE00
1 unit
0,670
Motor generator, ETU MP, LI function

630
250 ... 630 A
1000
400 ... 1000 A
1250
500 ... 1250 A
1600
630 ... 1600 A
Universal protection, ETU UP LSI function
protecting complicated loads or those not specified in advance

630
250 ... 630 A
1000
400 ... 1000 A
1250
500 ... 1250 A
1600
630 ... 1600 A
Switch-Disconnector unit
1600
Signalling unit
6/3
Accessories
Siemens AG 2007


DT Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Auxiliary switches
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V/DC60 ... 240 V
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V
C
B
3VT9 500-2AF00
3VT9 500-2AF10
1 unit
1 unit
0,100
0,041
AC/DC 24 V
AC/DC 48 V
AC/DC 110 V
B
B
B
3VT9 500-1SF00
3VT9 500-1SG00
3VT9 500-1SH00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,199
0,220
0,220
AC 230 V/DC 220 V

AC/DC 400 V
AC/DC 500 V
B
B
B
3VT9 500-1SJ00
3VT9 500-1SK00
3VT9 500-1SL00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,201
0,220
0,220
AC/DC 24 V
AC/DC 48 V
AC/DC 110 V
B
B
B
3VT9 500-1UF00
3VT9 500-1UG00
3VT9 500-1UH00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,220
0,220
0,220
AC 230 V/DC 220 V

AC/DC 400 V
AC/DC 500 V
B
B
B
3VT9 500-1UJ00
3VT9 500-1UK00
3VT9 500-1UL00
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,220
0,220
0,220
Shunt trips
6/4
Siemens AG 2007

Overview
Hand drive unit is necessary to be completed:
for controlling using the switch unit with the black hand
drive lever 3VT9 500-3HE/HF10
for controlling through the switchgear door

- with the extension shaft 3VT9 500-3HJ10
- with the hand drive bearing 3VT9 500-3HG..
- hand drive lever 3VT9 500-3HE/HF10

Version
DT Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg

Hand drive unit
lockable
3VT9 500-3HA10
1 unit
0,230
B
B
3VT9 500-3HE10
3VT9 500-3HF10
1 unit
1 unit
0,261
0,261
protection IP44
protection IP66
B
B
3VT9 500-3HG10
3VT9 500-3HG20
1 unit
1 unit
0,265
0,140
Extension shaft
length 365 mm
3VT9 500-3HJ10
1 unit
0,352
3VT9 300-8LA00
1 unit
0,136
For circuit breaker/switch-disconnector in fixed design

B
For one fixed and one withdrawable circuit breaker/switch-disconnector B
For circuit breaker/switch-disconnector in withdrawable design
B
3VT9 500-8LC10
3VT9 500-8LC30
3VT9 500-8LC40
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
0,400
0,400
0,500
3VT9 500-3MF00
3VT9 500-3MQ00
1 unit
4,454
3VT9 500-3MF10
3VT9 500-3MQ10
1 unit
4,400
Hand drive lever

lockable
lockable
black
red
Hand drive bearing
Mechanical Interlocking
Mechanical interlocking to the hand drive
for circuit breaker/switch-disconnector in fixed design
Both circuit breakers must be equipped with hand drive (at least with
a hand drive unit and hand drive lever).
Mechanical interlocking by bowden
Mechanical interlocking by Bowden is intented for fixed, plug-in and withdrawable designs.

Motor drive
AC/DC 110 V
AC 230 V/DC 220 V
AC/DC 110 V
AC 230 V/DC 220 V
6/5
Siemens AG 2007


Withdrawable device
the way of power circuit connection must respect our recommendations, see page 6/11 as well as deionization space, see
page H17 must be fitted with:
- switching unit 3 pole version 3VT5;
must be fitted with
- 2 x connection sets 3VT9 500-4EF30 (front connection) or
3VT9 500-4RD30 (rear connection)
Version
max. permissible
cross-section S
We recommend fitting with - mounting bolts set 3VT9 500-4SA40

(4 x M8 x60)
Type of cables
DT Order no.
PS*
mm2
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Withdrawable device
B
3VT9 500-4WA40
1 unit
13,000
3VT9 524-4TG30
1 unit
1,470
3VT9 524-4TF30
1 unit
0,663
up to 1000 A
3VT9 400-4RC30
1 unit
1,430
up to 1600 A
3VT9 500-4RC30
1 unit
2,678
3-pole version
Connecting sets
Box terminals, double
2 x 70 ... 240
Cu/Al cables
For connecting four 70 ... 240 mm2 cables to pole, it is possible to use
two 3VT9 524-4TG30 connecting sets (see page 6/14). Not for
3VT4 710-3AA30-0AA0 switching unit.
Box terminals,
70 ... 240
Cu/Al cables
For connecting three 70 ... 240 mm2 cables to pole it is possible to

combine 3VT9 524-4TF30 connecting set with 3VT9 524-4TF30
connecting set (see page 6/15). Not for 3VT4 710-3AA30-0AA0 switching unit
Busbars
Rear connection
Front connection
of withdrawable design
Busbars
3VT9 500-4EF30
1 unit
2,730
Rear connection
of withdrawable design
Busbars
3VT9 500-4RD30
1 unit
3,420
for 2 cables
3VT9 532-4TF30
1 unit
1,000
for 3 cables
3VT9 533-4TF30
1 unit
1,948
for 4 cables
3VT9 534-4TF30
1 unit
1,828
Circular conductor
terminal
6/6
150 ... 300
Cu/Al cables
Siemens AG 2007

Further accessories

Version
DT Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Accessories
Insulating barriers
In case of reversed connection (supply to terminals 2, 4, 6), must be
installed also on lower side.
Not included with each order of switching unit in the fixed design.
for switching unit in the fixed
3VT9 500-8CE30
1 unit
0,264
for withdrawable device
3VT9 500-8CF30
1 unit
0,142
for circuit breaker/switch-disconnector in the fixed design with rear B

connection
for withdrawable device with front
B
3VT9 500-8CD30
1 unit
0,287
3VT9 500-8CC30
1 unit
0,168
3VT9 500-8CG30
1 unit
0,100
Terminal cover-protection
Increases degree of protection of connection point to IP20.
Intended for withdrawable device with front connection.
We recommend its installation on both sides of withdrawable device
for increasing safety in servicing electrical device.
for rear connection
Insulating grommets
Intended for fixed design of switching unit and withdrawable device
with rear connection.
Insulate connecting sets of rear connection from switchgear structure.
We recommend installing on all connecting sets with rear connection.
B
Locking type lever

Enables locking circuit breaker in switched off manually position.
For locking, up to three padlocks may be used with max. shaft crosssection of 4 ... 6 mm
3VT9 500-3HL00
Bolt sealing inset
3VT9 500-8BN00
on req.

overcurrent release
Connecting cable
3VT9 500-4PL00
1 unit
0,120
3VT9 500-4WL00
1 unit
0,020
3VT9 500-4SA40
1 unit
0,144
3VT9 500-3MF20
1 unit
0,019
for connecting circuit breaker accessories in withdrawable design

(15 wire)
Position indicator
signals circuit breaker/switch-disconnector position in withdrawable
design
Mounting bolts
for withdrawable device
ON button cover
for motor drive, cover can be sealed
6/7
Siemens AG 2007

Specifications
Circuit breaker 3VT5
Switch disconnector
EN 60 947-2, IEC 947-2
EN 60 947-3, IEC 947-3
Type
Standards
Approval marks
Number of poles
Rated current In
630, 1000, 1250, 1600
1600
--
1600
AC max. 690
AC max. 690
DC max. 440
Rated frequency fn
Hz
50/60
kV
690
A, B
--

AC 690 V
DC 440 V
---
AC-23 B
DC-23 B
20 kA/1 s
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity

(rms value)1) Icu
85 kA/AC 230 V
65 kA/AC 415 V
45 kA/AC 500 V
20 kA/AC 690 V
--
Off-time at Icu
30
--
ms
45 kA/AC 230 V
36 kA/AC 415 V
30 kA/AC 500 V
20 kA/AC 690 V
--

(peak value) Icm/Ue
140 kA/AC 415 V
40 kA/AC 415 V
40 kA/AC 440 V
120
cycles
10000
--
4000
cycles/ 120
hr
Operating force
230
IP40
IP20
40
-40 ... +55
Working environment

3
Pollution degree
Max. elevation
2000
Seismic resistance
Hz
3g (8 ... 50)
Plug-in design
--
Withdrawable design
Accessories
//--/--
Undervoltage release/with early switch with signal switch
/--

by Bowden
Locking-type lever
/--
available,
-- unavailable,
+ in preparation
6/8
2)
In case circiut breaker connection is reversed (input terminals 2, 4, 6 output terminals 1, 3, 5), Icu does not change.
Siemens AG 2007

Wiring diagram
control circuits
2 4
Withdrawable device
1
1
3
Connecting cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
(7)
Q3
L+
SO 1
X2
(8)
ON
OFF
Motor drive
Main circuit
Auxiliary trips
4.13
4.21
4.31
3VT9 500-2AF004.43
U<
4.14
4.22
4.32
4.44
3.13
3.21
3.31
3VT9 500-2AF003.43
B1
or
S5
3.14
3.22
3.32
3.44
NO
I>
I>
relative
2.13
2.21
2.31
3VT9 500-2AF002.43
10
2.14
2.22
2.32
2.44
1.13
1.21
1.31
3VT9 500-2AF001.43
Switches
auxiliary
relative
1.14
1.22
1.32
1.44
NC
3VT9 500-6AE00
3VT9 500-1S.00
X3 5 7
A1
3VT9 500-1U.00
auxiliary
Q
T1
T2
T3
X3
B2
MP
A2
TEST
cavity no. 1
cavity no. 5
cavity no. 2
cavity no. 3
cav. no. 4
X1
4
Withdrawable device
MP
motor driv, 3VT9 500-3M..00
motor
storage device
X3
SSI
switch signalling MANUAL (NO-C)/AUTO (NC-C) modes
recommended wiring of the control circuits
ON
push button
OFF
push button
Q3
switching uni, 3VT4 710-3AA30-0AA0,

3VT5 716-3AA30-0AA0
main contacts
T1, T2, T3,
trip-free mechanism
ETU
overcurrent release, ETU DP, MP and UP
TEST
ZV-BL
withdrawable device, 3VT9 500-4WA40
X1, X2
connecting cable for the withdrawable device

3VT9 500-4PL00
SO1, SO2
contacts indicating positions of withdrawable devices

3VT9 500-4WL00 see page 6/25
3VT9 500-1U..0
undervoltage trip unit
3VT9 500-1S..0
shunt trip unit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Connecting cable
3VT9
5004WA40
4 2
2
SO 2
NSO0_00384
N-
6/9
Siemens AG 2007

Functions
States of switches in the circuit breaker cavities
Lever positon
of circuit breaker
3, 4
3VT9 500-2AF10
1, 2
3VT9 500-2AF10
Switched on
Switched off manually or electrically by drive

release, auxiliary release or by
TEST push-button

Power circuit
Connected with Cu/Al busbars or cables, and possibly cables
with cable lugs.
For greater connecting options, connecting sets are produced
(see page 6/6).
Generally, conductors from supply are connected to input terminals 1, 3, 5, (N) and conductors from load to terminals 2, 4,
6, (N). However, it is possible to reverse this connection (switching of input and output terminals) without limiting rated
In case of reversed connection, circuit breaker/switch-disconnector must be provided with 3VT9 500-8CE30 insulating barriers also on the side of terminals 2, 4, 6 (for detailed information, see page 6/12).
We recommend painting the connecting busbars.
Input and output conductors/busbars must be mechanically
reinforced to avoid transmitting electrodynamic force to the
circuit breaker/switch-disconnector during short-circuiting.
The way of connecting the power circuit must observe the circuit breakers deionization spaces (see page 6/12).

Auxiliary circuits
using flexible 0.5 ... 1 mm2 Cu conductors to terminalson
these devices.
Auxiliary circuits of the withdrawable design are connected
using a connector.
Maximum circuit breaker/switch disconnector loads in accordance with ambient temperature
Rated current Permissible crossIn

section S
Busbars W x H
Cu
AI
Cu
Al
mm2
mm2
mm
mm
250
400
500
120
185
2 x 150
150
240
2 x 185
630
800
1000
2 x 185
2 x 240
2 x 240
2 x 240
3 x 240
3 x 240
50 x 10 2 x 50 x 5
2 x 50 x 6
2 x 50 x 8
1300
3 x 240
1500 (1450)1) 4 x 240
1600 (1450)1)
4 x 240
1)
2 x 50 x 10
2 x 50 x 101)
2 x 50 x 10
Withdrawable device connected by 2 x 50 x 12 mm Cu busbar can be

loaded with max. 1420 A. For 1600 A loading, the withdrawable device
must be connected with 2 x 50 x 12 mm busbar.
Circuit breaker/switch-disconnector 3VT4 - connection

Cu busbars 2 x 50 x 6 mm to pole
50 C
55 C
60 C
65 C
70 C
1000 A
1000 A
1000 A
1000 A
980 A

50 C
55 C
60 C
65 C
70 C
1400 A
1400 A
1340 A
1260 A
1200 A

6/10
50 C
55 C
60 C
65 C
70 C
1600 A
1540 A
1460 A
1400 A
1320 A
Siemens AG 2007

Order No.
max. rated
current I
Maximum permissible conductor cross-section S

Cable type
Sector-shaped
conductor,
stranded
Sector-shaped conductor, solid
Round
conductor, stranded
Round conductor,
solid
Busbars and Technical inforcable lugs

mation
WxH
A
3VT9 524-4TG30 800
mm2
mm
2 x (70 ... 240) Cu/Al
2 x (95 ... 300) Cu/Al
2 x (50 ... 185) Cu/Al
2 x (70 ... 240) Cu/Al
95 ... 300 Cu/Al
50 ... 185 Cu/Al
70 ... 240 Cu/Al
3VT9 524-4TF30
500
70 ... 240 Cu/Al
3VT9 532-4TF30
3VT9 533-4TF30
1000
1500
2 x (150 ... 300) Cu/Al 2 x (150 ... 300) Cu/Al

3 x (150 ... 300) Cu/Al 3 x (150 ... 300) Cu/Al
2 x (150 ... 300) Cu/Al 2 x (150 ... 300) Cu/Al

3 x (150 ... 300) Cu/Al 3 x (150 ... 300) Cu/Al
3VT9 534-4TF30 1600

3VT9 400-4RC30 1000
4 x (150 ... 300) Cu/Al 4 x (150 ... 300) Cu/Al
4 x (150 ... 300) Cu/Al 4 x (150 ... 300) Cu/Al
Page
6/14, 6/21,
6/20
6/15, 6/22,
6/23
6/15, 6/21
6/15, 6/21
6/16, 6/22
6/13
3VT9 500-4RC30 1600

3VT9 500-4EF30 1600
50 x ....
50 x ....
6/13
6/19
3VT9 500-4RD30 1600
50 x ....
50 x ....
6/11
Siemens AG 2007

Dimension drawings
A, B, C - minimum deionization space free of earthed metal
parts
B = 310
C = 134.5
A = 100
If withdrawable device is connected on upper side using clamp

or block type terminals,3VT9 500-8CF30 insulating barriers must
always be installed.
In all other cases, we recommend installing 3VT9 500-8CC30
insulating cover on upper side of the device
terminals 2, 4, 6 ( lower side)
If withdrawable device is connected on lower side using clamp
or block type terminals, 3VT9 500-8CF30 insulating barriers
must always be installed.
In all other cases, we recommend installing3VT9 500-8CC30
insulating cover on lower side of withdrawable device.
350
50
ON
NSO0_00522
OFF
210

breakers ans switch-disconnectors
Fixed design
front connection
terminals 1, 3, 5 (upper side)
3VT9 500-8CE30 insulating barriers must always be installed on
circuit breaker/switch-disconnector.
terminals 2, 4, 6 (lower side)
- a) If circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is connected to the
supply using terminals 2, 4, 6, 3VT9 500-8CE30 insulating
barriers must always be installed on it.
- b) If circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is connected on
lower side using clamp or block type terminals, 3VT9 5008CE30 insulating barriers must always be installed on it.
Rear connection
3VT9 500-8CD30 insulating cover or 3VT9 500-8CE30 insulating
barriers must always be installed on circuit breaker/switch-disconnector.
We recommend installing 3VT9 500-8CG30 insulating grommets
with all sets for rear connection.
terminals 2, 4, 6 (lower side)
If circuit breaker/switch-disconnector is connected on lower side
using clamp or block type terminals, 3VT9 500-8CD30 insulating
barriers must always be installed on it.
We recommend installing 3VT9 500-8CG30 insulating grommets
with all sets for sets rear connection.
6/12
Withdrawable design
Front connection
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design
Drilling positions

142.5
134.5
70
3VT4
3VT5
35.5
200
70
4 x M8
4x9
50
16
134.5
157
35.5
50
+1
25 0
Fixed design, rear connection

(connecting sets 3VT9 500-4RC30, 3VT9 400-4RC30)
84.5
Openings for insulation grommets
142.5
200
444
356
436
ON
R4
BL1000S 8
BL1600S 16
60
70
510
60
NSO0_00398
OFF
50
70
70
25 0
+1
70
7
12.5
4 x 10.5
NSO0_00397
210
18
72
80
NSO0_00393
56.5
148
OFF
21
51
240
300
350
494
100
72
ON
314
7
15
148
82
6/13
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, clamp type terminals (connecting stes 3VT9 524-4TG30) - not for 3VT4 710-3AA30-0AA0 switching unit
134.5
750
350
ON
627
200
250
3
138.5
NSO0_00512
OFF
23
133
80
Fixed design, clamp type terminals (connecting stes 3VT9 524-4TG30 and 3VT9 524-4TF30)
- not for 3VT4 710-3AA30-0AA0 switching unit
134.5
750
350
ON
627
200
250
3
138.5
NSO0_00401
OFF
136
80
6/14
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, block type terminals (3VT9 532-4TF30)
134.5
52.5
205
35.5
750
350
582
ON
200
NSO0_00403
OFF
116
TEST
65
75.5
26

134.5
52.5 32
205
200
750
350
ON
626
NSO0_00405
35.5
OFF
138
TEST
65
26
26
107.5
6/15
Siemens AG 2007

134.5
52.5 32
205
35.5
750
350
626
ON
200
NSO0_00407
OFF
138
TEST
65
26
26
107.5
Fixed design, front hand drive
Hand drive lever-lockable

(3VT9 500-3HE10, 3VT9 500-3HF10)
28
NSO0_00409
46
60
148
R1
40
72
12
72
1 3VT9 500-3HA10
196
6/16
50
2 3VT9 500-3H.10
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, front hand drive, adjustable lever
Switchgear door modification
46
1 3VT4/3VT5
NSO0_00412
2 3VT9 500-3HA10
3 3VT9 500-3HJ10
4 3VT9 500-3HG.0
2
4
min. 200
28
5 3VT9 500-3H.10
40
4 x 5.4
90
3
28
28
28
6 Switch door
Hinge of
switchgear door
50
19.5
6
198
min. 267
max. 500
90
Cabinet door modification
Mechanical interlocking 3VT9 300-8LA00
28
min. 200
260
314
2 x 40
4x9
70
190
28
8 x 5.4
Hinge of
switchgear door
28
NSO0_00415
50
28
70
6/17
Siemens AG 2007

Fixed design, motor drive 3VT9 500-3M..0
Lockable using three padlocks
33
NSO0_00418
235
114
R8
134.5
73
268.5
Fixed design, signalling unit 3VT9 500-6AE00
417
ON
NSO0_00421
OFF
31
142,5
6/18
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable device
Drilling positions
248
140
35
314
4x9
70
70
18
125
75
210
NSO0_00423
100
4x9
508
350
180
max. 140
292
174
Withdrawable device, front connection (3VT9 500-4EF30 connecting sets)

70
70
4 x M8
350
33.5
72
NSO0_00427
494
33.5
50
27.5
16
6/19
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable device, rea rconnection
(3VT9 500-4RC30 connecting set)
Drilling position
125
50
140
Withdrawable device, clamp type terminals (3VT9 524-4TG30 connecting set)
350
138.5
NSO0_00433
627
250
80
6/20
100
4x9
NSO0_00430
230
max. 140
16
106.5
31
133
35
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable device, clamp type terminals (3VT9 524-4TG30 and 3VT9 524-4TF30 connecting set)
350
138.5
NSO0_00435
627
250
80
128
Withdrawable design, block type terminals (3VT9 532-4TF30)

137
45
205
28
750
350
116
582
200
NSO0_00437
65
26
68
6/21
Siemens AG 2007

137
45 32
205
28
750
350
138
626
NSO0_00439
65
26
26
100

137
45 32
205
28
750
350
138
626
NSO0_00441
65
26
26
100
6/22
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable design
Connected
292
Disconnected
340
350
180
65
295
248
75
75
174
239
45
174
284
210
NSO0_00443
OFF
508
ON
6/23
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable device,
hand drive
Connected
Disconnected
366
NSO0_00446
321
271
316
Withdrawable device,
Connected
motor drive 3VT9 500-3MQ00
33
388.5
NSO0_00449
343.5
Disconnected
282.5
6/24
327.5
33
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable Design
Technical data
Specifications 3VT9 500-4WC00
Withdrawable design of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector

Withdrawable device must be fitted with connecting sets:
2 x 3VT9 500-4EF30, for front connection or

2 x 3VT9 500-4RD30, for rear connectionn
For mounting withdrawable device to switchgear, use installation bolts 3VT9 500-4SA40, see page 6/7.
Cicuit breaker in withdrawable design has three positions:

1. inserted (connected position)
2. withdrawn (disconnected position)
Type
3VT9 500-4WL00
AC 230 V
Rated frequency fn
50/60 Hz

Ie/Ue
6 A/AC 230 V
001
0.5 ... 1 mm2
Terminal protection
(connected switch)
IP20
For wiring diagram of circuit breaker in withdrawable device with

Withdrawable device can be may be provided with up to four

switches for signalling the circuit breakers switched-on
position, see table.
remote signalling of circuit breakers switched-on position
(position of locking is not signalled)
checking position
locking of withdrawable device against inserting circuit breaker,
locking of circuit breaker in withdrawn (checking)
position - locking by means of padlocks
Power circuit
To connect busbars and cable lugs, use connection set
3VT9 500-4EF30 (front connection) or 3VT9 500-4RD30 (rear
connection).
For connection using cables, it is necessary in addition to a
connection set 3VT9 500-4EF30 or 3VT9 500-4RD30 to use
connection sets shown on page H6.
The way of connecting the power circuit must observe recommendations (see page 6/11) as well as deionization space
(see page 6/13).

3. removed
Auxiliary circuits
Circuit breaker in withdrawable design has same

accessories as fixed circuit breaker.
State of switch
1
2
1
4
Switched on (locked or not locked)
Other positions
6/25
Siemens AG 2007

Withdrawable Design
Recommended wiring of circuit breaker
in plug-in design with motor drive
Control circuit
Q3
L+
ON
OFF
Switches
Motor drive
X3 5 7
10
5 7
NO
4.43
4.31
4.21
NSO0_00452
4.44
4.32
MP
cav. no. 4
X3
Description
motor
storage device
X3
X4
SSI
switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL (NC-C)

modes
ON
make push button
OFF
break push button
Q3

AC 110 V LSN 4C/1
AC 230 V LSN 2C/1

instructions
successfully turn on at the first attempt
SSI
4.22
4.14
NC
3VT9 500-2AF10 4.13
relative
Symbol
MP
N-
Changes in states of switches in cavities of switching unit when inserting and withdrawing circuit breaker
State of switches after insertation
inserted position
Circuit breaker state before withdrawal
State of switches before withdrawalo

inserted position
State of switches after withdrawal

withdrawn position
accessory compartment
accessory compartment
1,2
1,2
3VT9 500-2AF10
3,4
3VT9 500-2AF10
3VT9 500-2AF10
3,4
3VT9 500-2AF10
State of the
main contacts
State after insertation/withdrawal
State of switches before insertationo

-withdrawn position
Lever position of
circuit breaker
State before insertation/withdrawal

Circuit breaker state before insertation
Switched on
Switched off manually or by motor drive
Switched off from the switched-on state: by

the release or TEST button
6/26
Siemens AG 2007

Technical data
ETU MP
Ii
They have more kinds of characteristics with adjustable Ir, tr

and Irm.
ETU UP
They have universal characteristic, with the greatest variability in adjustment: Ir, tr, Irmv, tv and Irm.
ETU DP, MP and UP
overloading. Setting of selective cascading of circuit breakers
is especially enabled by the ETU UP release. Tripping

characteristic of the releases is independent of the ambient
temperature. The release is affixed to the switching unit by
two bolts. The translucent cover over the adjustment controls
can be sealed.
Tripping characteristic adjustment for release ETU DP and MP
Tripping characteristic of overcurrent releases is defined by
standard EN 947-2. The characteristic is adjusted in two zones
using latched switches on the overcurrent release unit:

protection.
I- is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against
ultimate short-circuit currents.
ETU DP
1.Independent release (thermal) L

The dependent release ETU MP is adjusted using two switches, Ir and tr. The first of these, the Ir switch, is used to ad-
just the circuit breakers rated current. The characteristic

moves on the current axis. By turning the other switch (tr),
the time is adjusted after which the circuit breaker will trip
while passing through 7.2 Ir. The tripping characteristic
thus moves on the time axis. Using the tr switch, it is
possible to set a total of 8 characteristics. Four characteristics are available for motors protection. Breaking times
correspond with the release class 10 A, 10, 20, 30. By
changing tr it is possible to select the characteristic according to the required motor starting (light, medium, heavy or
very heavy starting). For protecting transformers and lines,
4 characteristics can be set. It is not possible to turn the
device back on right after the dependent release has been
actuated and circuit breaker tripped. The release must be
allowed to cool off, because it has a thermal memory.
The memory can be disabled by turning the restart switch
from the normal Tt position to the T0 position. The dependent release remains active, and only its thermal memory is
inactivated. Switching off the thermal memory should be used
only in well-justified cases, and with the knowledge that there
could be rising temperature in the protected device with repeated tripping.
The dependent release ETU DP is adjusted using one switch Ir.
Using the Ir switch, the circuit breakers rated current is

adjusted, with the characteristic moving on the current
axis. By means of its internal circuitry, the release is set to
one type of characteristic, TV3.

The independent instantaneous release in designs ETU DP and
MP is adjusted using one Irm switch. The Irm switch is used for
setting up the short-circuit current that, upon its being reached
or exceeded, causes instantaneous tripping of the circuit breaker. Regulation of the short-circuit release takes in settings for
the characteristic appropriate for protecting lines and motors.
The wave form of the tripping characteristics is adjusted using
latched switches on the releases front panel according to the
needs of the protected device. A visual demonstration on setting
the tripping characteristic can be found in the SIMARIS design.
NSO0_00454
ETU DP
ETU MP
Ir
tr

Ir
NSO0_00506
Ii
6/27

interchangeable unit, which is supplied with the 3VT5 7163AA3.-0AA0 switching unit. By exchanging the overcurrent release, the range of the circuit breakers rated current can be easily changed.
Releases for the 3VT5 716-3AA3.-0AA0 switching unit are produced in four current ranges In = 630, 1000, 1250 and 1600 A.
Including their adjustment, the releases cover rated currents
ranging from 250 to 1600 A.
Siemens AG 2007

Tripping characteristics of ETU DP and MP releases with load

For all kinds of characteristics tr the thermal stanstill time for ETU
DPand MP releases is tu t30 min.
During this time, the short-circuit tripping time tv is cut short from
the cold-state characteristic by the coefficient k.
k [-]
NSO0_00455
releases are independent of the ambient temperature and

are plotted in a cold state. Digital releases enable simulation
of a release in warm state. The tripping times become shorter
in a steady state, as shown in the following graph. The steady
state is a period during which the characteristic does not
change. If the circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced
current for at least 30 minutes, the tripping times will be cut
by a half. If the load is less than 70% of Ir , the tripping time
does not become shorter.
1.0
0.2
80
90
100
I r [%]
Tripping time shortening ETU DP, MP with load

by coefficent k.
6/28

= min
Restart = T(t)
Irm = min
tr = TV, min
0.4
70

to:
ts = 0.74 . tv
0.6
60
Example
Ir
0.8
0.0
50
Siemens AG 2007

Tripping characteristic adjustment, trip unit ETU UP
L
t
currents more than 10 x current Ir. Tripping times of k-multiples

of Ir for k < 10 are defined as follows:
Ir
10 2
t = t v ------
k
tr
3. Independent instantaneous release I

Isd
I 2 t ON
tsd
NSO0_00456
Ii
I 2 t OFF
The independent instantaneous release has the function of a

short-circuit release. It is set up only on parameter Ii. Ii is shortcircuit current that, upon its being reached or exceeded, causes
the circuit breaker instantaneously to switch off. It is set up directly in kA on the release. The wave form of the tripping characteristic is adjusted using latched switches on the releases front
panel according to the needs of the protected device. A visual
demonstration on setting the tripping characteristic can be
found in the SIMARIS design.
The tripping characteristic of overcurrent releases is definied

by standard EN 60 947-2. The characteristic is adjusted in three
zones using latched switches on the overcurrent release unit:
protection.
S - is a zone of medium overcurrents and includes long-distance
these low short-circuit currents can be used to achieve selectivity of protective devices. This type of delay can be set only in
self-contained releases (full version).
I - is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against
ultimate short-circuit currents without time delay.
I2t - Characteristic setting in ON position represents a constant

value of energy passed through. If fuses are used as protective
elements for outgoing branch feeders, it is possible to adjust the
selective part of the characteristics to better suit the shape of the
fuse characteristics.
1. Indipendent release (thermal) L
The dependent release ETU UP is adjusted using two switches,
Ir and tr. Using the first switch, Ir, the circuit breakers rated current is adjusted. The characteristic is moved on the current axis.
Turning the second switch, tr, adjusts the time after which the circuit breaker will trip while passing through 7.2 Ir. The tripping
characteristic thus moves on the time axis. Using the tr switch, a
total of 8 characteristics can be set. Breaking times correspond
with the release class 10 A, 10, 20, 30. It is not possible to turn
the device back on right after the dependent release has been
actuated and circuit breaker tripped. The release must be allowed to cool off, because it has a thermal memory.
The memory can be disabled by turning the restart switch from
the normal Tt position to the T0 position. The dependent release remains active, and only its thermal memory is inactivated.
Switching off the thermal memory should be used only in welljustified cases, and with the knowledge that there could be rising
temperature in the protected device with repeated tripping.
The delayed independent release has the function of a delayed
circuit breakers. It is set up using specifications Isd and tsd.
Isd is an n-multiple of current Ir (Isd = n Ir). It is a short-circuit
current that, within the span of Isd to Ii, will trip the circuit breaker
with delay tsd, where tsd is a delay set up for switching off the
release.
The delayed independent release actuates the circuit breaker if
the current in the circuit reaches at least the preset n-multiple
and lasts at least the preset delay time tsd. The independent
release can be disabled by setting the parameter
n (Isd = n Ir) into the fposition. Parameter tsd can be set to
values with respect to the energy that passed through l2t (switch
position l2t on). The preset time values are then applicable for
6/29
Siemens AG 2007

Tripping characteristics of ETU UP release with load
Example

is a period during which the characteristic does not change.
If the circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced current for at least
less than 70% of Ir, the tripping time does not become shorter.

to:
k [-]
NSO0_00455
1.0
0.8
0.6
T
0.4
0.2
0.0
50
60
70
80
90
100
I r [%]

by coefficient k.
T standstill time of the characteristics
For all kinds of characteristics tr the thermal standstill period for
ETU UP releases is tu t 30 min. During this time, the short-circuit
tripping time tv is cut short from the cold-state characteristic by
the coefficient k.
6/30
ts = 0.74 . tv
k [-] time shortening coefficient
Ir [A] adjusted rated current release
= min
Restart = T(t)
Ii = min
tr = min
tsd = min, I2t - ON
Isd = min
Ir
Siemens AG 2007

The 3VT9 5..-6AC00 release is intended for 3VT5 716-3AA3.0AA0 switching unit. The operation of the release is controlled by
a microprocessor. The release is outfitted with a thermal memory
that can be disabled by turning a switch on the front panel from
position T(t) to position T(0). After disabling the thermal memory,
the thermal release remains active.
Order No.
Instantaneous
short circuit
protection I
kA
250, 260
0.8
275, 290
1.5
305, 315
3VT9 563-6AC00 630
Another advantage of this release is the simple adjustment of the

tripping characteristic. Set-up includes only rated current and
the tripping level of the short-circuit release. The reaching of
80% and 110% of Ir is indicated by LED diodes on the front panel
denoted as I > 80% of Ir and I > 110% of Ir. On the lower part of
the release cover are photocells for communicating with the
3VT9 500-6AE00 signalling unit.
NSO0_00458
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
min.
Ir
max.
Ir
T(0)
2.5
400, 435
T(t)
4.5
455, 480
500, 550
7.5
575, 630
10
400, 435
1.25
455, 480
500, 550
3VT9 510-6AC00 1000
345, 360
Ii
1000
500
575, 630
T(0)
630, 685
T(t)
720, 760
800, 870
12
910, 1000
15
500, 550
1.5
577, 610
630, 685
200
3VT9 512-6AC00 1250
100
50
722, 760
T(0)
800, 866
T(t)
909, 1000
12
20
1100, 1155,
15
10
5
1200, 1250
18
630, 685
720, 800
2
1
0.5
In = 630 A
In=630A
In=1000A
In = 1000 A
In = 1250 A
In=1250A
In = 1600 A
In=1600A
870, 910
3VT9 516-6AC00 1600
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.8
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
In = 630 A
0.02
In = 1000 A
1.25
2.0
1.5
3.0
3.0
2.0
4.0
1155, 1200
T(t)
11
1250, 1300
14
1375, 1445
17
1500, 1600
20
5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15
5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 18
6.0 8.0 11 14 17
20
I i [kA]
In = 1600 A
0.5
T(0)
I i [kA]
In = 1250 A
0.2
4.5 6.0 7.5 10
1000, 1100
I i [kA]
0.01
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
1.5 2.0 2.5
I i [kA]
0.01
0.1
0.05
0.02

Rated current Overload

Restart
In
protection Ir
10
50
20
x In
6/31
Siemens AG 2007

The 3VT9 5..-6AP00 release is intended only for 3VT5716-3AA3.0AA0 switching unit. The operation of the release is
controlled by a microprocessor. The release is equipped with
a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning a switch on
the front panel from position T(t) to position T(0). After disabling
of the thermal memory, the thermal release remains active.
Order No.
Rated Overload
tt (7.2 x Ir)
current protection Ir
In
A
kA
250, 260
1 (TV 1)
0.8
275, 290
3 (TV 3)
1.5
305, 315
10 (TV 10)
345, 360
30 (TV 30)
T(0)
2.5
400, 435
3 (M 3)
T(t)
4.5
A of 8 characteristics can be set on the release. From these, in

mode M there are 4 characteristics for motors protection and
another 4 characteristics in mode TV for protecting transformers and lines. The shape of each characteristic can be
changed using a selector switch.
455, 480
8 (M 8)
500, 550
15 (M 15)
7.5
575, 630
25 (M 25)
10
400, 435
1 (TV 1)
1.25
455, 480
3 (TV 3)
When one or two phases fail, in the M-characteristic mode, the

switch will open with a 4 s delay (so-called undercurrent
release).
500, 550
10 (TV 10)
575, 630
30 (TV 30)
T(0)
630, 685
3 (M 3)
T(t)
720, 760
8 (M 8)
800, 870
15 (M 15)
12
910, 1000
25 (M 25)
15
500, 550
1 (TV 1)
1.5
577, 610
3 (TV 3)
630, 685
10 (TV 10)
722, 760
30 (TV 30)
T(0)
800, 866
3 (M 3)
T(t)
909, 1000
8 (M 8)
A partical advantage of the release is a specially designed

Another parameter for adjusting the release is rated current,

which is adjusted in a range of 0.4 to 1.0 of In and the shortcircuit tripping level. The reaching of 80% and 110% of Ir is
indicated by LED diodes on the front panel denoted as I > 80%
of Ir and I > 110% of Ir. On the lower part of the release cover are
four photocells for communicating with the 3VT9 500-6AE00
signalling unit.
Restart Instantaneous short

3VT9 563-6AP00 630
3VT9 510-6AP00 1000
3VT9 512-6AP00 1250
3VT9 516-6AP00 1600
6/32
12
1100, 1155, 15 (M 15)
15
1200, 1250
25 (M 25)
18
630, 685
1 (TV 1)
720, 800
3 (TV 3)
870, 910
10 (TV 10)
1000, 1100
30 (TV 30)
T(0)
1155, 1200
3 (M 3)
T(t)
11
1250, 1300
8 (M 8)
14
1375, 1445
15 (M 15)
17
1500, 1600
25 (M 25)
20
Siemens AG 2007

Tripping characteristic ETU MP
NSO0_00459
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
min.
Ir
TV
max.
tr
Ir
Ii
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
500
1000
500
200
200
tr
100
50
min.
NSO0_00460
max.
tr
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
25
20
In =
In =
In =
In =
630 A
1000 A
1250 A
1600 A
10
10
10
5
2
1
0.5
In = 630 A
0.8
In = 1000 A
1.25
In = 1250 A
1.5
In = 1600 A
2.0
0.2
0.5
4.5 6.0 7.5 10
I i [kA]
5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15
I i [kA]
1.5 2.0 2.5
2.0
3.0
3.0
4.0
5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15
18
I i [kA]
17
6.0 8.0 11 14 20
10
I i [kA]
50
20
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
In =
In =
In =
In =
15
15
630 A
1000 A
1250 A
1600 A
In = 630 A
0.8
In = 1000 A
1.25
In = 1250 A
1.5
3.0
5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15
In = 1600 A
2.0
4.0
17
6.0 8.0 11 14 20
0.2
0.5
1.5 2.0 2.5
2.0
3.0
I i [kA]
4.5 6.0 7.5 10
5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15
I i [kA]
18
I i [kA]
10
I i [kA]
50
20
x In
x In
10
5
Ii
25
30
20
tr
Ir
100
50
30
Ir
6/33
Siemens AG 2007

Overcurrent releases ETU UP-Universal
Protecting complicated loads or those not specified in advance
The release 3VT9 5..-6AD00 is intended only for switching unit
3VT5 716-3AA3.-0AA0. The release is equipped with a thermal
memory that can be disabled by turning a restart switch on the
front panel from the position T(t) to position T(0). After disabling
the thermal memory, the thermal release remains active.
The reaching of 80% and 110% of Ir is indicated by LED diodes

on the front panel denoted as I > 80% of Ir and I > 110% of Ir.
On the lower part of the release cover are photocells for communicating with the 3VT9 500-6AE00 signalling unit.
practical advantage of the release is its maximum flexibility for

adjusting the tripping characteristic. With its possibility for
setting I2t = constant and I5t = constant, it is optimal from the
selectivity viewpoint for its interaction with fusing devices.
Order No.
Rated
Overload
tr (7.2 x Ir) short delayed
current In protection Ir
short circuit
protection
Isd A = (n x Ir)
tsd
3VT9 563-6AD00 630
3VT9 510-6AD00 1000
3VT9 512-6AD00 1250
3VT9 516-6AD00 1600
6/34
I2t
Restar Instantaneous
t
short circuit
protection I
ms
250, 260
0.5
50, 100
275, 290
200, 300
305, 315
400, 600
345, 360
800, 1000
2.5
400, 435
10
50, 100
455, 480
15
200, 300
500, 550
20
10
400, 600
7.5
575, 630
25
800, 1000
10
400, 435
0.5
50, 100
455, 480
200, 300
500, 550
400, 600
575, 630
800, 1000
630, 685
10
50, 100
720, 760
15
200, 300
800, 870
20
10
400, 600
12
910, 1000
25
800, 1000
15
500, 550
0.5
50,1 00
577, 610
200, 300
630, 685
400, 600
722, 760
800, 1000
800, 866
10
50, 100
909, 1000
15
200, 300
1100, 1155, 20
10
400, 600
15
1200, 1250
25
800, 1000
18
630, 685
0.5
50, 100
720, 800
200, 300
870, 910
400, 600
1000, 1100
800, 1000
1155, 1200
10
50, 100
1250, 1300
15
200, 300
1375, 1445
20
10
400, 600
17
1500, 1600
25
800, 1000
20
kA
0.8
on
T(0)
1.5
4.5
off
T(t)
1.25
on
T(0)
7
off
T(t)
1.5
on
T(0)
9
off
T(t)
12
2
on
T(0)
11
off
T(t)
14
Siemens AG 2007

NSO0_00461
min.
Ir
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
tv
Ii
In =
In =
In =
In =
20
tr [s]
0.5
I
1.5 2.0 2.5
0.8
I i [kA]
In = 630 A
1.25
2.0
3.0
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15
50
I i [kA]
In = 1000 A
3.0
1.5
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 18
50
I i [kA]
In = 1250 A
4.0
2.0
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
6.0 8.0 11 141720
50
I i [kA]
In = 1600 A
0.5
In =
In =
In =
In =
10
50
20
0.02
0.01
0.1
Isd
tv
Ii
630 A
1000 A
1250 A
1600 A
S
1000
0.5
tv [ms]
(I 2 t = ON)
tr [s]
0.5
I
1.5 2.0 2.5
0.8
0.1
0.05
50
tr
0.2
4.5 6.0 7.5 10
max.
Ir
2
1
0.5
1000
0.5
Ir
200
10
5
tv [ms]
(I 2 t = OFF)
0.2
min.
100
50
630 A
1000 A
1250 A
1600 A
S
NSO0_00462
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
500
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
Isd
200
100
50
20
tr
Ir
1000
500
10
5
max.
4.5 6.0 7.5 10

50
I i [kA]
In = 630 A
1.25
2.0
3.0
5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15

50
I i [kA]
In = 1000 A
3.0
1.5
5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 18

50
I i [kA]
In = 1250 A
4.0
2.0
6.0 8.0 11 141720

50
I i [kA]
In = 1600 A
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
0.2
0.5
10
50
20
x In
x In
6/35
Siemens AG 2007

NSO0_00463
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
min.
In =
In =
In =
In =
25
0.02
0.01
0.1
20
tv [ms]
(I 2 t = OFF)
I
1.5 2.0 2.5
I i [kA]
In = 630 A
1.25
2.0
3.0
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15
50
I i [kA]
In = 1000 A
3.0
1.5
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 18
50
I i [kA]
In = 1250 A
4.0
2.0
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
6.0 8.0 11 141720
50
I i [kA]
In = 1600 A
0.5
10
50
20
0.02
0.01
0.1
Ii
In =
In =
In =
In =
25
25
630 A
1000 A
1250 A
1600 A
tr [s]
3
S
1000
tv [ms]
(I 2 t = ON)
I
1.5 2.0 2.5
0.8
0.1
0.05
50
tv
Isd
0.2
4.5 6.0 7.5 10
tr
Ir
2
1
0.5
1000
0.8
max.
x In
6/36
10
5
Ir
200
25
0.2
min.
1000
500
tr [s]
0.1
0.05
NSO0_00464
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
100
50
630 A
1000 A
1250 A
1600 A
0.2
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
Ii
2
1
0.5
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
tv
Isd
100
50
0.02
0.01
0.1
0.05
tr
Ir
200
10
5
max.
1000
500
20
Ir
4.5 6.0 7.5 10

50
I i [kA]
In = 630 A
1.25
2.0
3.0
5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15

50
I i [kA]
In = 1000 A
3.0
1.5
5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 18

50
I i [kA]
In = 1250 A
4.0
2.0
6.0 8.0 11 141720

50
I i [kA]
In = 1600 A
0.2
0.5
10
50
20
x In
Siemens AG 2007

Signalling units
Technical data
Remote indication on the state of the circuit breaker and the
protected circuitry is ensured by a relay, the make and break
contacts of which are pulled into the terminal strip on the unit
- relays to indicate tripping of dependent or undercurrent and
independent releases have storage
- after the storage relay is activated by tripping of a release,
it is necessary to reset the relay using the front panel RESET
switch or by an external push button remotely.
The supply voltages are presented in the table
The main power supply and the reset circuit are not concurrently conformable with conditions for safe separation of the
circuits
The external RESET button must be connected using a screened cable or a twisted wire with maximum resistance of the
loop 100 Ohm.
The 3VT9 5006AE00 signalling unit is a modular accessory for

the 3VT4 and 3VT5 circuit breakers and collaborates with the
electronic releases 3VT9 5..-6AC00, 3VT9 5..-6AP00 and
3VT9 5..-6AD00.
It is intended for applications in automated-control systems
The unit signals reaching a certain current value in a circuit
and the tripping of the circuit breaker by releases (dependent,
independent, undercurrent)
- user has a options to set up (by steps, using a rotary switch)
an amount of current he wishes to indicate if it has been reached
- the options are 70; 80; 90; 100; 120; 140; 160 or 180% Ir
(refer to the Table below for more details).
Local indication regarding the state of the circuit breaker and
the protected circuitry is carried out by LED indicators on the
front panel of the unit
The information on the state of the circuit breaker is transferred
from the release to the signalling unit by means of optical coupling
The signalling unit will not work without power supply!
Specifications
Order No.
3VT9 500-6AE00
AC/DC 12 ... 230 V
Protection (tube fuse)
T1.5 A
Rated frequency fn
50/60 Hz
Current draw (rms) max. at Ue

AC-15
DC-13

(of relay contacts) Ie/Ue
AC/DC 12 V
AC/DC 24 V
AC/DC 48 V
AC/DC 110 V
AC 230 V/DC 220 V
370 mA
170 mA
100 mA
60 mA
50 mA
AC-1
DC-1
8 A/AC 230 V
0.25 A DC 250 V, 8 A/DC 30 V
0.5 ... 1 mm2
Power circuit status indication

Signalling
Reaching
Release tripping
(relay contacts)
LED
70% Ir
--
110% Ir
70; 80; 90; 100; 120; 140; 160; 180
--
Settings
By dependent/undercurrent
+/+
Independent
I > 110 % Ir
12 - 230 V
1, 2
6, 7
9, 10, 11
12, 13, 14
15, 16, 17
18, 19, 20
I > Isd I > Ir
M
3~ 3 < m
Power
RESET
I > % Ir
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20
NSO0_00465
AC/DC
supply
external RESET button
relay contacts indicating preset Ir
relay contacts indicating reaching 110% Ir
relay contacts indicating tripping by dependent or
undercurrent releases
relay contacts indicating tripping by independent
release (instantaneous or delayed ones)
6/37
Siemens AG 2007

Auxiliary switches
Technical data
Specifications
3VT9 500-2AF00
3VT9 500-2AF101)
AC 60 ...500 V
DC 60 ...240 V
AC 5 ...60 V
DC 5 ...60 V
500
Rated frequency fn
Hz
50/60
Order No.

AC-15
DC-13
6 A/60 V ... 240 V, 3 A/400 V,

1.5 A/500 V
1 A/60 V, 0.7 A/110 V, 0.3 A/240 V
A
Thermal current Ith

0.5 A
22
mm2 0.5 ... 1

IP20
Terminal protection
(connected switch)
1)
6A
PS-BL-....-Au is not suitable to control electromagnetic loads
Arrangement of contacts Number of contacts Contact types

2+2
22
break + make

cavities
Switch location
Switch name
accessory
compartment 1, 2
Auxiliary switch to indicate the position of the main

contacts
Switch function
accessory
compartment 3, 4
Relative switch
to indicate tripping of circuit breaker

by release, TEST push button or by
motor
Wiring diagramm
Switches
4.43
4.44
cavity no. 4
NSO0_00466
4.31
3VT9 500-2AF10 4.13
4.14
4.21
3.43
4.32
3.31
3.44
cavity no. 3
4.22
3.21
3VT9 500-2AF10 3.13
3.14
3.32
2.43
cavity no. 2
relative
3.22
2.31
2.44
3VT9 500-2AF10 2.13
2.14
2.21
1.43
1.44
6/38
2.32
1.31
cavity no. 1
relative
2.22
1.21
1.32
3VT9 500-2AF10 1.13
1.14
auxiliary
1.22
auxiliary
Siemens AG 2007

Shunt trip units
Technical data
Specifications
Order No.
3VT9 500-1S.00
AC 24, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500

DC 24, 48, 110, 220
Rated frequency fn
Hz
50/60

AC
DC
< 2.5 VA
<2W
U t 0,7Ue the circuit breaker must
trip
Characteristic
Time to switch-off
ms
Loading time
20
f
mm2
0.5 ... 1
Terminal protection
(connected releases)
IP20
Location in accessory compartment No.
NSO0_00470

Main contacts
1.44
1.14
2.14
2.44
1.43
1.13
2.13
2.43
1
0
1.32
1.22
2.22
2.32
1.31
1.21
2.21
2.31
1
0
3.44
3.14
4.14
4.44
3.43
3.13
4.13
4.43
1
0
3.32
3.22
4.22
4.32
3.31
3.21
4.21
4.31
1
0
20
Auxiliary switch
30
Auxiliary switch
30
Relative switch
30
Relative switch
30
1
0
accessory
compartment
1+2
1
3
5
accessory
compartment
3+4
2
4
6
t [ms]

Switched on
the motor drive
by drive
NSO0_00467
B2
3VT9 500-1S.00
B1
L+
N-
6/39
Siemens AG 2007

Technical data
Order No.
3VT9 500-1U.00
Rated operating
voltage Ue
Rated frequency fn
Hz
AC 24, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500

DC 24, 48, 110, 220
Switched on
50/60
< 2.5 VA
<2W
Characteristic
U t 0.85 Ue,
circuit breaker is possible switch on
U t 0.35 Ue,
the circuit breaker must trip
ms
Loading time

by drive
20
f
mm2 0.5 ... 1 )
Connection
cross-section S
Terminal protection
(connected releases)
IP20
compartment No.
1)

the motor drive
3VT9 000-1UX00, for more detailed information, see page P.
NSO0_00470

Main contacts
1.44
1.14
2.14
2.44
1.43
1.13
2.13
2.43
1
0
1.32
1.22
2.22
2.32
1.31
1.21
2.21
2.31
1
0
3.44
3.14
4.14
4.44
3.43
3.13
4.13
4.43
1
0
3.32
3.22
4.22
4.32
3.31
3.21
4.21
4.31
1
0
20
Auxiliary switch
30
Auxiliary switch
30
Relative switch
30
Relative switch
30
t [ms]
NSO0_00471
U<
3VT9 500-1U.00
A1
L+
N-
6/40
accessory
compartment
1+2
1
0
accessory
compartment
3+4
1
3
5
A2
2
4
6
Siemens AG 2007

Technical data
The hand drive is the facility of the circuit breaker which enables
circuit breakers 3VT4 to 3VT5 to be controlled locally by applying rotary movement on the lever, e.g. for switching electrical
equipment on and off. Modular design of the drives enables
easy installation on the circuit breaker after removing the cavity
cover from the circuit breaker. The drive and its accessories is
ordered separately according to your choice, see page 6/5.
The hand drive enables to control the circuit breaker through
the front panel or through the switchgear door, the outlet for
the operating shaft is protected as has the protection code for
bearings, IP44 or IP66.
Hand drive operating lever can be furnished with an extension
shaft which makes possible to control the circuit breaker also
in deeper switchgears.
In order to enhance safety for the operator of the electrical

equipment, the mechanism of the drive is furnished with
locking system preventing the switchgear door from opening
when the circuit breaker is in closed position.
When the circuit breaker in position manual open, the drive
handle can be locked up using the built-in cylinder type lock
(FAB) and as many as three padlocks with shank diameter up
to 4 ... 7 mm.
When the drive lever is in position manual open, it is possible
to remove the handle.
The circuit breakers with hand drives can be provided with
mechanical interlocking system, see page 6/44.
Specifications
Switchgear door locking in
the circuit breaker state
Description
Colour
Locking while the circuit

breaker is in OFF state
Protection
switched on or off by release Length mm
3VT9 500-3HA10
Hand drive unit
--
yes
--
--
--
3VT9 500-3HE10
Hand drive lever
black
yes
--
--
--
3VT9 500-3HF10
Hand drive lever
red
yes
--
--
--
3VT9 500-3HG10
Hand drive bearing
--
--
IP44
yes
--
3VT9 500-3HG20
Hand drive bearing
--
--
IP66
yes
--
3VT9 500-3HJ10
Extension shaft
--
--
--
--
365
Type
6/41
Siemens AG 2007

Technical data
It provides interlocking of two circuit breakers so that they cannot be on-state simultaneously, but always only one of them.
It is possible to use the locking device between two circuit breakers 3VT4 or 3VT5 or between circuit breakers 3VT4 and
3VT5. Both circuit breakers must be furnished with a hand
drive (at least with the hand drive unit and hand drive lever),
see page 6/6. In order to use locking, it is necessary to adhere
to the dimensions.
NSO0_00472
314
NSO0_00473
4x9
70
190
70
3VT9 500-8LC10 Mechanical interlocking by Bowden

Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers so
that they cannot both be tripped simultaneously, but only one
of them at a time.
Interlocking can be used between two 3VT4 or 3VT5 circuit
breakers or between a 3VT4 and a 3VT5 circuit breaker. For interlocking, circuit breakers can be outfitted with a hand or motor drive. To use interlocking, it is absolutely necessary to comply with the dimensions that are shown on pg. 6/45.
Type of mechanical interlocking
Combination of circuit breaker/switchdisconnector designs
3VT9 500-8LC10
fixed-fixed
3VT9 500-8LC30
fixed-withdrawable
3VT9 500-8LC40
withdrawable-withdrawable
Mechanical interlocking by bowden between fixed and withdrawable

3VT5 circuit breakers
Option for locating circuit breakers/switch disconnectors
= 75
2.3
OK
in
m
72.5
75
125.9
R min
140
130
47
ON
ON
31
OFF
OFF
NSO0_00474
50
0 or 350 ... 1400
6/42
Siemens AG 2007

Technical data
Specifications
Type
3VT9 500-3M...0
AC 110, 230
DC 110, 220
Rated frequency fn
Hz
50/60
Control pulse length for switching on ms
! 20 ... 1500 f
Control pulse length for switching off ms
! 20 ... f1)
Time toswitching on
ms
< 70
AC 230 V
14
DC 220 V
18
Time to the accumulating of

motor drive under voltage Ue
Time to switch-off Ue
AC 230 V
10
12
DC 220 V
Frequency of ON/OFF cycles
cycles/ 2
min
Frequency of cycles - immediatly one cycles

after another ON/OFF
cycles
10000
AC
VA
200
DC
200
Input power
Protection
AC 110 V; AC 230 V
LSN 4C/1; LSN 2C/1
DC 110 V; DC 220 V
Rated operating current of the switch V

selector AUTO / MANUAL Ie/Ue
6 A/AC 250
1)
for sequence of control pulses, see page 6/44.
The motor drive is part of circuit breaker accessories enabling

you to switch the circuit breaker on and off remotely. Modular design of the drives enables easy installation on the circuit breaker
after removing the cavity cover from the circuit breaker. 3VT circuit breakers with motor drives can be used in the most demanding industrial applications such as protection of standby sources, synchronization of two sources, etc. and anywhere it is
necessary to ensure automated and unmanned operation of
electrical equipment. As the motor drives are equipped with
spring storage to accumulate energy necessary for activation, it
is possible to turn on the circuit breaker in times up to 70 ms. Releasing of the storage device and turning on the circuit breaker
is ensured by a closing coil included in standard equipment of
every motor drive. The time before the circuit breaker breaks
contact on account of a motor drive is approx. 10 s. This tripping
method is applicable for controlling technological entities. When
button), it is possible to use the motor drive combined with undervoltage release or shunt trip.
On the motorized operating mechanism front panel there is a
switch selector to select drive modes with a possibility to indicate remotely the state of this switch. The first mode is automatic remote control (position AUTO). This is the standard position in automatic operation. The other mode is manual
control (selector position MANUAL), the motorized operating
mechanism does not need any voltage to perform its operation.
When the selector is in position AUTO, it is possible to switch
on and off remotely with the push buttons that must be wired
to the connector on the drive. When the drive is in MANUAL
mode, the circuit breaker can be switched on using the green
button on the front part of the drive cover and to switch it off
with the red TEST button on the overcurrent release unit. The
function of the remote control ON button in MANUAL MODE is
locked up, whereas the function of the remote control OFF button remains active for safety reasons.
The motor drive makes it simple to control the circuit breaker
when there is a loss of control voltage. In MANUAL mode, it is
possible to wind up the spring storage assembly by repeated
rotation of the foldable handle. After the storage is wound up,
the circuit breaker can be turned on using the green button on
the front part of the insulation cover of the drive and it can be
turned off using the red TEST button on the overcurrent release.
The motorized operating mechanism, unlike the circuit breaker, recognizes only two fixed positions. In position one, the
circuit breaker is in on-state. If the circuit breaker in AUTO
mode is put in off-state by some overcurrent releases, auxiliary
trip devices or from a distance, the 3VT9 500-2AF10 switch
(included in motorized operating mechanism delivery) will generate a pulse to load the spring storage mechanism automatically as a result of electrical linkage with the circuit breaker . If the switch is not placed in cavity 3 or 4, no automatic
loading process will take place.
In the second fixed position the circuit breaker is switched off
and the loaded drive device is ready to activate the circuit breaker after receiving the control pulse.
The presence of the control voltage in the drive is indicated by
a steadily lit green LED indicator below the drive plate. If the
indicator is not lit, the position of the circuit breaker lever need
not comply with the correct positions of the power contacts.
The drive may be furnished with an electromechanical operations counter.
The drive can be locked up in off-state position using the builtin cylinder type lock and using as many as three padlocks with
the shank diameter max. 7 mm. Before the drive is locked up,
it is necessary to turn the drive unit switch to MANUAL mode
position, to withdraw the drive unit yellow lockup strip and to
insert the padlock shank into the oval opening in the lockup
strip. When a cylinder type lock is used, the lockup strip will
run out a little.
6/43
Siemens AG 2007

Specifications
1.43
1.13
2.13
2.43
1
0
1.32
1.22
2.22
2.32
1.31
1.21
2.21
2.31
1
0
3.44
3.14
4.14
4.44
3.43
3.13
4.13
4.43
1
0
3.32
3.22
4.22
4.32
3.31
3.21
4.21
4.31
1
0
60
Auxiliary switch
60
Relative switch
Relative switch
t [ms]
Wiring diagram
NSO0_00529
Main contacts
2
4
6
1
3
5
Auxiliary switch
accessory
compartment
1+2
1.44
1.14
2.14
2.44
1
0
70
accessory
compartment
3+4
1
3
5
1
0
1.44
1.14
2.14
2.44
1.43
1.13
2.13
2.43
1
0
1.32
1.22
2.22
2.32
1.31
1.21
2.21
2.31
1
0
3.44
3.14
4.14
4.44
3.43
3.13
4.13
4.43
1
0
3.32
3.22
4.22
4.32
3.31
3.21
4.21
4.31
1
0
1300 - 2600
Auxiliary switch
accessory
compartment
1+2
Main contacts
2
4
6
Circuit breaker switched off by motorized operating mechanismelectrical by push button OFF
1300 - 2600
Auxiliary switch
1300 - 2600
Relative switch
accessory
compartment
3+4
NSO0_00528
Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanismelectrical by push button ON
Relative switch
t [ms]
Circuit breaker switch on and switched off by motor driver

- electrical by pusch button ON and pusch button OFF
Control circuit
Switched on
button
Q3
L+

drive
ON
OFF
Switches
Motor drive
X3 5 7
10
5 7
NO
N-
6/44
4.31
4.21
4.43
NSO0_00476
4.44
cav. no. 4
X3
Description
motor drive 3VT9 500-3M...0
motor
storage device
X3
connector to connect auxiliary circuits
SSI
switch indicating MANUAL(NO-C)/ AUTO(NC-C)

modes
recommended wiring of the control circuits (not included in drive order)
ON
make push button
OFF
break push button

Q3
motor drive circuit breaker-see page 6/45
4.32
MP
4.22
SSI
4.14
NC
3VT9 500-2AF10 4.13
relative
Symbol
MP
Siemens AG 2007

Specifications
NSO0_00530
Tripping of the circuit breaker with motorized operating mechanism by shunt trip or undervoltage release
Main contacts
1.44
1.14
2.14
2.44
1
0
1.43
1.13
2.13
2.43
1
0
1.32
1.22
2.22
2.32
1.31
1.21
2.21
2.31
1
0
3.44
3.14
4.14
4.44
3.43
3.13
4.13
4.43
1
0
3.32
3.22
4.22
4.32
3.31
3.21
4.21
4.31
1
0
20
Auxiliary switch
accessory
compartment
1+2
1
3
5
30
Auxiliary switch
30
Relative switch
30
accessory
compartment
3+4
2
4
6
1000
Relative switch
30
1000
t [ms]
Switched on
button
drive

Symbol
Description
MP
motor drive 3VT9 500-3M...0
motor
storage device
X3
connector to connect auxiliary circuits
SSI
switch indicating MANUAL(NO-C)/ AUTO(NC-C)

modes
recommended wiring of the control circuits (not included in drive order)
ON
make push button
OFF
break push button
Q3
motor drive circuit breaker-see page 6/45
Wiring diagram
(electrical push button ON) and switched off by shut trip

(electrical push button ON) and switched off by undervoltage
trip
Control circuit
Control circuit
Q3
Q3
L+
L+
ON
ON
OFF
Motor drive
OFF
Aux.rel.
Switches
Switches
Motor drive
Aux. releases
B1
A1
4.43
4.31
or
M
U<
cav. no. 4
U
NSO0_00478
MP
SSI
B2
X3
N-
NO
A2
NC
3VT9 500-1S.00
3VT9 500-1U.00
5 7
4.21
A1
4.43
4.31
4.21
B1
10
NSO0_00477
cav. no. 4 cav. no. 5

X3
B2
4.44
U<
A2
4.32
MP
or
SSI
4.22
4.44
NO
4.14
NC
X3 5 7
4.32
3VT9 500-2AF10 4.13
10
4.22
4.14
relative
3VT9 500-1S.00
5 7
3VT9 500-1U.00
X3 5 7
3VT9 500-2AF10 4.13
relative
cav. no. 5
NN-
N-
6/45
Siemens AG 2007

Specifications
70
10000 12000
HK
1
0
PS
1
0
10000 12000
1
0
NSO0_00479
Circuit breaker switched on/off by motorized operating mechanism

and switched on by motorized operating mechanism-S switch
permanently closed
70
HK
1
0
RS
1
0
> 10000
> 12000
8000
> 100
> 20000
20
IMP OFF
NSO0_00480
> 20000
20 1500
IMP ON
20 1500
IMP ON
1
0
t [ms]
t [ms]
R OFF

Switched on
motor drive
Symbol
Description
HK
main contacts
PS
auxiliary switch
RS
relative switch
R OFF
IMP S

switch)
IMP ON
IMP OFF

drive
7
6/46
Siemens AG 2007
Further Accessories
Catalog
7/2
Further Accessories
Delay unit, Tester
Siemens AG 2007
Further Accessories
Delay unit, Tester

Tester of overcurrent releases for 3VT circuit breakers
Service device for checking the functionality of electronic overcurrent releases and switching units for Modeion circuit breakers.
Tests:
ETU trip units
functionality of switching unit tripping mechanism
current transformers Tests overcurrent releases: ETU LP, DP, MP,
MPS and UP
Tests switching units for circuit breakers:

3VT2N, 3VT2H
3VT3N, 3VT3H
3VT4H
3VT5H
Tester must be connected to an external power supply. Power
supply voltage of tester is AC 230 V.
For detailed information and documentation, contact technical
support http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request.
Rated current In
DT Order no.
PS*
Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Delay unit
The delay may be set up at three levels (according to wiring).
3VT9 000-1UX00 delay unit is using only for the release with
Ue = AC 230 V
3VT9 000-1UX00
on req.
3VT9 000-1UX10
on req.
enables to delay the undervoltage trip unit opening of 3VT circuit

breaker
Tester of ETU trip units for circuit breakers
Tester to test ETU trip units for 3VT2, 3VT3, 3VT4 and 3VT5
7
7/2
Siemens AG 2007
Appendix
8/2
Glossary
8/3
Ordering notes
8/4
Further documentation
8/5
Standards and approvals
8/6
Siemens contacts
8/7
Online services
8/8
Customer support
8/9
Subject index
8/10
Order number index
8/12
Terms and conditions

of sale and delivery
Export regulations
Siemens AG 2007
Appendix
Glossary
Rated operating voltage, (Ue)
EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.1
Voltage fixed by the manufacturer. Several pertinent tests relate to its

determination, as may also the utilization category. Along with the
rated (operating) current, it determines the devices utilization. The
highest value of rated operating voltage may in no case be greater
than the value of the rate insulation voltage Ui.
Rated insulation voltage, (Ui)

EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.2
Voltage measure to which are related tests of dielectric strength and

creepage distance.
Rated current, (In)

EN 60947-2; 4.3.2.3
Current value of particular circuit breaker that can be handled uninterruptedly. The highest current valued tripping the circuit breaker in
conformity with a specifically stated tripping characteristic.
Reduced rated current, (Ir)
Specifically established, reduced value of In current for a regulated

time-dependent (thermal) release and that the circuit breaker can
handle continuously. Maximum setting is at value equal to In.
Changing Ir shifts the releases tripping characteristic along the
current axis. (Ir = k x In holds where k d 1)
Tripping time at a given Ir multiple, (tr)
Time after which circuit breaker will trip, if a current flows through it that
is equal to the given multiple of Ir. Changing tr shifts the tripping
characteristic along the time axis.
Actuating current of (selective) releases

time-independent delay, (Irmv)
Minimum current value causing the releases time-independent delay

to actuate.
Delay of time-independent delayed release, (tv)
If a current flows through the circuit breaker equal to at least Irmv but
not reaching Irm the circuit breaker will trip with time delay tv. Total
shut-off time is influenced by the tripping of the circuit breaker itself
and is about 10 20 ms longer.
Actuating current of time-independent

instantaneous, (Irm)
Minimum current value causing the time-independent instantaneous

release to actuate.
Rated operating current, (Ie)

EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.3
Rated operating current of device (switch-disconnector) is fixed by the

manufacturer with consideration for the rated operating voltage, rated
frequency, rated operation, utilization category and type of protective
cover, if that comes into consideration.
Rated normal current, (Iu)

EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.4
Current value set by the manufacturer and which the device can
handle in continuous operation, i.e. during a period longer than 8 hours
(weeks, months, or longer).
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, (Icu)

EN 60947-2; 2.15.1; 4.3.5.2.1
Ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity value expressed as the rms

value of the alternating component of the assumed short-circuit current
that the circuit breaker must be able to manage in the mode: 1x switching off of the short circuit and a following 1x make-break sequence.
After testing, the circuit breaker need not be able to conduct the rated
current uninterruptedly. Icu is set for the rated operating voltage at the
rated frequency and at the established power factor for alternating
current or at the time constant for direct current. Must fulfil the
condition: Icu t Ik
Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity, (Ics)

EN 60947-2; 2.15.2; 4.3.5.2.2
Value of the operating short-circuit breaking capacity expressed as

the rms value of the alternating component of the assumed short-circuit current that the circuit breaker must be able to manage in the
mode: 1x switching off of the short circuit and a following 2x makebreak
sequence. May also be expressed as a percentage of Icu. After
testing, the circuit breaker must be able uninterruptedly to conduct the
rated current and to switch off the overcurrent. Temperature increase
of the main terminals may be greater. Ics is set for the rated operating
voltage at the rated frequency and at the established power factor for
alternating current or at the time constant for direct current. Permitted:
Ics t Ik
Rated short-time withstand current, (Icw)

EN 60947-1; 4.3.6.1
EN 60947-2; 4.3.5.4
EN 60947-3; 4.3.6.1
Value of short-time withstand current specified by the manufacturer

that the device is able to handle without damage during a designated
time period (short-time delay). In case of alternating current, it is the
rms value of the alternating component of the assumed short-circuit
current Ip.
8
8/2
Siemens AG 2007
Appendix
Ordering notes
Logistics
With regard to delivery service, communications and environmental protection, our logistics service ensures "quality from the
moment of ordering right through to delivery". By designing our
infrastructure according to customer requirements and implementing electronic order processing, we have successfully optimized our logistics processes.
We are proud of our personal consulting service, on-time deliveries and 1-day transport within Germany.
Small orders
When small orders are placed, the costs associated with order
processing are greater than the order value. We recommend
therefore that you combine several small orders. Where this is
not possible, we unfortunately find it necessary to charge a processing supplement of 20.-- to cover our costs for order processing and invoicing for all orders with a net goods value of less
than 250.--.
To achieve this, we supply the preferred types marked with

} ex warehouse.
Electronic order processing is fast, cost-efficient and error-free.
Please contact us if you want to benefit from these advantages.
Orders for special designs

For ordering products that differ from the versions listed in the
catalog, the order number specified in the catalog must be supplemented with "Z"; the required features must be specified by
means of the alphanumeric order codes or in plain text.
8
8/3
Siemens AG 2007
Appendix
Further documentation
Overview
You will find all the latest information material, such as brochures, catalogs, manuals and operating instructions on lowvoltage, controls and distribution on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/info
Here you can order your copy of the available documentation or
download it in common file formats (PDF, ZIP).
We regard product support as just as important as the products

and systems themselves. Visit our Support site on the Internet for
a comprehensive range of material on SIRIUS, SENTRON and
SIVACON, such as
Catalogs available to order free of charge
Operating instructions and manuals for direct download
Online registration for seminars and events
Up-to-date answers to your queries and problems
Software upgrades and updates for fast download
Telephone assistance in more than 190 countries
Photos and graphics for external use
and much, much more - all conveniently and easily accessible.
We also provide further support for SIRIUS - SENTRON - SIVACON
Brochures, catalogs and CDs offer fast and more in-depth information
8
8/4
Siemens AG 2007
Appendix
Standards and approvals
Overview
Verification certificates and characteristic curves
To find the latest overview of the certificates available for our
low-voltage controls and distribution products, as well as other
technical documentation, please visit our Internet site at:
http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support
Product support: Approvals / Certificates
Product support: Characteristic curves
8
8/5
Siemens AG 2007
Appendix
Siemens contacts worldwide
At
http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner
you can find details of Siemens contact partners worldwide
responsible for particular technologies.
You can obtain in most cases a contact partner for
Technical Support,
Spare parts/repairs,
Service,
Training,
Sales or
Consultation/engineering.
You start by selecting a
Country,
Product or
Sector.
By further specifying the remaining criteria you will find exactly
the right contact partner with his/her respective expertise.
8
8/6
Siemens AG 2007
Appendix
Online services
A&D in the WWW
A detailed knowledge of the range of products and services

available is essential when planning and configuring automation
systems. It goes without saying that this information must always
be fully up-to-date.
The Siemens Automation and Drives Group (A&D) has therefore
built up a comprehensive range of information in the World Wide
Web, which offers quick and easy access to all data required.
Under the address
http://www.siemens.com/automation
you will find everything you need to know about products, systems and services.
Product selection using the Offline Mall of Automation and Drives
Detailed information together with convenient interactive

functions:
The Offline Mall CA 01 covers more than 80,000 products and
thus provides a full summary of the Siemens Automation and
Drives product base.
Here you will find everything that you need to solve tasks in the
fields of automation, switchgear, installation and drives.
All information is linked into a user interface which is easy to work
with and intuitive.
After selecting the product of your choice you can order at the
press of a button, by fax or by online link.
Information on the Offline Mall CA 01 can be found in the Internet
under
http://www.siemens.com/automation/ca01
or on CD-ROM or DVD.
Easy shopping with the A&D Mall
The A&D Mall is the virtual department store of Siemens AG in

the Internet. Here you have access to a huge range of products
presented in electronic catalogs in an informative and attractive
way.
Data transfer via EDIFACT allows the whole procedure from
selection through ordering to tracking of the order to be carried
out online via the Internet.
Numerous functions are available to support you.
For example, powerful search functions make it easy to find the
required products, which can be immediately checked for availability. Customer-specific discounts and preparation of quotes
can be carried out online as well as order tracking and tracing.
Please visit the A&D Mall on the Internet under:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall
8
8/7
Siemens AG 2007
Appendix
Customer support
Configuration and software engineering
Support in configuring and developing with customer-oriented

services from actual configuration to implementation of the automation project.2)
Technical support
.I
In the face of harsh competition you need optimum conditions to

keep ahead all the time:
A strong starting position. A sophisticated strategy and team for
the necessary support - in every phase.
Service & Support from Siemens provides this support with a
complete range of different services for automation and drives.
Tel.: +49 (0)180 50 50 222

Fax: +49 (0)180 50 50 223
(0.14 /min from the German
fixed network)
http://www.siemens.com/
automation/support-request
In every phase: from planning and startup to maintenance and

upgrading.
Our specialists know when and where to act to keep the productivity and cost-effectiveness of your system running in top form.
Online support
The comprehensive information

system available round the
clock via Internet ranging from
Product Support and Service &
Support services to Support
Tools in the Shop.
Service on site
Technical assistance
Support in the planning and designing of your project from detailed actual-state analysis,
target definition and consulting
on product and system questions right to the creation of the
automation solution.2)
Expert technical assistance1) for

Low-voltage controls and electrical installation.
With Service On Site we offer

services for startup and maintenance, essential for ensuring
system availability.
In Germany
0180 50 50 4442)
fixed network)
http://www.siemens.com/
automation/service&support
Technical consulting
Competent consulting in technical questions covering a wide

range of customer-oriented services for all our products and
systems.
Repairs and spare parts
Optimization and upgrading
Tel.: +49 (0) 9 11 8 95-59 00

Fax: +49 (0) 9 11 8 95-59 07
In the operating phase of a machine or automation system we

provide a comprehensive repair
and spare parts service ensuring the highest degree of operating safety and reliability.
In Germany
0180 50 50 4462)
fixed network)
To enhance productivity and

save costs in your project we offer high-quality services in optimization and upgrading.2)
E-Mail: technical-assistance
@siemens.com
1)
Contact:
Technical assistance for product selection Old/new coding
Competitor coding Special versions Special requirements Sales
promotion (Infoline).
Your regional contacts for sales support (prices, discounts, delivery times).
Technical Support for commissioning support and after-sales services.
8/8
2)
For country-specific telephone numbers go to our Internet site at:

http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
Siemens AG 2007
Appendix
Subject index
Page
Page
Alarm switch
Auxiliary switch
Page
3/5, 4/4
2/6, 2/35, 3/5, 4/4, 6/4, 6/38
2/7, 3/6, 3/58,4/5,

4/59, 6/5, 6/41
C
Circuit Breaker
Molded Case
3/1 ... 2/46, 3/1 ... 3/65,
4/1 ... 4/65, 5/1 ... 5/16, 6/1 ... 6/46
for Starter combination
2/5
for System protection
2/3
Circuit breaker
2/11 ... 2/34, 3/12 ... 3/39,
4/11 ... 4/39, 5/3 ... 5/5, 6/9 ... 6/24
Connection parts
for fixed-mounted circuit-breakers
Connecting sets
3/9
2/9
Shunt trip unit
2/6, 2/36, 3/5, 3/56, 4/4, 4/57,

6/4, 6/39
Signalling unit
5/4, 6/3, 6/37
Standard circuit breaker 3/11, 4/3, 4/10, 6/3, 6/8

Switch disconnector
2/5, 2/11 ... 2/34, 3/4,
3/12 ... 3/39, 4/11 ... 4/39, 5/3 ... 5/5, 6/3,
6/9 ... 6/24
Switches
3/55, 4/56, 5/3, 6/3
4/8, 6/6
T
Tester of ETU trip unit
Trip unit
D
Delay unit
7/2
3/11, 4/3, 4/10, 6/3, 6/8
2/46, 7/2
U
E
ETU trip unit
4/3, 5/3
I
Interlocks
2/8
6/4, 6/40
2/6, 2/36, 3/5, 3/57, 4/4,
4/58
W
Withdrawable design 3/8, 3/43, 4/7,4/43 ... 4/45,
5/3, 6/6, 6/25 ... 6/26
M
Manual operating mechanism
2/7
Mechanical interlocking 2/37 ... 2/46, 3/6, 3/59,

4/5, 4/60,6/5, 6/42
Motor drives
2/39

2/7, 2/8,
3/61 ... 3/65, 4/62 ... 4/65, 6/5, 6/43 ... 6/46
Accessories for
3/7
with storage spring
3/7
Mounting adapter
2/9, 3/8, 3/9

2/10
O
2/46, 3/3, 3/46,
4/46 ... 4/55, 5/6 ... 5/16, 6/3, 6/27 ... 6/36
P
Parallel switching
2/8, 2/37 ... 2/46, 3/6, 3/59,

4/5, 4/60, 6/42
Plug-in device
3/8, 3/40, 4/7, 4/40 ... 4/42
8
8/9
Siemens AG 2007
Appendix
Order number index
Order No.
Page
3VT1
3VT1 701-2DC36-0AA0
3VT1 701-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 701-2EC46-0AA0
3VT1 701-2EJ46-0AA0
3VT1 702-2DC36-0AA0
3VT1 702-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 702-2EC46-0AA0
3VT1 702-2EJ46-0AA0
3VT1 703-2DB36-0AA0
3VT1 703-2DC36-0AA0
3VT1 703-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 703-2EB46-0AA0
3VT1 703-2EC46-0AA0
3VT1 703-2EG46-0AA0
3VT1 703-2EJ46-0AA0
3VT1 704-2DA36-0AA0
3VT1 704-2DB36-0AA0
3VT1 704-2DC36-0AA0
3VT1 704-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 704-2EA46-0AA0
3VT1 704-2EB46-0AA0
3VT1 704-2EC46-0AA0
3VT1 704-2EG46-0AA0
3VT1 704-2EH46-0AA0
3VT1 704-2EJ46-0AA0
3VT1 705-2DA36-0AA0
3VT1 705-2DB36-0AA0
3VT1 705-2DC36-0AA0
3VT1 705-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 705-2EA46-0AA0
3VT1 705-2EB46-0AA0
3VT1 705-2EC46-0AA0
3VT1 705-2EG46-0AA0
3VT1 705-2EH46-0AA0
3VT1 705-2EJ46-0AA0
3VT1 706-2DA36-0AA0
3VT1 706-2DB36-0AA0
3VT1 706-2DC36-0AA0
3VT1 706-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 706-2EA46-0AA0
3VT1 706-2EB46-0AA0
3VT1 706-2EC46-0AA0
3VT1 706-2EG46-0AA0
3VT1 706-2EH46-0AA0
3VT1 706-2EJ46-0AA0
3VT1 708-2DA36-0AA0
3VT1 708-2DB36-0AA0
3VT1 708-2DC36-0AA0
3VT1 708-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 708-2EA46-0AA0
3VT1 708-2EB46-0AA0
3VT1 708-2EC46-0AA0
3VT1 708-2EG46-0AA0
3VT1 708-2EH46-0AA0
3VT1 708-2EJ46-0AA0
3VT1 710-2DA36-0AA0
3VT1 710-2DB36-0AA0
3VT1 710-2DC36-0AA0
3VT1 710-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 710-2EA46-0AA0
3VT1 710-2EB46-0AA0
3VT1 710-2EC46-0AA0
3VT1 710-2EG46-0AA0
3VT1 710-2EH46-0AA0
8/10
2/3
2/5
2/4
2/4
2/3
2/5
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/3
2/5
2/4
2/4
2/5
2/4
2/3
2/4
2/3
2/5
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/5
2/4
2/4
2/3
2/4
2/3
2/5
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/5
2/4
2/4
2/3
2/4
2/3
2/5
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/5
2/4
2/4
2/3
2/4
2/3
2/5
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/5
2/4
2/4
2/3
2/4
2/3
2/5
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/5
2/4
Order No.
Page
3VT1 710-2EJ46-0AA0
3VT1 712-2DA36-0AA0
3VT1 712-2DB36-0AA0
3VT1 712-2DC36-0AA0
3VT1 712-2EA46-0AA0
3VT1 712-2EB46-0AA0
3VT1 712-2EC46-0AA0
3VT1 712-2EG46-0AA0
3VT1 712-2EH46-0AA0
3VT1 712-2EJ46-0AA0
3VT1 716-2DA36-0AA0
3VT1 716-2DB36-0AA0
3VT1 716-2DC36-0AA0
3VT1 716-2DE36-0AA0
3VT1 716-2EA46-0AA0
3VT1 716-2EB46-0AA0
3VT1 716-2EC46-0AA0
3VT1 716-2EE46-0AA0
3VT1 716-2EG46-0AA0
3VT1 716-2EH46-0AA0
3VT1 716-2EJ46-0AA0
3VT1 792-2DC36-0AA0
3VT1 792-2DM36-0AA0
3VT1 792-2EC46-0AA0
3VT1 792-2EJ46-0AA0
2/4
2/3
2/4
2/3
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/5
2/4
2/4
2/3
2/4
2/3
2/5
2/4
2/4
2/4
2/5
2/5
2/4
2/4
2/3
2/5
2/4
2/4
3VT2
3VT2 725-2AA36-0AA0
3VT2 725-2AA46-0AA0
3VT2 725-2AA56-0AA0
3VT2 725-3AA36-0AA0
3VT2 725-3AA46-0AA0
3VT2 725-3AA56-0AA0
3/3
3/3
3/3
3/3
3/3
3/3
3VT3
3VT3 763-2AA36-0AA0
3VT3 763-2AA46-0AA0
3VT3 763-2AA56-0AA0
3VT3 763-3AA36-0AA0
3VT3 763-3AA46-0AA0
3VT3 763-3AA56-0AA0
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
3VT4
3VT4 710-3AA30-0AA0
3VT4 710-3AA38-0AA0
5/3
5/3
3VT5
3VT5 716-3AA30-0AA0
3VT5 716-3AA38-0AA0
6/3
6/3
3VT9
3VT9 100-1SC00
3VT9 100-1SD00
3VT9 100-1SE00
3VT9 100-1UC00
3VT9 100-1UD00
3VT9 100-1UE00
3VT9 100-2AB10
3VT9 100-2AB20
3VT9 100-2AH10
3VT9 100-2AH20
3VT9 100-3HA10
3VT9 100-3HA20
3VT9 100-3HB20
3VT9 100-3HC10
3VT9 100-3HD10
3VT9 100-3HE10
2/6
2/6
2/6
2/6
2/6
2/6
2/6
2/6
2/6
2/6
2/7
2/7
2/7
2/7
2/7
2/7
Order No.
3VT9 100-3HE20
3VT9 100-3HF20
3VT9 100-3HG10
3VT9 100-3HG20
3VT9 100-3HH10
3VT9 100-3HH20
3VT9 100-3HJ10
3VT9 100-3HJ20
3VT9 100-3MA00
3VT9 100-3MB00
3VT9 100-3MD00
3VT9 100-3ME00
3VT9 100-3MF00
3VT9 100-4ED30
3VT9 100-4PP30
3VT9 100-4RC00
3VT9 100-4RC30
3VT9 100-4TA00
3VT9 100-4TA30
3VT9 100-4TF30
3VT9 100-4TF40
3VT9 100-4TN00
3VT9 100-4TN30
3VT9 100-8CA30
3VT9 100-8CA40
3VT9 100-8CE00
3VT9 100-8CE30
3VT9 100-8HL00
3VT9 100-8LA00
3VT9 100-8LB00
3VT9 200-3HA10
3VT9 200-3HA20
3VT9 200-3HB20
3VT9 200-3HL00
3VT9 200-3MF00
3VT9 200-3MF10
3VT9 200-3MJ00
3VT9 200-3MJ10
3VT9 200-3ML00
3VT9 200-3ML10
3VT9 200-3MQ00
3VT9 200-3MQ10
3VT9 200-4ED30
3VT9 200-4EE30
3VT9 200-4PA30
3VT9 200-4PA40
3VT9 200-4RC00
3VT9 200-4RC30
3VT9 200-4TA30
3VT9 200-4TC00
3VT9 200-4TC30
3VT9 200-4TN30
3VT9 200-4WA30
3VT9 200-4WA40
3VT9 200-4WN00
3VT9 200-8BL00
3VT9 200-8BN00
3VT9 200-8CB30
3VT9 200-8CB40
3VT9 200-8LC10
3VT9 203-4TF00
3VT9 203-4TF30
3VT9 210-6AC00
3VT9 210-6AP00
3VT9 210-6AS00
3VT9 210-6BC00
Page
2/7
2/7
2/7
2/7
2/7
2/7
2/7
2/7
2/8
2/8
2/8
2/8
2/10
2/9
2/10
2/9
2/9
2/9
2/9
2/9
2/9
2/9
2/9
2/10
2/10
2/10
2/10
2/10
2/8
2/8
3/6
3/6
3/6
4/9
3/7
3/7
3/7
3/7
3/7
3/7
3/7
3/7
3/9
3/9
3/8
3/8
3/9
3/9
3/9
3/9
3/9
3/9
3/8
3/8
4/9
4/9
4/9
3/10
3/10
3/7
3/9
3/9
3/3
3/4
3/4
3/3
3/10
3/10
3/10
3/10
,
,
,
Siemens AG 2007
Appendix
Order number index
Order No.
3VT9 215-4TD00
3VT9 215-4TD30
3VT9 215-4TF00
3VT9 215-4TF30
3VT9 216-6AB00
3VT9 216-6AC00
3VT9 216-6AP00
3VT9 216-6AS00
3VT9 216-6BC00
3VT9 220-6AB00
3VT9 224-4TD00
3VT9 224-4TD30
3VT9 224-4TF00
3VT9 224-4TF30
3VT9 225-6AB00
3VT9 225-6AC00
3VT9 225-6AP00
3VT9 225-6AS00
3VT9 225-6BC00
3VT9 225-6DT00
3VT9 300-1SC00
3VT9 300-1Sd00
3VT9 300-1SE00
3VT9 300-1UC00
3VT9 300-1UC101)
3VT9 300-1UD00
3VT9 300-1UD101)
3VT9 300-1UE00
3VT9 300-1UE101)
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AC20
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AD20
3VT9 300-2AE10
3VT9 300-2AE20
3VT9 300-2AF10
3VT9 300-2AF20
3VT9 300-2AG10
3VT9 300-2AG20
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AH20
3VT9 300-2AJ00
3VT9 300-3HA10
3VT9 300-3HA20
3VT9 300-3HB20
3VT9 300-3HE10
3VT9 300-3HE20
3VT9 300-3HF20
3VT9 300-3HG10
3VT9 300-3HG20
3VT9 300-3HG30
3VT9 300-3HH10
3VT9 300-3HH20
3VT9 300-3HH30
3VT9 300-3HJ10
3VT9 300-3HJ20
3VT9 300-3MF00
3VT9 300-3MF10
3VT9 300-3MF20
3VT9 300-3MJ001)
3VT9 300-3MJ101)
3VT9 300-3ML00
3VT9 300-3ML10
3VT9 300-3MN00
3VT9 300-3MN10
3VT9 300-3MQ00
Page
3/5
3/5
3/5
3/5
3/5
3/5
3/5
3/5
3/5
3/5
3/5
3/5
3/5
3/5
3/5
3/5
3/5
3/5
3/5
3/5
3/5
3/5
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
3/6
3/6
3/6
3/6
3/6
,
,
,
,
,
3/6
3/6
,
,
3/6
3/6
3/7
3/7
3/10
,
,
,
,
,
3/9
3/9
3/9
3/9
3/3
3/3
3/4
3/4
3/3
3/3
3/9
3/9
3/9
3/9
3/3
3/3
3/4
3/4
3/3
3/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/4
4/5
4/5
4/5
4/5
4/5
4/5
4/5
4/5
4/5
4/5
4/5
4/5
4/5
4/5
4/6
4/6
4/9
4/6
4/6
4/6
4/6
4/6
4/6
4/6
Order No.
3VT9 300-3MQ10
3VT9 300-4ED30
3VT9 300-4EE30
3VT9 300-4PA30
3VT9 300-4PA40
3VT9 300-4PL00
3VT9 300-4RC00
3VT9 300-4RC30
3VT9 300-4TA30
3VT9 300-4TC00
3VT9 300-4TC30
3VT9 300-4TN30
3VT9 300-4WA30
3VT9 300-4WA40
3VT9 300-4WL00
3VT9 300-8CB00
3VT9 300-8CB30
3VT9 300-8CE00
3VT9 300-8CE30
3VT9 300-8LA00
3VT9 300-8LB00
3VT9 300-8LC10
3VT9 300-8LC20
3VT9 303-4TF00
3VT9 303-4TF30
3VT9 315-4TD00
3VT9 315-4TD30
3VT9 315-4TF00
3VT9 315-4TF30
3VT9 324-4TD00
3VT9 324-4TD30
3VT9 324-4TF00
3VT9 324-4TF30
3VT9 325-6AB00
3VT9 325-6AC00
3VT9 325-6AP00
3VT9 325-6AS00
3VT9 325-6BC00
3VT9 331-6AB00
3VT9 340-6AB00
3VT9 340-6AC00
3VT9 340-6AP00
3VT9 340-6AS00
3VT9 340-6BC00
3VT9 350-6AB00
3VT9 363-6AB00
3VT9 363-6AC00
3VT9 363-6AP00
3VT9 363-6AS00
3VT9 363-6BC00
3VT9 363-6DT00
3VT9 400-4RC30
3VT9 410-6AC00
3VT9 410-6AD00
3VT9 410-6AP00
3VT9 410-6DT00
3VT9 431-6AC00
3VT9 431-6AD00
3VT9 431-6AP00
3VT9 463-6AC00
3VT9 463-6AD00
3VT9 463-6AP00
3VT9 480-6AC00
3VT9 480-6AD00
3VT9 480-6AP00
3VT9 500-1SF00
Page
3/10
3/10
,
,
,
,
3/10
3/10
3/7 4/6
3/7
3/7
4/6
4/8
4/8
4/7
4/7
4/9
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/7
4/7
4/9
4/9
4/9
4/9
4/9
6/5
4/6
4/6
4/6
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
6/6
5/3
5/3
5/3
5/4
5/3
5/3
5/3
5/3
5/3
5/3
5/3
5/3
5/3
6/4
Order No.
3VT9 500-1SG00
3VT9 500-1SH00
3VT9 500-1SJ00
3VT9 500-1SK00
3VT9 500-1SL00
3VT9 500-1UF00
3VT9 500-1UG00
3VT9 500-1UH00
3VT9 500-1UJ00
3VT9 500-1UK00
3VT9 500-1UL00
3VT9 500-2AF00
3VT9 500-2AF10
3VT9 500-3HA10
3VT9 500-3HE10
3VT9 500-3HF10
3VT9 500-3HG10
3VT9 500-3HG20
3VT9 500-3HJ10
3VT9 500-3HL00
3VT9 500-3MF00
3VT9 500-3MF10
3VT9 500-3MF20
3VT9 500-3MQ00
3VT9 500-3MQ10
3VT9 500-4EF30
3VT9 500-4PL00
3VT9 500-4RC30
3VT9 500-4RD30
3VT9 500-4SA40
3VT9 500-4WA40
3VT9 500-4WL00
3VT9 500-6AE00
3VT9 500-8CC30
3VT9 500-8CD30
3VT9 500-8CE30
3VT9 500-8CF30
3VT9 500-8CG30
3VT9 500-8LC10
3VT9 500-8LC30
3VT9 500-8LC40
3VT9 510-6AC00
3VT9 510-6AD00
3VT9 510-6AP00
3VT9 512-6AC00
3VT9 512-6AD00
3VT9 512-6AP00
3VT9 516-6AC00
3VT9 516-6AD00
3VT9 516-6AP00
3VT9 516-6DT00
3VT9 524-4TF30
3VT9 524-4TG30
3VT9 5300-8BN00
3VT9 532-4TF30
3VT9 533-4TF30
3VT9 534-4TF30
3VT9 563-6AC00
3VT9 563-6AD00
3VT9 563-6AP00
Page
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/5
6/5
6/5
6/5
6/5
6/5
6/7
6/5
6/5
6/7
6/5
6/5
6/6
6/7
6/6
6/6
6/7
5/3 6/6
6/7
5/4 6/3
6/7
6/7
6/7
6/7
6/7
6/5
6/5
6/5
6/3
6/3
6/3
6/3
6/3
6/3
6/3
6/3
6/3
6/3
6/6
6/6
6/7
6/6
6/6
6/6
6/3
6/3
6/3
,
,
8
8/11
Siemens AG 2007
Appendix
Conditions of sale and delivery
Export regulations
Terms and conditions of sale and delivery
By using this catalog you can acquire hardware and software

products described therein from Siemens AG subject to the following terms. Please note! The scope, the quality and the conditions for supplies and services, including software products, by
any Siemens entity having a registered office outside of Germany, shall be subject exclusively to the General Terms and
Conditions of the respective Siemens entity. The following terms
apply exclusively for orders placed with Siemens AG.
For customers with a seat or registered office in Germany
The General Terms of Payment as well as the General Conditions for the Supply of Products and Services of the Electrical
and Electronics Industry shall apply.
For software products, the General License Conditions for Software Products for Automation and Drives for Customers with a
Seat or registered Office in Germany shall apply.
For customers with a seat or registered office outside of

Germany
The General Terms of Payment as well as the General Conditions for Supplies of Siemens, Automation and Drives for Customers with a Seat or registered Office outside of Germany shall
apply.
For software products, the General License Conditions for Software Products for Automation and Drives for Customers with a
Seat or registered Office outside of Germany shall apply.
General
The dimensions are in mm. In Germany, according to the German law on units in measuring technology, data in inches only
apply to devices for export.
Illustrations are not binding.
Insofar as there are no remarks on the corresponding pages,
- especially with regard to data, dimensions and weights given these are subject to change without prior notice.
The prices are in (Euro) ex works, exclusive packaging.
The sales tax (value added tax) is not included in the prices.
It shall be debited separately at the respective rate according to
the applicable legal regulations.
Prices are subject to change without prior notice. We will debit
the prices valid at the time of delivery.
Surcharges will be added to the prices of products that contain
silver, copper, aluminum, lead and/or gold if the respective basic official prices for these metals are exceeded. These surcharges will be determined based on the official price and the
metal factor of the respective product.
The surcharge will be calculated on the basis of the official price
on the day prior to receipt of the order or prior to the release
order.
The metal factor determines the official price as of which the
metal surcharges are charged and the calculation method used.
The metal factor, provided it is relevant, is included with the
price information of the respective products.
An exact explanation of the metal factor and the text of the

Comprehensive Terms and Conditions of Sale and Delivery are
available free of charge from your local Siemens business office
under the following Order Nos.:
6ZB5310-0KR30-0BA1
(for customers based in Germany)
6ZB5310-0KS53-0BA1
(for customers based outside Germany)
or download them from the Internet
http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall
(Germany: A&D Mall Online-Help System)
Export regulations
The products listed in this catalog / price list may be subject to

European / German and/or US export regulations.
Therefore, any export requiring a license is subject to approval
by the competent authorities.
According to current provisions, the following export regulations
must be observed with respect to the products featured in this
catalog / price list:
AL
Number of the German Export List

Products marked other than N require an
export license.
In the case of software products, the export designations of the relevant data medium must also
be generally adhered to.
Goods labeled with an AL not equal to N are
subject to a European or German export authorization when being exported out of the EU.
ECCN
Export Control Classification Number

Products marked other than N are subject to a
reexport license to specific countries.
In the case of software products, the export
designations of the relevant data medium must
also be generally adhered to.
Goods labeled with an ECCN not equal to N
are subject to a US re-export authorization.
Even without a label or with an AL: N or ECCN: N, authorization may be required due to the final destination and purpose for
which the goods are to be used.
The deciding factors are the AL or ECCN export authorization
indicated on order confirmations, delivery notes and invoices.
Errors excepted and subject to change without prior notice.
A&D/VuL_ohne MZ/En 05.09.06
7
8/12
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage
Siemens AG
Automation and Drives
Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution
Postfach 48 48
90327 NRNBERG
GERMANY
w w w. s i em e n s . c om/ a u tom a t i on
The information provided in this catalog contains descriptions or

characteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not always
apply as described or which may change as a result of further development
of the products. An obligation to provide the respective characteristics shall
only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of contract. Availability and
technical specifications are subject to change without notice.
All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their own
purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
PDF only: (E86060-K1836-A101-A1-7600)
Token fee: 0,00
Subject to change without prior notice | KG 1107 400 / 803030 | Siemens AG 2007
Siemens AG 2007

Catalogo Geral 3vt

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catalogo Geral 3vt

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catalog LV 36 November 2007

Contact your local Siemens

Delivery times (DT)

Preferred types are available immediately from

In exceptional cases, the actual delivery period

Price units (PU)

Packaging sizes (PS)

For price unit please refer to price list.

Siemens Automation and Drives.

Sharpen your competitive edge.

Integrated energy distribution from a

Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution.

3VT Molded-case circuit-breakers.

Siemens Automation and Drives.

More than 70,000 people aiming for the same goal:

Sharpen your competitive edge.

With Totally Integrated Automation (TIA), Siemens is the only

ERP Enterprise Resource Planning

MES Manufacturing Execution Systems

Industrial Software for

It goes without saying that you profit from Totally Integrated

SIRIUS Industrial Controls

SIMATIC Distributed I/O

SINAMICS Drive Systems

Integrated energy distribution from a single source.

Totally Integrated Power (TIP) brings together all the components

PROCESS FIELD BUS

Products and systems

Totally Integrated Power offers communication

Air conditioning system

OVER THE HOURS

Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution.

Extremely high demands are made on modern

SIRIUS industrial controls

SIRIUS Safety Integrated

SIRIUS modular system

Low-voltage power distribution with

SENTRON switching devices

configuring, visualizing and controlling your power distribution.

Software for power distribution

3VT Molded case circuit-breakers.

Today the economic success of

With the standard line of 3VT molded-case circuit-

Good reasons to choose

breakers (MCCB), Siemens offers an economic solution

Molded-case circuit-breakers 3VT:

for the entire power range from 10 A to 1,600 A, providng

breakers can be used as incoming and

outgoing circuit-breakers to distribute energy in low-

User-friendliness in planning, configuration,

installation and operation

Molded case circuit-breakers 3VT:

3VT1 Molded Case

3VT1 Molded Case

3VT1 Molded Case Circuit-Breakers up to 160 A

Models and accessories

3VT1 Molded Case Circuit-Breakers up to 160 A

Selection and ordering data

Set current of the inverse-time

Circuit Breakers for System protection

160 ... 240

200 ... 400

500 ... 1000

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.